Analog Communications Course Materials and Lecture Plans

CONTENTS
Page No.
1. ACADEMIC CALENDAR 3
2. ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS 5
3. ANTENNA & WAVE PROPAGATION 45
4. INTEGRTED CIRCUIT APPLICATIONS 89
5. ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENS & INSTRUMENTATION 137
6. CONTROL SYSTEMS 184
7. COMPUTER ORGANIZATION 233
Analog communications
COURSE
FILE
Department of
ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
VIGNANS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND
AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
VIGNAN HILLS, DESHMUKHI VILLAGE, POCHAMPALLY (MANDAL)
NALGONDA (DISTRICT) - 508284
Sponsored by
Lavu Educational Society
(Approved by AICTE and Affiliated to JNT University, Hyderabad)
COURSE
OBJECTIVES
Analog Communications Course Objectives
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course will provide students with the theoretical underpinnings of Analog
Communications, allowing them to work out quantitative values and theoretical descriptions for case
examples in Analog Communications.
Students completing this course should be able to:
Describe analog modulation and demodulation techniques.
Develop and compare the functional blocks and performance parameters of amplitude and angle
modulation and demodulation for communication systems.
Performance evaluation of communication systems in the presence of noise.
Develop Modern trends in communication systems and transmitter/receiver circuits.
Page 4
SYLLABUS
Analog Communications Syllabus
SYLLABUS
UNIT I
INTRODUCTION : Introduction to communication system, Need for modulation, Amplitude Modulation, Definition, Time
domain and frequency domain description, power relations in AM waves, Generation of AM waves, square law Modulator,
Switching modulator, Detection of AM Waves; Square law detector, Envelope detector.
UNIT II
DSB MODULATION : Double side band suppressed carrier modulators, time domain and frequency domain description,
Generation of DSBSC Waves, Balanced Modulators, Ring Modulator, Coherent detection of DSB-SC Modulated waves,
COSTAS Loop. Radio Transmitters-Classification of Transmitters, AM transmitter block diagram and explanation of each
block.
UNIT III
SSB MODULATION: Frequency domain description, Frequency discrimination method for generation of AM SSB
Modulated Wave, Time domain description, Phase discrimination method for generating AM SSB Modulated waves.
Demodulation of SSB Waves, Vestigial side band modulation: Frequency description, Generation of VSB Modulated wave,
Time domain description, Envelope detection of a VSB Wave pulse Carrier, Comparison of AM Techniques, Applications
of different AM Systems.
UNIT IV
ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS: Basic concepts, Frequency Modulation: Single tone frequency modulation,
Spectrum Analysis of Sinusoidal FM Wave, Narrow band FM, Wide band FM, Constant Average Power, Transmission
bandwidth of FM Wave-Comparison of FM a & AM systems.
UNIT V
ANGLE MODULATION METHODS:
Generation of FM Waves: Direct Method: Parametric Variation Method: Varactor Diode, Reactance Modulator, Indirect
method: Armstrong Method, Detection of FM Waves: Balanced Frequency discriminator, Zero crossing detector, Phase
locked loop, Foster Seeley Discriminator, Ratio detector, FM transmitter block diagram and explanation of each block.
UNIT VI
NOISE : Noise in Analog communication System, Noise in DSB& SSB System, Noise in AM System, Noise in Angle
Modulation System, Threshold effect in Angle Modulation System, Pre-emphasis & de-emphasis
UNIT VII
RECEIVERS : Radio Receiver - Receiver Types - Tuned radio frequency receiver, Superhetrodyne receiver, RF section
and Characteristics - Frequency changing and tracking, Intermediate frequency, AGC, FM Receiver, Comparison with AM
Receiver, Amplitude limiting.
UNIT VIII
PULSE MODULATION :Types of Pulse modulation, PAM (Single polarity, double polarity) PWM: Generation &
demodulation of PWM, PPM, Generation and demodulation of PPM
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Principles of Communication Systems H Taub & D. Schilling, Gautam Sahe, TMH, 2007 3rd Edition.
2. Principles of Communication Systems - Simon Haykin, John Wiley, 2nd Ed.,.
REFERENCES :
1. Electronics & Communication System George Kennedy and Bernard Davis, TMH 2004.
2. Analog Communications-KN Hari Bhat & Ganesh Rao, Pearson Publications, 2nd Edition-2008.
3. Communication Systems Second Edition R.P. Singh, SP Sapre, TMH, 2007.
4. Communication Systems- B.P.Lathi, BS Publication, 2006
WEBSITES: 1) http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
2) http://www.rfdesign.com
JOURNALS
1) International Journal of Digital & Analog Communication Systems
Page 6
STUDENTS
SEMINAR
TOPICS
Analog Communications Students Seminar Topics
STUDENTS SEMI NAR TOPICS
1. Amplitude modulation
2. Double side band suppressed carrier modulation
3. Single side band suppressed carrier
4. Vestigial side band modulation
5. AM Transmitters
6. FM Transmitters
7. AM Receivers
8. FM Receivers
9. Noise in all Modulation Systems
10. Pulse Amplitude Modulation
11. Pulse Width Modulation
12. Pulse Position Modulation
LECTURE PLAN
Analog Communications Lecture Plan
LECTURE PLAN
No of Method of
S.No NAME OF THE TOPIC Text books referred
Periods Teaching
UNIT I: INTRODUCTION
1 Introduction to communication system, 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
2 Need for modulation 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
3 Amplitude Modulation 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
4 Definition, Time domain and frequency domain description 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
5 power relations in AM waves, 1 Black board & OHP NTPEL
6 Generation of AM waves 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
7 square law Modulator 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
8 Switching modulator 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
9 Detection of AM Waves; 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
10 Square law detector 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
11 Envelope detector 1 OHP NTPEL
12 Demo of AM Waves using MATLAB 1 OHP MATLAB
13 Solving previous Question papers 1 Black board Previous question papers
UNIT-2: DOUBLE SIDE BAND
14 Double side band suppressed carrier modulators 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
15 time domain and frequency domain description 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
16 Generation of DSBSC Waves 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
17 Balanced Modulators, Ring Modulator 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
18 Coherent detection of DSB-SC Modulated waves 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
19 COSTAS Loop 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
20 Radio transmitters introduction 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
21 Classification of transmitters 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
22 AM transmitters 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
23 Demo on DSB-SC using MATLAB 1 OHP MATLAB
24 Solving previous Question papers 1 Black board Previous question papers
Page 10
UNIT-3: SSB MODULATION

25 Frequency domain description 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
26 Frequency discrimination method for generation of AM SSB Modulated Wave 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
27 Time domain description 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
28 Phase discrimination method for generating AM SSB Modulated waves 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
29 Demodulation of SSB Waves 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
30 Vestigial side band modulation: Frequency description 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
31 Generation of VSB Modulated wave, Time domain description 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
32 Envelope detection of a VSB Wave pulse Carrier 1 OHP Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
33 Comparison of AM Techniques 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
34 Applications of different AM Systems 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
35 Animations of SSB modulation 1 OHP NPTEL
36 Solving previous question papers 1 Black board Previous question papers
UNIT-4: ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS
37 Basic concepts, Frequency Modulation 1 Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
38 Single tone frequency modulation 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
39 Spectrum Analysis of Sinusoidal FM Wave 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
40 Narrow band FM, Wide band FM 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
41 Constant Average Power 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
42 Transmission bandwidth of FM Wave 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
43 Comparison of FM and AM 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
44 Animations of FM modulation 1 OHP NPTEL
UNIT-5: ANGLE MODULATION METHODS
46 Generation of FM Waves-introduction 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
47 Direct FM 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
48 Detection of FM Waves: Balanced Frequency discriminator 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
49 Zero crossing detector 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
50 Phase locked loop 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
51 FosteSeeley Discriminator 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
52 Ratio detectors 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
53 FM Transmitters 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
Page 11
54 Animations of FM de modulation 1 OHP NPTEL

UNIT-6: NOISE
56 Noise in Analog communication System- Nois in DSB& SSB System 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
57 Noise in AM System 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
58 Noise in Angle Modulation System 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
59 Threshold effect in Angle Modulation System 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
60 Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis 1 Black board Principle of CS-Simon Haykins
61 Animations of FM de modulation 1 OHP NPTEL
62 Solving previous question papers 1 Black board Previous Question papers
UNIT-7: RADIO RECEIVERS
63 Radio Receiver - Receiver Types 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
64 Tuned radio frequency receiver 1 OHP INTERNET
65 Superhetrodyne receiver- RF section and Characteristics 1 OHP INTERNET
66 Frequency changing and tracking, Intermediate frequency and AGC 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
67 FM Receiver 1 OHP internet
68 Comparison with AM Receiver, Amplitude limiting 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
69 Animations of Receivers 1 OHP INTERNET
70 Solving previous question papers 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
UNIT-8PULSE MODULATION TECHNIQUES
71 Types of Pulse modulation 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
72 PAM (Single polarity) 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
73 PAM (double polarity) 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
74 Generation & demodulation of PWM 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
75 Generation and demodulation of PPM 1 Black board Principles of CS-Taub and Schilling
76 Animations of PAM and PWM Modulation 1 OHP NPTEL
Page 12
LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Analog Communications Learning Objectives
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
UNIT: I INTRODUCTION
After completing the lesson, the student will be able to:
Understand the basic structure of a communication system

Describe need for modulation
Define amplitude modulation
Describe amplitude modulation
Define single tone modulation
Describe power relation in am waves
Describe am waves
List am modulators
Identify various am demodulators
Compare and contrast between square law detector and envelope detector
UNIT: II DSB MODULATION

Describe a double side band suppressed carrier system
List dsb-sc modulators
Compare and contrast time domain and frequency domain description
Describe the generation of dsb-sc waves
Compare and contrast balanced modulators and ring modulator
State coherent detection
Describe coherent detection of dsb-sc modulated waves
Describe a costas loop
Classify transmitters
Describe am transmitter blocks.
UNIT: III SSB MODULATION

State frequency domain description

List methods of generating ssb waves
Describe frequency discrimination method for generation of am ssb modulated wave
Describe phase discrimination method for generating am ssb modulated waves.
List demodulation of ssb waves
Define vestigial side band modulation
Describe generation of vsb modulated wave in time domain and frequency domain
Describe envelope detection of a vsb wave pulse carrier
Compare and contrast different am techniques
List the applications of different am systems
UNIT: IV ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS

List basic concepts of angle modulation

Define frequency modulation
State Single tone frequency modulation
Describe Spectrum Analysis of Sinusoidal FM Wave
State the difference between Narrow band FM and Wide band FM
Vignans Institute of Technology & aeronautical engineering III Year B.Tech. I Semester
Analog Communications Learning Objectives
Define Constant Average Power

Define Transmission bandwidth of FM Wave
Compare and contrast between AM and FM
UNIT: V ANGLE MODULATION METHODS

Describe generation of FM Waves

Define Direct FM
Describe Detection of FM Waves using direct method
Differentiate between direct method and indirect methods
State different types of frequency detectors
Describe Balanced Frequency discriminator
Describe Zero crossing detector and Phase locked loop, Comparison of FM & AM.
Describe FM transmitter block diagram
UNIT: VI NOISE
Define Noise
List types of Noise
Identify noise in Analog communication System
Calculate noise in various AM and FM systems
State Threshold effect in Angle Modulation System
Describe Pre-emphasis and de-emphasis
UNIT: VII RECEIVERS

Define a Radio Receiver

Classify Radio Receivers
Describe a Tuned radio frequency receiver
Define Super-heterodyning
Describe Superhetrodyne receiver
Identify RF section and its Characteristics
Define Intermediate frequency
Identify the effect of Frequency changing and tracking
State AGC
List FM Receivers
Compare and Contrast AM and FM Receivers
Define Amplitude limiting.
UNIT: VIII PULSE MODULATION

List types of Pulse modulation

Differentiate between Single polarity and double polarity PAM
Describe generation of PAM, PWM and PPM
Describe demodulation of PAM, PWM and PPM
OBJECTIVE
TYPE
QUESTIONS
Analog Communications Essay Questions
OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
UNIT-1: INTRODUCTION
1. The process of varying the parameters of high frequency signal according to low-frequency
signal is ___
2. The Bandwidth of Amplitude Modulation is ___
a) m b) m/2 c) m/4 d)2 m
3. The total transmitted power of Amplitude Modulation is ___
4. The efficiency of AM is ___
5. The AM is useful for ___
6. The disadvantage of AM is ___
7. By suppressing carrier component from AM wave, we have ___
a) SSB b) VSB c) DSB-SC d) None
8. The most useful detection method for the Detection of Modulating signal from AM is ___
9. AM is compared with following FM technique
a) NBFM b) WBFM c) Both d) None
10. If the Modulation index m of AM is 0.4 then what is the % of Modulation is ___
a) 50% b) 80% c) 20% d) 40%
11. Two modulating signals are modulated simultaneously with modulation indices 0.4 and 0.6 then
the resultant Modulation index of AM is ___.
a) 0.72 b) 0.73 c) 0.5 d) 0.6
12. The condition for AM is ___
a) Modulation index is greater than one b) Modulation index is less than one
c) Modulation index is equal to one d) modulation index is less than or equal to one
13. The percentage of Modulation of AM is 60% what is the Modulation index
a) 0.3 b) 0.6 c) 0.4 d) 0.2
14. The modulation index AM with carrier voltage Vc and modulating Voltage Vm is ___
a) Ka Vm/Vc b) Ka Vc/Vm c) Ka Vm d) Ka Vc
15. The carrier and modulating signals are Ac cos ct and Am cos ct the AM signal is ___
a) Ac(1+m cos ct) b)Ac (1+M cosm t) cos ct
c) Am(1+ m cos ct)cos mt d)Am ( 1 + m cos mt) cos ct
16. The unit of Ka is ___

17. The disadvantage of AM is ___
a) excess bandwidth and less transmitted power
b)les bandwidth and high transmitted power
c) excess bandwidth and high transmitted power
d) lesss bandwidth and less transmitted power
18. The modulation need for ___
a) frequency translation b) reduced the antenna size
c) for efficient transmission d) all
19. Amax and Amin are Maximum and Minimum values of envelope of the Modulated wave then the
modulation index of AM is ___
a)Amax +Amin/Amax+Amin. b) Amax + Amin / Amax.

c)Amax Amin/Amax + Amin d)A max Amin/ Amax
20. If the Modulation index is M then the ration of total sideband power to the total power in the
Modulated wave is ___
a)M2/ (2+M2) b)M2 /(1 +M2) c)M2 /(2-M2) d)M2 / (1-M2)
21. The total power in the two side-frequencies of the resulting AM wave is only ___ of the total
power in the modulat3ed wave.
22. The recovering of Modulating signal from Modulated signal is called as ___
23. With modulation index m is the upper side frequency of lower side band frequency power is
___
24. The unmodulated carrier Amplitude is Ac and Modulating signal is m(t) then Modulated carrier
Amplitude is ___
a) m2 Ac2 b) m2 Ac2/8 c) m2 Ac2/2 d) m2 Ac2/4
25. The total radiated power due to AM with modulation index m and carrier power Pc is ___
a)Pc (1+m2 /4) b)Pc (1 + m2 /2) c) Pc(1+m2) d)Pc(1+m2 /8)
26. The Amplitude Modulated signal is Ac(1 + 0.2cosmt) cosct, the modulation index of AM is
___
a)20% b)40% c) 80% d)60%
27. Low power AM Modulators are ___
28. A carrier is simultaneously modulated by two sine waves with modulation indicates of 0.3 and
0.6 of the carrier power is 10Kw, the total modulated power will be ___
29. For a signal amplitude Modulated to a depth of 100% by a sinusoidal signal the power is ___ as
power of un-modulated carrier.
a) 1.5 time b)2 times c)same d)2 times
30. AM is used for ___
a) Short radio wave Propagation b) Medium-radio wave Propagation
c) long radio wave Propagation d) a&b
ANSWERS
1) 2) d 3) 4) 5)Short 6) 7) C 8) 9) A 10)
Pc Envelop d
Modula wave and Excess
detection
X 100
tion medium bandwidt
wave h and
propagatio wastage
n of power
11) a 12)d 13)b 14)a 15)b 16)per 17)c 18)d 19)c 20)a
volt
21)b 22)de 23)d 24)b 25)b 26)a 27)Switchi 28)12.25 29)a 30)
modul
ng KW d
ation
or modulator
detect
ion
UNIT-II: DSB-SC MODULATION

1. Product modulatorsareused in___
(a)AM-FC (b)PM (c)DSB-SC (d)FM
2. The transmission Band width of DSB is ___

a) m b)2m c) m/2d) m/4
3. The DSB-SC Modulation is used for ___
4. The ring modulator is used for which type a modulation ___
a)AM B)SSB C)DSB-SC D)VSB
5. The DSB-SC expression with carrier signal c(t) and modulating signal m(t) is ___
6. The Balance Modulator generates the ___
a)SSB B) DSB-SC C) AM D)VSB
7. Frequency translation of DSB are ____
a)fcfm b)fc fm c) fc +fm d)fc + 2 fm
8. The power saving due to suppression of carrier in AM Modulated wave is
a)66.6% b)33% c) 44% d)100%
9. The saving in power in a DSB-SC system modulated at 80% is ____
a) 75.16% b)75.36% c)75.56% d)75.76%
10. In a low level modulation AM system, the following amplifiers can be used ____
a)Linear amplifiers. b) Harmonic generators
c) Class c power amplifier d) Class B tuned amplifiers
11. The radiated power of AM-Transmitter is 10Kw the power in the carrier for modulation index of
0.6 is a ____
a) 8.2Kw b) 8.47 Kw c) 9.26 Kw d) 9.6 Kw
12. The choice of the product RC is an envelope detector using a diode and an R-C circuit is govern
ed by ___
a) Both lowest and highest modulation frequencies.
b)Only the dept5h of modulation
c) The depth of modulation and the lowest modulation frequency. D) None.
13. In a higher level modulation AM system the following amplifiers can be used.
a) Linear amplifiers. b) Harmonic generations
c) Class C power amplifier d) Class B tuned amplifiers
ANSWERS
1) c 2)b 3)Point to 4) c 5)c(t) m(t) 6) b 7)a

point
communication
8)b 9)d 10)d 11)b 12) c 13) c
UNIT-III: SSB MODULATION
1.The bandwidth of VSB is ___
a) fm-fv b) fm + fv c)fm fv d) none
2. For Television signal broad casting the following modulation is useful

a) SSB b)DSB-SC c)VSB d)AM
3. For generation of SSB which method is very useful

a) Filter method b)Phase Method C) Weavers Method d)None
4. SSB is used for ___ communication

5. The bandwidth of SSB is ___
a) m b) 2 mc) m/2 d) m/4
6. The carrier and modulating signals are Ac cos ct and Am cos mt then SSB signal is
a) . Ac Am Cos ct b) Ac Am cos (c + m)t
c) 1/2. Ac Am cos mt d) . Ac Am cos (c + m)t
7. The power saving due to SSB is ___
8. The total transmitted power due to SSB with Modulation index ma and carrier power Pc is __
9. The carrier signal frequency is 100KHz and modulating signal frequency 1 KHz the upper sideband
frequency is ___
a) 100 KHz b) 101KHz c) 99 KHz d) 98 KHz
10. The carrier signal frequency is 100 KHz and modulating signal frequency 1 KHz then the upper
sideband frequency is____
a) 100 KHz b)101 KHz c)99 KHz d) KHz
11. For detection of modulating signal from SSB and VSB which type of detection is widely useful
__
12. Application of SSB is___
13. In VSB vestigial band is useful for ___
14. SSB system is used for ___
a) Short-wave transmission b) Long-wave transmission
c)Medium-wave transmission d) None.
15. In VSB vestigial side band is increased to the width of full side band then we have
a) SSB b) DSBSC C) AM d) NBF
16. In VSB vestigial side band is increased to the width of full side band then we have
a) SSB b) DSBSC C)AM d) NBF
17. Weavers method for the generation of SSB is combination of ___ and ___
18. VSB is expressed as ___
19. SSB can be used to transmit
a) two side bands b) one side band
c) one side band and vestigial side band d) Vestigial side band
20. VSB can be used to transmit
21 DSB can be used transmit
22. VSB can be used to transmit
a) audio signal b)vedio signal c) both d) neither a nor b
23. The total bandwidth of VSB is 5.5KHz , then modulation signal bandwidth is 5 KHz then the
vestigial band is ___
a)1KHz b) 0.5KHz c)1.5KHz d)2KHz
24. The total bandwidth of SSB is 5 KHz, then modulation signal bandwidth is ___
a)5 KHz b) 10KHz c) 15 KHz d) 20 KHz

25. The amplitude of the side band of SSB with carrier amplitude Ac and modulating amplitude
signal is Am
a) Ac Am b) c) d)
26. If you want to extract lower side band from DSB, the frequency range of filter is ___
a) fc fm f fc b) fc f fc + fc c) fc f fc fm d) fc +fm f fc
27. If you want extract upper side band from DSB, the frequency range of filter is
a) fc fm f fc b) fc f fc + fc c) fc f fc fm d) fc +fm f fc
ANSWERS
1)b 2) c 3)b 4) line 5) a 6) d 7) 83.3% 8) 9)b
communication
10)c 11)coherent 12)for 13) audio 14)c 15)b 16)a 17) filter and 18) Acm(t)
detection frequency signal phase method
multiplexing cosct -
Acms(t) sin
c t
19)b 20)c 21)a 22)c 23)b 24)a 25)c 26)a 27)b
UNIT-IV: ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS

1. The angle of the carrier signal varies according to the modulating signal is ____ modulation.
2. The instantaneous frequency of the FM is with carrier frequency fc and
3. Modulating signal m(t) is.
a) fi=fc + Kf m(t). b) fi = fc - Kf m(t) c) fi = fc Kf m(t) d) fc - m(t)
4. The relation between angular frequency and is
a) =d /dt b) =d /dt c) =d2 /dt2 d) =d2/dt2
5. The FM Signal with carrier signal Accosct and modulating signal Amcosmt
6. and modulating index B of FM is. (
a) Ac cos (ct + Am sinmt ) b) Ac cos (ct + Am cosmt )
c) Ac cos (ct + sinmt ) d) Ac cos (ct + cosmt )
7. lf the modulating signal is Amcosmt then the Modulation index Of FM is ___
a) Kf Am/ fm b) Kf Am/ m C) Kf Amfm C) all of the above.
8. If the Modulation index is according to Carsons rule the bandwidth is
a) 2 fm b) 2 +fm c) 2fm ( +1) d) 2fm ( -1)
9. The phase of the carrier signal varies according to the Modulating signal is ___ Modulation.
10. The PM signal with carrier signal Ac cos ct and modulating signal m(t) is
a) Ac cos (ct + Kp m(t) ). b) Ac cos (ct + Kmm(t)dt ).
c) Ac cos (ct - Kp m(t) ). d) Ac cos (ct - Kmm(t)dt ).
11. As per standards the maximum frequency deviation is _____
a).50 KHz b) 75 KHz c). 100 KHz d) 125 KHz
12. The modulation index of FM less than one then the type of FM is ___
13. For = 2 the total no of side frequencies are ___
14. The modulating signal frequency is 5 KHz. The frequency deviation is 50 KHz.
15. Then the modulation index is ___

a) 20 b) 10 c) 15 d) 25.
16. The modulation index in terms of frequency deviation and modulation
17. signal frequency fm is ___
a) f / fm b) fm /f c) 1 + f / fm d) 1 + fm /f
18. Which one is the correct relation?
a). BT = 2(fm + f) b). BT = 2 fm ( + f) c). BT = 2 f (1+1/ ) d). all.
19. For =5 what are the total number of side frequencies ____.
20. For WBFM, the modulation index of FM is ____
21. The Application of NBFM is ___
22. The application of WBFM is ___
23. For NBFM, the number of side frequencies are ____
24. The NBFM is compared with ___ Modulation.
a) SSB-SC b) DSB-SC c) AM d)VSB
25. The FM signal is Ac cos (ct + 0.5 sin 2 * 1000 t) then the frequency deviation is ___
a) 1500 Hz. b) 1000 Hz c) 500 Hz d) 1250 Hz.
26. The FM signal is Ac (cos (ct + sin mt) and its frequency deviation is 200 Hz. Then the
modulating signal frequency is ___
a) 400 Hz b) 100 Hz. c) 200 Hz d) 300 Hz.
27. The power of FM signal with carrier amplitude Ac and Bessel functions Jn () is ___
a) A2C J2n () b) 1/2 A2C J2n () c) A2c d) b & c.
28. The frequency sensitivity of FM is 10 KHz per volt and modulating signal amplitude is 5v then
frequency deviation is ___
a) 25 KHz b) 50 KHz c) 100 KHz d) 150 KHz.
29. The Application of phase modulation is _____
30. The FM signal is Ac cos (ct + 0.2 sin 50t) and frequency sensitivity parameter is 1 Hz/v then
the modulating signal is ___
a) Cos 50t b) 2 Cos 50t c) 5 Cos 50t d) 4 Cos 50t
31. The Maximum frequency deviation of NBFM is _____
32. The WBFM is application in ____ frequency range ___
a) VHF b) LHF c) HF d) SHF
33. WBFM is generated from NBFM using ____
a) Frequency division. b) Frequency Multiplier.
c) Mixer d) None.
34. The most useful method for the generation of WBFM is ____.
a) Filter Method b) Phase Method.
c) Filter method and Phase method d) none.
35. The modulating signal frequency range of NBFM is ___
36. An FM signal with bandwidth, is passed through a frequency tippler, then the of the output
signal is ____
37. In WBFM spectrum the maximum frequency deviation is ___
a) 15 KHz b) 75 KHz c) 200 KHz d) 5.2 MHz
38. In the generation of Modulated signal, a varactor diode can be used for ___.
a) AM b) FM c) PM d) Both AM and PM.
39. FM signal is 10 cos (2105t + 15 sin 2100t) with Modulating signal, m(t) = 5 cos 2100t. Then
the FM bandwidth is ___
a) 0.1 KHz b) 1 KHz c) 3.2 KHz d) 100 KHz
40. The maximum frequency deviation for NBFM is ___
a)l0K b)15K c)5K d)20K
ANSWERS
1) Angle 2) a 3) a 4) c 5) a 6) c 7) Phase 8) a 9) b 10)
modulation modulation NBFM
11) 8 12) b 13) a 14) d 15) 16 16) 17) Mobile 18) 19) 20) c
>> 1 Radio 2
communication,
broadca
police wireless, sting
ambulance, taxi
cabs, short range
VHF, ship to
shore
21) c 22) c 23) b 24) b 25) to 26) c 27) 5 KHz 28) a 29) 30) a
avoid the b
distortion
due to
interfacing
signal
31) 0 to 5 32) 3 33) b 34) b 35) c 36) c 37) c 38) d 39) c 40)c
K
UNIT-V:ANGLEMODULATONMETHODS
1. Direct method for generating frequency modulated signal is using
a) FET b) BJT c) Varactor diode d) All
2. 2. ln direct method of FM the electronic device is ___to tuned circuit
a) Series b) Parallel c) Both d) None 1
3. For generating WBFM from MBFM the multiplication factors are
a)2&.3 b)2&.5 c)2&.4 d)4&.3
4. WBFM is generated using NBFM modulator by using ____ method
5. The slope detector is used for converting ___
a) FM to AM b) A to FM c) FM to PM d) PM to FM
6. Balanced slope detector uses___
a) single tuned circuit b) two tuned circuits
c) four tuned circuits d) three tuned circuits
7. The advantage of balanced slope detector is____
8. Drawback of slope detector is ____
9. Ratio detector is widely used as FM detector because of
a) it gives an excellent noise free output b) requries no limitter

c) Fewer components are required d) all
10. Drawback of ratio detector is ____
11. Foster-Seley discriminator uses
a) single tuned circuit b) double tuned circuit
c) both d) None
12. Faster-Seley discriminator response curve is
a) Linear b) Non-linear c) Both d) None
13. Linearity of response curve of ratio detector is inferior to ____ discriminator
14. The response curve of slope detector is
a) Linear b) non-linear c) both d) None
15. RC capacitive reactance tube behaves as capacitance of value
a) CR b) gm CR c) gm /CR d) 1/ gm CR
16. Capacitive reactance tube using RC network, its is so arranged that:
a)R << c b)R >> c c)R= 1/c d) 1/ c
17. RC inductive reactance tube it is so arranged that:
a)R << c b)R >> c c)R= 1/c d) 1/ 10c
18. Inductive reactance tube using RC network behaves as an inductance of value ___
a) CR b) gm CR c) gm /CR d) 1/ gm CR
19. RC capacitive reactance FET behaves as capacitance of value ___
a) CR b) gmCR c) CR/gm d) 1/gmCR
20. In capacitive reactance FET, it is so arranged that___
a) Xc >>R b) Xc << R c) Xc= R d) Xc = 10R
21. In RC inductive reactance FET, it is so arranged that___
a) Xc >>R b) Xc << R c) Xc= R d) Xc = 10R
22. Inductive reactance FET using RC network behaves as an inductance of value:
a) CR b) gm CR c) CR/ gm d) 1/ gm CR
ANSWERS
1)d 2)b 3)a 4)Filter 5)a 6)b 7)avoidsthe 8)Amplitude
method amplitude
variations
variations
9)d 10)Long 11)b 12)a 13)Faster- 14)a 15)b 16)a
period Seley
variationin
signal
strength
17)b 18)b 19)b 20)a 21)b 22)c
UNIT-VI:NOISE
1. Base band communication system output signal to noise ratio is ____
a) PR/2WNO b) PR/WNO c) PR/4WNO d) PR/8WNO
2. The output SNR of DSB is ___
a)PR/2WNO b) PR/WNO c) PR/4WNO d) PR/8WNO
3. The output SNR of SSB is ___
a) PR/2WNO b) PR/WNO c) PR/4WNO d) PR/8WNO
4. The output SNR of DSB compared with output SNR of SSB is ___
a) greater b) smaller c) equal d) none
5. The output SNR of AM with modulation index m is ___

a) (m2/1+m2) (S/N)b b) (m2/1-m2)(S/N)b c) (m2/2+m2)(S/N)b d) (m2/2-m2)(S/N)b
6. The band pass n noise is expressed as ___
7. The envelope of band pass noise is ___
8. The phase of band pass noise is ___
9. The output of SNR of FM with modulation index is ___
a) 2(S/N)b b) 3/2 2(S/N)b c) 1/2 2(S/N)b d) 3 2(S/N)b
10. The output SNR of PM with modulation index is ___
a) 2(S/N)b b) 3/2 2(S/N)b c) 1/2 2(S/N)b d) 3 2(S/N)b
11. The received noise component after demodulation in DSB case is
a) in-phase component b) quadrature component c) both d) none
12. The received noise component after demodulation in SSB case is ___
13. The received noise component after demodulation in AM case is ___
14. The received noise component after demodulation in FM case is
a) in-phase component b) quadrature component c) both d) None
15. The received noise component after demodulation in PM case is
a) in-phase component b) quadrature component c) both d) None
16. The output noise power of DSB is ___
a) WNO b) 2 WNO c) 4 WNO d) None
17. The output noise power of SSB is ___
a) 2WNO b) 4 WNO c) WNO d) None
18. 18 The output noise power of AM is ___
a) WNO b) 2 WNO c) 4 WNO d) None
19. The output noise power of PM is___
a) WNO /A2C b) WNO /2A2C c) 2WNO /A2C d) WNO /3A2C
20. The function of pre-emphasis is ___
21. The function of de-emphasis is similar to ___filter
a) low pass b) high bass c) band pass d) band rejection
22. The function of pre-emphasis is similar to
a) low pass b) high bass c) band pass d) band rejection
23. The de-emphasis is used in
a) transmitter b) receiver c) both d) Neither a or b
24. The pre-emphasis is used in ___
a) transmitter b) receiver c) both d) Neither a or b
25. The threshold effect in demodulation is ___
ANSWERS
1)b 2) c 3) d 4) c 5) a 6) ni(t) 7) 8) arc. 9) d
cosct- Tan( nQ(t)
nq(t)sinct /nI(t))
10) a 11) a 12) b 13) a 14) c 15) c 16) b 17) c 18) b
19) c 20) 21) b 22) a 23) b 24) a 25) the rapid fall on (S/N)b when the
boosted the
(S/N0o fall below at a particular level
high
frequency
signal
UNIT-VII: RECEIVERS
1. The image channel rejection in a super heterodyne receiver comes from
a) IF stage only b) RF stage only
c) detector and RF stage only d) detector, RF and IF stages only
2. The main advantage of super-heterodyne receiver is ___
(a) simple circuit (b) better tracking
3. improvement in selectivity and sensitivity (d) better alignment
4. The received signal frequency of a super-heterodyne receiver having IF = 456 KHz, is 1
MHz. The corresponding image signal is
a) within its medium band (b) outside the medium band
(c) depends on modulation index (d) depends on modulating frequency
5. The resonant frequency of an RF amplifier is 1 MHz and its bandwidth is 10 kHz. The Q-
factor will be ___
(a) 10 (b) 100 (c) 0.01 (d) 0.1
6. A ___ is an electronic circuit that picks up a desired modulated radio frequency signal, and
recovers the base band sgnal from it.
a) radio transmitter b) amplifier c) radio receiver d) attenuator
7. 6.The disadvantage of TRF receiver is ___
a) poor selectivity b) high gain c) no signal d) all of the above
8. The radio waves contain electrical energy in the form of ____
9. 8.The process of selecting the desired signal and rejecting the unwanted signal is called ____
a) sensitivity b) reproduction c) amplification d)detectin
10. ___ is the process of recovering a baseband signal from a modulated carrier
11. ___ is the process by which an electrical signal is converted into a desired physical message.
12. TRF receiver works satisfactorily at ___ wave frequencies
a) very high b) medium c) high d) all of the above
13. 12.The performance of a receiver is judged from its various features such as ___
a) selectivity b)sensitivity c) fidelity d) all of the above
14. ___ is the receivers ability to distinguish between two adjacent carrier frequencies
15. The ability of a receiver to detect the weakest possible signal is known as ___
16. The ability of a receiver to reproduce faithfully all frequency components present in the
baseband signal is called ___
17. The RF amplifier in a radio receiver is a class ___ tued voltage amplifier
a) class A b) class B c) class C d) class D
18. 17.Hetrodyning is a process of ___ translation.
19. The relation between quality factor, Q, resonant frequency, fo and band width, B is given by
__
20. 19.In super-heterodyne receiver al the incoming carrier frequencies are converted into fixed
IF frequency of ___ KHz
a) 124 b) 245 c) 356 d) 455
21. 20. The adventages of TRF receiver are ___
a) simpler b) cheaper c) both a and b d) none of the above
ANSWERS
1)a 2)c 3) a 4) b 5) a 6) a 7)electromagnetic 8)a 9)d 10) b
waves
11)b 12)d 13) a 14) b 15) c 16) c 17)frequency 18)q=fo/B 19)d 20) c
UNIT-VIII: PULSE MODULATION

1. The maximum permissible distance between two samples of a 2 KHz signal is
(a) 1000 sec (b) 500 sec (c) 250 sec (d) None of the above
2. Pick the odd man out
(a) PWM (b) PPM (c) PDM (d) PLM
3. The main advantage of TDM over FDM is that it
(a) needs less power (b) needs less bandwidth
(c) needs simple circuitry (d) gives better S/N ratio
4. The PWM needs
(a) more power than PPM (b) more samples per second than PPM
(c) more bandwidth than PPM (d) none of the above
5. The PAM signal can be detected by ___
(a) bandpass filter (b) bandstop filter (c) high pass filter (d) low pass filter
6. In the present day standard digital voice communication, the amplitude of the voice signal is sampled
at a rate of around
(a) 2000 samples/sec (b) 800 samples/sec (c) 16000 samples/sec (d) 8000 samples/sec
7. Four independent messages have bandwidths of 100 Hz, 100 Hz, 200 Hz, and 400 Hz, respectively.
Each is sampled at Nyquist rate, and samples are Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) and transmitted.
The transmitted sample rate (in Hz) is ____
(a) 800 (b) 1600 (c) 400 (d) 3200
8. Flat-top sampling leads to ____
(a) an aperture effect (b) aliasing (c) loss of signal (d) none
9. Aliasing occurs, when the Nyquist rate is ___
(a) 2 fm (b) 3 fm (c) 2.5 fm (d) 1.2 fm

10. A PAM signal can be detected by using ___
(a) an ADC (b) an integrator (c) a bandpass filter (d) a highpass filter
STATE TRUE OR FALSE

11. The guard time between pulses increases transmission efficiency
(a) True (b) False
12. Noise can be reduced by increasing sampling rate
(a) True (b) False
13. TDM system is more immune to interchannel cross-talk as compared to FDM system.
(a) True (b) False
14. ___ is used for pulse width modulation
a) 741 b) 555 timer c)8085 d) 74x138
15.The holding circuit is used in ___ of PAM signals
a) generation b) demodulation c) both a and b d) none
16. The function of the low pass filter in PAM demodulation is ___
a) to smooth the pulses b) to allow only high frequencies
c) to attenuate the low frequency signals d) all of the above
17. PPM can be generated from ___ signals
a) PAM b) PWM c) both a and b d) none
18) The pulse modulation technique in which the width of the carrier is varied according to the
instantaneous value of the message signal is called ___
19. The minimum band width required to transmit the PAM signal with frequency fm is ___
a) fm b) 2fm c) 4fm d) 8fm
20. In pulse modulation system, the carrier wave is ___ and the message wave is ____
a) square, square b) square, sinusoidal c) sinusoidal, square d) sinusoidal, sinusoidal
ANSWERS
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (a) 9. (d) l0. (b)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14) b 15) b 16) a 17) b 18) pulse 19) b 20) b
width
modulatin
ESSAY TYPE
QUESTIONS
ESSAY TYPE QUESTIONS
UNIT-I: INTRDOUCTION
1. a) With necessary expressions, waveforms and spectrums, Explain AM for an arbitrary
baseband signal m(t).
b) The output power of an AM transmitter is 1KW when sinusoidally modulated to a
depth of 100%. Calculate the power in each side band when the modulation depth is
reduced to 50%.
2. a) What are the main objectives of a communication system design? What are the primary
resources of any communication system.
b) The RC load for a diode envelope detector consists of a 1000 pF capacitor in parallel
with a 10-K resistor. Calculate the maximum modulation depth that can be handled for
sinusoidal modulation at a frequency of 10 KHz if diagonal peak clipping is to be
avoided.
c) A broadcast AM transmitter radiates 50 KW of carrier power. What will be the radiated
power at 85 % of modulation and what is the side band power?
3. a) Draw the one cycle of AM wave and calculate the modulation index of it in terms of
Vmax and Vmin voltages.
b) A modulating signal consists of a symmetrical triangular wave having zero dc
component and peak to peak voltage of 12V. It is used to amplitude modulate a carrier
of peak voltage 10V. Calculate the modulation index and the ratio of the side lengths
L1/L2 of the corresponding trapezoidal pattern.
c) The rms antenna current of an AM transmitter is 10 A when un-modulated and 12 A
when sinusoidally modulated. Calculate the modulation index.
Vmax and Vmin voltages
b) The rms antenna current of an AM transmitter is 10 A when un-modulated and 12 A
when sinusoidally modulated. Calculate the modulation index.
5. a) Explain the collector modulation method for generating AM wave with a neat circuit
diagram and waveforms.
b) An AM amplifier provides an output of 106 W at 100% modulation. The internal loss is
20 W
i. What is un-modulated carrier power?
ii. What is the side band power?
6. a) Write AM equation. Define modulation index, and percentage modulation.
b) Define under-modulation and over-modulation. Explain why over modulation is

undesirable.
c) The output of a diode envelope detector is fed through a dc blocking capacitor to an
amplifying stage, which has an input resistance of 10 K. If the diode detector load
resistor is 5 K, determine the maximum depth of sinusoidal modulation the detector can
handle without negative peak clipping.
7. a) Explain operation of square law detector with circuit diagram and waveforms.
b) An AM transmitter has un-modulated carrier power of 10 KW. It can be modulated by

sinusoidal modulating voltage to a maximum depth of 40%, without overloading. If the
maximum modulation index is reduced to 30%. What is the extent up to which the un
modulated carrier power can be increased to avoid over loading.
Vmax and Vmin voltages.
b) A modulating signal consists of a symmetrical triangular wave having zero dc
component and peak to peak voltage of 12V. It is used to amplitude modulate
9. a) Define communication. Explain with block diagram the basic communication system.
Write about modern communication system.
b) A carrier wave of frequency 10 MHz and peak value of 10 V is amplitude modulated by
a 5 KHz sine wave of amplitude 6 V. Determine the modulation index and draw the one
sided spectrum of modulated wave.
10. a) An AM wave is given by s(t) = 25(1 + 0.7 cos 5000t - 0.3 cos 10000t)sin 5*106 t.
i. What are the amplitudes and frequencies of the carrier and the side bands?
ii. Draw the one sided amplitude spectrum.
iii. Determine the bandwidth.
b) A diode envelope detector with a load resistance R = 250 K in parallel with a capacitor
C = 100 pF is used to detect an AM carrier with 60 % modulation. Find the highest
modulation frequency that can be detected without distortion.
UNIT-II: DSB MODULATION

1. a) Draw the circuit diagram for balanced ring modulator and explain its operation
indicating all the waveforms and spectrums.
b) In an AM-SC system, modulating signal is a single tone sinusoid 4 cos 2_ 103t, which
modulates a carrier signal 6 cos 2_106t. Write the equation of modulated wave. Plot the
two sided spectrum of the modulated wave. Calculate the amount of power transmitted.
2. Considering the modulating and carrier waves as sinusoids, Explain the single tone
modulation and demodulation of DSB-SC wave with necessary expressions, waveforms
and spectrums and explain how only one side band is necessary for transmission of
information
3. a) Explain about the quadrature null effect of coherent detector.

b) In DSB-SC, suppression of carrier so as to save transmitter power results in receiver
complexity - Justify this statement.
4. a) Explain the DSB-SC generation by balanced modulator using diodes.

b) The modulating signal in an AM-SC system is a multiple-tone signal given by m(t) =
A1 cos 1t + A2 cos 2t + A3 cos 3t. The signal m(t) modulates a carrier Ac cos ct.
Plot the single sided spectrum and find the bandwidth of the modulated signal. Assume
that 3 > 2 > 1 and A1 > A2 > A3 .
5. Explain the operation of Costas loop for demodulating DSB-SC waves.

6. a) Explain the concept of frequency translation using the spectrum of DSB-SC wave.
b) For the balanced ring modulator circuit, the carrier input frequency fc = 500kHz and
modulating input signal frequency ranges from 0 to 5 kHz. Determine output frequency
range and output frequency for a single input frequency of 3.4 KHz.
7. a) Consider the wave obtained by adding a non coherent carrier Ac cos (2fc t + ) to
DSB-SC wave m(t) cos (2 fc t ) where X (t) is the message waveform. This waveform
is applied to an ideal envelope detector. Find the resulting detector out put. Evaluate the
output for.
i. = 0 and
ii. 6= 0 and |X (t)| << Ac/2.
b) Explain the DSB-SC generation by balanced modulator using FET amplifiers.
8. a) Explain the DSB-SC generation by balanced modulator using FET amplifiers.

b) The output current of a 60 % AM generator is 1.5 A. To what value will this current
rise if the generator is modulated additionally by another audio wave, whose
modulation index is 0.7? What would be the percentage of power saving if the carrier is
suppressed before transmission took place?
9. a) Classify radio transmitters in detail.

b) Compare low level modulation and high level modulation of radio transmitters.
10. a) Classify radio transmitters according to the type of modulation and according to the
frequency range involved.
b) With the help of block diagram explain AM transmitter with modulation at low carrier
power level.
11. a) Discuss about the requirements of carrier frequency with respect to a radioTransmitter.
b) A carrier wave of 1MHz frequency and amplitude of 3volts is frequency modu-
lated by a sinusoidal modulating signal frequency of 500Hz and of peak ampli-
tude of 1volt.The frequency deviation is 1Khz.The peak level of the modulating
wave form is changed to 5volts and the modulating frequency is changed to
2KHz.Write the expression for the new modulated wave.
UNIT-III: SSB MODULATION
1. a) Describe the time domain band-pass representation of SSB with necessary sketches.
b) Find the percentage of power saved in SSB when compared with AM system.
2. A synchronous detection of SSB signal shows phase and frequency discrepancy.

Consider S(t) = is an SSB
signal.
The signal is multiplied by the locally generated carrier cosct and then passed
through a low-pass filter.
3. a) Prove that the modulating signal can be completely recovered if the cut-off frequency of the
filter is fN < fo < 2fc.
b) Determine the recovered signal when the multiplying signal is cos[c t+ ].
c) Determine the recovered signal when the multiplying signal is cosct.
4. a) Why VSB system is widely used for TV broadcasting - Explain?

b) An AM transmitter of 1KW power is fully modulated. Calculate the power transmitted if it
is transmitted as SSB.
c) Calculate the filter requirement to convert DSB signal to SSB Signal, given that the two side
bands are separated by 200HZ. The suppressed carrier is 29MHZ.
5. Describe the single tone modulation of SSB. Assume both modulating and carrier signals are
sinusoids. Write SSB equation and plot all the waveforms and spectrums.
6. a) Why SSB transmission is the preferred than DSB-SC?

b) i. Prove that the signal s(t) = S(t)
= is an SSB signal (fc >> fN),
where c = 2fc, carrier angular frequency and i = 2fi is modulating angular frequency.
Identify the side band.
ii. Obtain an expression for missing side band.
iii. Obtain an expression of the total DSB-SC signal.
7. a) Explain the Third method of generating SSB modulated waves.

b) Explain the coherent detection of SSB signals.
8. a) Explain the envelope detection of VSB wave plus carrier.

b) Calculate the percentage power saving when the carrier and one of the sidebands are
suppressed in an AM wave modulated to a depth of
i. 100 %
ii. 50 % .
9. Explain with block diagram, the phase discrimination method of generating SSB modulated
waves.
10. a) Explain about Diagonal Clipping in a diode detector. How to avoid it?
b) A 45Volts(rms) sinusoidal carrier is amplitude modulated by a 30Volts(rms)
sinusoidal base band signal. Find the Modulation index of the resulting signal.
UNIT-IV: ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS
1. a) Describe generation of FM carrier by Transistor reactance modulator with necessary diagrams.

b) Compare the phasor diagram of narrow band FM signal and AM signal and discuss about the
similarities and differences of the two signals.
2. a) FM Give the procedure to determine the effective bandwidth of an signal.

b) Which method of FM signal generation is the preferred choice, when the stability of the carrier
frequency is of major concern? Discuss about the method in detail.
3. a) An FM wave with modulation index = 1 is transmitted through an ideal band pass filter with
mid band frequency fc and bandwidth is 5fm, where fc is the carrier frequency and fm is the
frequency of the sinusoidal modulating wave. Determine the amplitude spectrum of the filter
output.
b) An angle modulated signal has the form v(t) = 100 cos (2fct+4 sin 2000 t) when fc =10 MHz.
i. Determine average transmitted power.
ii. Determine peak phase deviation.
iii. Determine the peak frequency deviation.
iv. Is this an FM or a PM signal? Explain.
4. a) Compute the bandwidth requirement for the transmission of FM signal having a frequency
deviation 75 KHz and an audio bandwidth of 10KHz.
b) An FM radio link has a frequency deviation of 30 kHz. The modulating frequency is 3 kHz.
Calculate the bandwidth needed for the link. What will be the bandwidth if the deviation is
reduced to 15 kHz?
c) Determine the Bandwidth occupied by a sinusiodally frequency modulated carrier for which the
modulation index is 2.4 and modulating signal frequency is 3 KHz.
UNIT-V: ANGLE MODULATION METHODS
1. a) Explain the operation of the balanced slope detector using a circuit diagram and draw
its response characteristics. Discuss in particular the method of combining the outputs
of the individual diodes. In what way is this circuit an improvement on the slope
detector and in turn what are the advantages?
b) Compute the bandwidth requirement for the transmission of FM signal having a
frequency deviation 75 KHz and an audio bandwidth of 10KHz.
2. Explain demodulation of FM signal with the help of PLL.
3. a) Explain the operation of the balanced slope detector using a circuit diagram and draw
its response characteristics. Discuss in particular the method of combining the outputs
of the individual diodes. In what way is this circuit an improvement on the slope
detector and in turn what are the advantages?
b) Compute the bandwidth requirement for the transmission of FM signal having a
frequency deviation 75 KHz and an audio bandwidth of 10KHz.
4. a) Explain the operation of limiter circuit in fm demodulation.

b) An FM radio link has a frequency deviation of 30 kHz. The modulating frequency is 3
kHz. Calculate the bandwidth needed for the link. What will be the bandwidth if the
deviation is reduced to 15 kHz?
c) Determine the Bandwidth occupied by a sinusiodally frequency modulated carrier for
which the modulation index is 2.4 and modulating signal frequency is 3 KHz.
5. a) Explain about FM generation using transistor reactance tube modulator.

b) Explain balanced ratio detector for detecting FM signal.
6. a) Why are limiters and preemphasis filters used in FM radio.

b) Classify radio transmitters based on the type of modulation and Service involved.
7. a) Classify radio transmitters in detail.

b) Compare low level modulation and high level modulation of radio transmitters.
8. Draw the black diagram of FM stereo broadcast transmitters and explain its operation.
UNIT-VI: NOISE
1. a) Find the output SNR in a PM system for tone modulation.
b) A phase modulation (PM) system, with the modulated wave defined by S (t) =
Ac Cos [2 fct + kpm(t)] where kp is a constant and m(t) is the message signal. The
additive noise n(t) at the phase detector input is n(t) = nI(t) cos (2fc t)nQ (t) sin 2fc t
Assuming that the carrier-to-noise ratio at the detector input is high compared with
unity, determine
i. the output signal-to-noise ratio and
ii. the figure of merit of the system
2. Explain how S/N ratio is a figure of merit incase of performance of a communication

channel.
3. Derive the expression for figure of merit of AM system for large case.
4. Explain the noise performance of SSB - SC receiver and prove its S/N Ratio is unity.
5. Compare noise performance of PM and FM system.
6. a) Explain the equivalent model of a generalized communication system for noise calculation.
b) Explain the noise performance of DSB -SC scheme with the help of block diagram.
7. Explain the noise performance of SSB - SC receiver and prove its S/N Ratio is
unity.
8. a) Derive the expression for the S/N ratio of AM system.
b) What is capture effect. Explain FM Threshold effect.
9. a) Prove that the figure of merit of AM system for single stone modulation with 100% modulation
is 1/3.
b) An AM system with envelope detection is operating at threshold. Determine the power gain in
decibels needed at the transmitter to produce (S/N)o = 30dB for tone modulation with m = 1.
10. a) Prove that the figure of merit of DSB - SC system is 1.

b) A DSB-SC modulated is transmitted over a noisy channel, with the power spectral density of
the noise being as shown in figure below. The message bandwidth is 4 kHz and the carrier
frequency is 200 kHz. Assuming that the average power of the modulated wave is 10 watts, find
the output signal-to-noise ratio of the receiver.
11. Prove that narrow band FM offers no improvement in SNR over AM.
UNIT-VII: RECEIVERS
1. a) With the aid of the block diagram explain TRF receiver. Also explain the basic superheterodyne
principle.
b) List out the advantages and disadvantages of TRF receiver.
2. a) Describe the circuit of an FET amplitude limiter, and with the aid of the transfer characteristic
explain the operation of the circuit.
b) What can be done to improve the overall limiting performance of an FM?
receiver ? Explain the operation of the double limiter and also AGC in addition
to a limier.
3. a) Discuss how the of an ac gain amplifier can be controlled by a dc AGC level, Give the relevant
circuit details to support your answer.
b) When a super heterodyne receiver is tuned to 555 KHz, its local oscillator provides the mixer
with an input at 1010 KHz what is the image frequency ? The antenna at receiver is connected
to mixer via a tuned circuit whose loaded Q is 40. What will be rejection ratio for the calculated
image frequency ?
4. a) Explain the working of TRF receiver with its block diagram.

b) A TRF receiver is turned to 1000 KHz AM radio broadcast signal by a variable tuned circuit
with 1 KHz bandwidth. Find the bandwidth when receiver is returned to 1550 KHz and 550
KHz. Determined the recovered baseband.
5. a) What is meant by the term tracking error? Draw a typical tracking error curve. What is meant
by the term adjacent channel selectivity?
b) Find the image frequency for a standard broadcast band AM receiver using a 455 kHz IF and
tuned to a station at 640 kHz.
6. a) Explain the purpose and working of Tracking circuits.

b) Explain the purpose of pre emphasis and de emphasis circuits and the working of these circuits.
7. a) List and discuss the factors influencing the choice of the intermediate frequency for a radio
receiver.
b) What is simple automatic gain control? What are its functions?
8. a) What factors govern the choice of intermediate frequency ?

b) In a broadcast super heterodyne receiver having no RF amplifier, the loaded Q of the antenna
coupling circuit is 100. If the IF frequency is 455 kHz, determine the image frequency and its
rejection ratio for tuning at 1.1. kHz a station.
9. a) Discuss about the alignment of Radio receiver with all details.

b) Discuss about the need for limiter and de-emphasis circuits in FM receivers.
Unit-VIII: PULSE MODULATION
1. a) Describe the synchronization procedure for PAM, PWM and PPM signals.
b) Discuss about the spectra of PWM and PDM signals.
2. a) Describe the generation and demodulation of PPM with the help of block diagram and hence
discuss its spectral characteristics.
b) Define and distinguish between PTM and PAM schemes. Sketch and explain their waveform
for a single tone sinusoidal input signal.
3. a) How is PDM wave converted into PPM system.

b) Explain why a single channel PPM of system requires the transmission of synchronization
signal, where as a single channel PAM or PDM system does
not it.
4. a) What is the fundamental difference between pulse modulation, on the one hand, and frequency
and amplitude modulation on the other?
b) What is pulse width modulation? What other names does it have? How is it demodulated?
5. Why is cross talk present in PTM system? Explain the generation and demodulation of PDM
signals with suitable diagrams.
6. a) How is PDM wave converted into PPM system.

b) Explain why a single channel PPM of system requires the transmission of synchronization
signal, where as a single channel PAM or PDM system does not it.
7. a) Why is cross talk present in PTM system ? Explain the generation and demodulation of PDM
signals with suitable diagrams
b) How a PPM signal can be generated from a PWM signal.
ASSIGNMENT
QUESTIONS
Analog Communications Assignment Questions
ASSIGNMENT QUESTIONS
UNIT-1: INTRODUCTION
1. Distinguish between negative peak clipping and diagonal peak clipping in anenvelope detector.
The output of a diode envelope detector is fed through a DC blocking capacitor to an amplifying
stage, which has an input resistance of 10 kilo-ohms. If the diode load resister is 5k-ohm,
determine the maximum depth of sinusoidal modulation the detector can handle without
negative peak clipping.
2. Define amplitude modulation? And describe the basic operation of an AM modulator?
3. A broadcast AM transmitter radiates 50kW of carrier power. What will be the radiated power at
80percent modulation?
4. Describe the relationship between the carrier and sideband powers in an AM wave?
UNIT-2: DSB MODULATION
1. Consider a composite wave obtained by adding a non coherent carrier Ac cos(2fct +) to DSB-SC
wave X(t)=cos(2fmt) where X (t) is the message waveform. This composite waveform is applied to
ideal envelope detector. Find the resulting detector output. Evaluate this for .
i. = 0 and
ii. ii. = 0 and |X (t)| << Ac
2. Name the constituent stages of A.M. radio transmitter and briefly give the function of each stage.
3. What are the main requirements of a radio transmitter regarding the carrier frequency? Briefly
discuss these requirements.
4. Explain the modulation and demodulation of DSB-SC?
UNIT-3 : SSB MODULATION
1. Explain with the help of sketches and mathematical expressions how VSB Modulation can be
obtained and mention its applications.
2. An AM broadcast station has a modulation index, which is 0.75 on the aver-age. What would be the
average power saving if it could go over to SSB-SC transmission, while having to maintain the
same signal strength in the reception area?
3. (a) Explain the operation of ISB transmitter with block diagram. Where it is used?
(b) What is the function of crystal filters in SSB transmitter?
(c) State and explain with respect to 'Q', various types of filters used to separateside bands?
4. Draw the circuit and explain the generation of SSB-SC wave using phase shift method?
UNIT-4: ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS
1. The equation of an angle-modulated voltage v (t) = 10 sin (108t + 3 sin 104t), what form of angle
modulation is this? Calculate the carrier and modulating frequencies, the modulation index and
deviation and power dissipated in a 100-ohm resistor.
2. A single tone modulating signal cos(10103t) frequency modulates a carrier of10MHz and produces
a frequency deviation of 75kHz.Find
i. the modulation index and
ii. phase deviation produced in the FM wave.
iii. if another modulating signal produces a modulation index of 100 while maintaining the same
deviation, find the frequency and amplitude of the modulating signal,, assuming Kf =10kHz/V.
3. Compute the bandwidth requirement for the transmission of FM signal having a frequency deviation
75 KHz and an audio bandwidth of 10KHz.
4. Compare FM and AM systems
5. Differentiate between narrow band FM and wide band FM.
UNIT-5: ANGLE MODULATION METHODS
1. Draw the complete block diagram of the Armstrong frequency modulation system and explain the
function of the mixer and multipliers. In what circumstances can we dispense with the mixer?
2. Draw the block diagram and describe the working of a simple FM transmitter using reactance
modulator.
3. What is the principle of sources of frequency drift in reactance modulator FM transmitter and how
can such a drift be reduced.
4. Draw the circuit and explain the working of reactance modulator FM transmitter using AFC
frequency stabilization.
UNIT-6: NOISE
1. Derive an expression for SNR and figure of merit coherent reception of SSB modulated wave.
2. Define Noise, Figure of Merit, and Signal to Noise ratio. List out the assumptions of Noise
calculation in communication system.
3. Give the general representation of noise in communication system and Calculate the power spectral
density of it.
4. Calculate the power spectral density of Noise in case of DSB-SC and also calculate Figure of merit.
UNIT-7: RECEIVERS
1. What is meant by fading? Explain with suitable figures and example. Explain the principle of
frequency and space diversity techniques employed to reduce the effect of fading.
2. (a) Distinguish between simple AGC and delayed AGC.
(b) Draw a block diagram of a super-heterodyne receiver and explain the function of each stage.
(c) What is meant by the term \tracking error"? Explain.
3. Draw the block diagram and explain the working of a TRF receiver. List out its advantages and
disadvantages.
4. Explain the necessity of a mixer in a receiver. Give a circuit schematic and explain.
5. Discuss the need for limiter and de-emphasis circuit in FM receivers
6. Illustrate the FM detection by a PLL with the help of its Schematic
UNIT-8: PULSE MODULATION
1. What is meant by Pulse Amplitude Modulation and explain any one-modulation technique in
detail.
2. What is meant by Pulse Width Modulation Explain the generation of Pulse width modulation?
3. What is meant by Pulse Width Modulation Explain the demodulation of Pulse width
modulation?
4. What is meant by Pulse Position Modulation Explain the generation of Pulse Position
modulation?
5. What is meant by Pulse Position Modulation Explain the demodulation of Pulse Position
modulation?
6. Compare the performance of PAM, PWM, and PPM
7. What is Pulse modulation? Explain in brief various types of pulse modulation with neat sketches.
**** End****
ANTENNAS &WAVE
PROPOGATION
COURSEFILE
Department of
VIGNAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND
Sponsored by
COURSE
OBJECTIVES
Antennas & Wave Propagation Course Objectives
COURSE OBJECTIVES
This course will provide students with the theoretical underpinnings of Antenna and Wave
Propagation, allowing them to work out quantitative values and theoretical descriptions for case
examples in Antenna and Wave propagation.
Students completing this course should be able to:
List Maxwells equations and solve them for specific regular geometries
Understand general electromagnetic wave propagation and how the plane wave
solution can be used to approximate real situations
interpret the dielectric and magnetic properties of given materials
Describe the boundary conditions for electric and magnetic fields at dielectric
interfaces
Interpret the effects of lossy and low loss dielectrics upon the propagation of
electromagnetic waves, and predict this process in specific applications.
Solve the performance of specific transmission lines, and state what characteristics are optimal for
termination of the line.
Work out simplified solutions to waveguide and antenna example problems in regular geometries.
SYLLABUS
Antennas & Wave Propagation Students Sminar Topics
SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
Antenna Basics: Introduction, Basic Antenna Parameters - Patterns. Beam Area, Radiation Intensity.
Beam Efficiency. Directivity, Gain- Resolution. Antenna Apertures, Effective Height. Illustrative
Problems. Fields from Oscillating Dipole. Field Zone, Shape-Impedance Considerations. Antenna
Temperature. Front - to-back Ratio. Antenna Theorems, Radiation- Basic Maxwell`s Equations,
Retarded Potentials- Helmholtz Theorem
UNIT-II
Thin Linear Wire Antennas -Radiation from Small Electric Dipole. Quarter Wave Monopole and Half
Wave Dipole - Current Distributions. Field Components. Radiated Power, Radiation Resistance, Beam
Width. Directivity. Effective Area and Effective Height. Natural Current Distributions. Far Fields and
Patterns of Thin Linear Centre-fed Antennas of Different Lengths, Illustrative Problems. Loop
Antennas - Introduction, Small Loop. Comparison of Far Fields of Small Loop and Short Dipole,
Radiation Resistances and Directivities of Small and Large Loops (QualitativeTreatmerrt).
UNIT-III
Antenna Arrays: Point Sources -Definition, Patterns, arrays of 2 Isotropic Sources - Different Cases,
Principle of Pattern Multiplication, Uniform Linear Arrays - Broadside Arrays, End fire Arrays. EFA
with Increased Directivity. Derivation of their Characteristics and Comparison. BSAs with Non-
uniforrnAmplitude Distributions - General Considerations and Binomial Arrays, Illustrative Problems.
UNIT-IV
VHE UHF and Microwave Antennas-I: Arrays with Parasitic Elements.Yagi-Uda Array. Folded
Dipoles and their Characteristics, Helical Antennas - Helical Geometry, Helix Modes. Practical Design
Considerations forMonofilar Helical Antenna in Axial and Normal Modes. Horn Antennas -Types.
Fermats Principle, Optimum Horns. Design Considerations of Pyramidal Horns. Illustrative Problems.
UNIT V
VHF, UHF and Microwave Antennas- II: Micro strip Antennas -Introduction, Features, Advantages and
Limitations, Rectangular Patch Antennas-Geometry and Parameters, Characteristics of
MicrostripAntennas. Impact of Different Parameters on Characteristics, Reflector Antennas -
Introduction, Flat Sheet and Corner Reflectors, Paraboloidal Reflectors-Geometry, Pattern
Characteristics. Feed Methods, Reflector Types- Related Features, Illustrative Problems.
UNIT VI
Lens Antennas-Introduction. Geometry of Nonmetallic Dielectric Lenses, Zoning. Tolerances,
Applications. Antenna Measurements: Introduction, Concepts-Reciprocity, near and Far Fields,
Coordinate System, Sources of Errors. Patterns to be Measured, Pattern Measurement Arrangement,
Directivity Measurement, Gain Measurements (by Comparison, Absolute and 3-Antenna Methods)
UNIT-VII
Wave Propagation -I: Introduction, Definitions, Categorizations and General Classifications, Different
Modes of Wave Propagation. Ray/Mode Concepts. Ground Wave Propagation (Qualitative Treatment) -
Introduction, Plane Earth Reflections, Space and Surface Waves, Wave Tilt, Curved Earth Reflections.
Space Wave Propagation -Introduction, Field Strength Variation with Distance and Height, Effect of
Earths Curvature, Absorption. Super Refraction, M-Curves and Duct Propagation, Scattering
Phenomena, Tropospheric Propagation, Fading and Path Loss Calculations.
UNIT-VIII
Wave Propagation- II: Sky Wave Propagation -Introduction, Structure of Ionosphere, Refraction and
Reflection of Sky Waves by Ionosphere, Ray Path. Critical Frequency, MUF. LUF. OF, Virtual Height
and Skip Distance, Relation between MUF and Skip Distance, Multi-hop Propagation, Energy Loss in
Ionosphere, Summary of Wave Characteristics in Different Frequency Ranges.
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Antennas for All Applications - John D. Kraus and Ronald J. Marhefka, TMHl, 3rd Edn., 2003.
2. Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems - E.C. Jordan and K.G. Balmain, PHI, 2nd ed.,
2000.
REFERENCES :
1. Antenna Theory - C.A. Balanis, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd ed., 2001.
2. Antennas and Wave Propagation K.D. Prasad, Satya Prakashan, Tech India Publications, New
Delhi, 2001.
3. Transmission and Propagation -E.V.D. Glazier and H.R.L. Lamont, The Services Text Book of
Radio, vol. 5, Standard Publishers Distributors, Delhi.
4. Electronic and Radio Engineering F.E. Terman, McGraw-Hill, 4th edition, 1955.
5. Antennas John D. Kraus, McGraw-Hill, SECOND EDITION, 1988.
WEBSITE: http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
STUDENTS
SEMINAR
TOPICS
STUDENTS SEMINAR TOPICS
1. Antenna Terminology
2. Radiation mechanism of single wire and two wire antennas
3. Antenna Theorems
4. Retarded Potentials
5. Radiated Fields from Infinitesimal, small and half wave dipoles
6. Antenna Arrays
7. Yagi-Uda Antenna
8. Helical Antenna
9. Microwave Antennas
10. Radio wave Propagation
11. Micro-Strip Antenna
LECTURE PLAN
Antennas & Wave Propagation Lecture Plan
LECTURE PLAN
No of Method of
Periods Teaching
UNIT I: ANTENNA BASICS

1. Antenna theory-
Introduction to antennas,radiation from single wire antenna 1 Black board
C.A. Balanis,johnwiley&sons,2nd ed.,2001
2. Antenna parameters radiation pattern , radiation intensity, beam Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
efficiency. prakashan,Tech india publications,6th chapter
3. Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
Directivity, gain resolution,derictive gain,aperture 1 Black board
prakashan,Tech india publications,6th chapter
Effective height,problems 1 Black board
5. Fields from oscillating dipole,shape impedance,antenna Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
temperature,front-to-back ratio. prakashan,Tech india publications,6th chapter
Basic maxwells equations,helmholtz equation,retarted potentials. 1 Black board
Antenna theorems-reciprocity theorem, 1 Black board
duality theorem 1 Black board
UNIT 2: THIN LINEAR ANTENNAS
radiation from small electric dipole,current distributions 1 Black board
Radiated power,radiation resistance of small dipole 1 Black board
radiation from quarter wave monopole, ,current distributions 1 Black board
Radiated power,radiation resistance of quarter wave monopole 1 Black board
radiation from half wave dipole, ,current distributions 1 Black board
Radiated power,radiation resistance of halfwave dipole 1 Black board
15. Directivity,effective area and effective height of small dipole,quarter Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
wave monopole and half dipole prakashan,Tech india publications,5th chapter
Thin linear center fed antennas of different lengths,problems 1 Black board
17. Introduction to loop antennas, small loop antenna, construction, Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
radiation from loop antenna prakashan,Tech india publications,5th chapter
18. Antenna theory-
Comparision between small loop and short dipole, 1 Black board
19. Antenna theory-
radiation resistance and directivities of loop antenna 1
UNIT-3 ANTENNA ARRAYS
20. point sources,arrays of 2 isotropic sources-equal amplitude and same Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
phase prakashan,Tech india publications,7th chapter
21. point sources,arrays of 2 isotropic sources-equal amplitude and Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
soppositephase prakashan,Tech india publications7th chapter.
22. point sources,arrays of 2 isotropic sources-unequal amplitude and any Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
phase,pattern multiplication prakashan,Tech india publications, 7th chapter
Uniform linear arrays-broad side array,radiation pattern 1 Black board
prakashan,Tech india publications, 7th chapter
End fire array-radiation pattern,array factor 1 Black board
prakashan,Tech india publications, 7th chapter
End fire array eith increases directivity 1 Black board
prakashan,Tech india publications7th chapter
Comparision between BSA and EFA,PROBLEMS 1 Black board
Binomial arrays definition ,array factor 1 Black board
UNIT-4 VHF, UHF & MICROWAVE ANTENNAS-1
folded dipole and its characteristics, 1 Black board
comparision between folded dipole and coventional dipole 1 Black board
30.
Yagi uda antenna-construction, operation 1 Black board Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya

Helical antennastructure ,types of helical antenna 1 Black board
Design consideration for monofilar helical antenna in axial mode. 1 Black board
Design consideration for monofilar helical antenna in normal mode 1 Black board
Structure and operation of horn antenna, 1 Black board
types of horn antenna 1 Black board
Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
36. Fermats principle,optimum horns,design considerations of pyramidal prakashan,Tech india publications,5th chapter
1 Black board
horn Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
Problems 1 Black board
UNIT-5 VHF, UHF & MICROWAVE ANTENNAS-2
38. introduction to mictrostrip antennas,advantages and limitations and Antenna theory- C.A. Balanis,johnwiley&sons,2 nd
1 Black board
features of microstrip antennas ed.,2001,14thchapter
39. Antenna theory- C.A. Balanis,johnwiley&sons,2 nd
Geometry and parameters of rectangular patch antennas 1 Black board
ed.,2001,14thchapter
40. Impact of different parameters on characteristics,introduction to Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
reflector antennas prakashan,Tech india publications,5th chapter
Flat sheet ,corner reflectors,image principle 1 Black board
42. Definition of parabola,Geometry of paraboloidal reflectros,pattern Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
characteristics, prakashan,Tech india publications,5th chapter
Different feed methods-cassegrin,grogagrainand offset method 1 Black board
Problems 1 Black board
prakashan,Tech india publications
UNIT-6 LENS ANTENNAS
1 Black board
Lens antenna construction ,types of lens antenna prakashan,Tech india publications
1 Black board
Working principle of lens antenna, zoning prakashan,Tech india publications
1 Black board
Antenna measurements-range prakashan,Tech india publications
48. Gain measurement using two antenna method and three antenna Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 Black board
method prakashan,Tech india publications
1 Black board
Radiation pattern measurement prakashan,Tech india publications
UNIT-7 WAVE PROPEGAQTION-1
50. Introduction to wave propagation, general classification of Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 LCD
atmosphere prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
51. Different mode of wave propagation-reflection, refraction and Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 LCD
transmission prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
52. Ground wave propagation-reflections from plane earth, space Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 LCD
and surface waves prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
1 LCD
and surface waves prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
1 LCD
and surfave waves prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
1 LCD
Wave tilt, curved earth reflections. prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
56. Space wave propagation-felid strength of troposphere, variation Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 LCD
of strength with distance and height prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
1 LCD
effect of earths curvature,absorption,super refraction. prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
1 LCD
M-Curves, duct propagation, scattering phenomena prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
1 LCD
Troposphere propagation, prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
60. Fading- definition, different types of fading(multipath Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 LCD
fading,path loss calculations prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
61. Comparisions between ground wave propagation and Antennas and wave propagation K.D.Prasad,satya
1 LCD
tropospheric propagation prakashan,Tech india publications,11th chapter
1 LCD
Problems prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
UNIT-8 WAVE PROPEGAQTION-2
Introduction to sky wave propagation 1 LCD
Structure of ionosphere -D,E,F1 & f2 LAYERS 1 LCD
refraction and reflection of sky waves by ionosphere 1 LCD
Ray path 1 LCD
prakashan,Tech india publications,11h chapter
Critical frequency 1 LCD
Maximum usable frequency 1 LCD
69.
Antennas and wave propagation
Virtual height, relation between critical frequency and virtual height 1 LCD
K.D.Prasad,satya prakashan, 11th chapter
Skip distance 1 LCD
Ralation between skip diatance and muf 1 LCD
Different frequency ranges 1 LCD
Multihop propagation 1 LCD
prakashan,Tech india publications,11chapter
Energy loss in iono sphere 1 LCD
Wave characteristics in different frequency ranges 1 LCD
Problems 1 LCD
Revision 1 Black board
LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Antennas & Wave Propagation Learning Objectives
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
UNIT- I
At the end of this unit the student will be able to
Identify basic antenna parameters

Design and analyze wire and aperture antennas.
Design and analyze matching and feeding networks for antennas.
Design and analyze antenna arrays.
Analyze wireless transmit-receive systems.
Define the following terms: isotropic antenna, radiation intensity, gain, directivity, radiation
efficiency, phase centre, effective area, effective length, polarization, radiation resistance,
bandwidth, radiation pattern, beam width, side lobe level, grating lobe, aperture efficiency, acute
aperture efficiency, overflow, primary and secondary pattern (reflector antenna)
UNIT- II
State what the electromagnetic field is and what components make up the electromagnetic field.
Derive equations for Current distributions and evaluate the Field components
State the difference between the induction field and the radiation field.
Calculate the radiation power density and magnetic field intensity at specific distance with the given
antenna gain and received power.
Derive and calculate the Radiation Resistance of the Small Electric Dipole, Quarter wave Monopole
& Half wave dipole.
State the Antenna theorems and prove the Antenna Theorems
Explain what is a Loop antenna?
Design the loop antenna based on different Parameters.
Explain the Operation of the Loop Antenna
UNIT-III
Define Multiplication of Patterns

Explain why Multiplication of Patterns is required?
Calculate progressive phase shift if given uniform linear antenna array to direct the main lobe to
certain direction,
State pattern multiplication and use it to determine radiation pattern for the same element array.
Design and analyze antenna arrays
Derive the equations for the Beam width of Broadside, and End fire Arrays
UNIT IV
Identify various special antennas presented, such as long-wire, V, rhombic, turnstile,

Ground-plane, and corner-reflector; describe the operation of each.
Explain qualitatively the operation of wire antenna, Yagi-Uda array, spot antenna, log scale
bipolar array and discuss their advantages and disadvantages
Sketch a simple yagi, phased array, log-periodic and co-linear television antenna
Describe the operating characteristics of simple yagi antenna.
Compare the performance of each antenna for various reception conditions
State why baluns are required for most antennas and sketch
the circuit of a simplified transformer balun
Sketch the Helical Antenna and Design the Helical Antenna
Explain the operation of Helical Antenna
UNIT- V
At the end of this unit the students will be able to:
Define an array and with Parasitic Elements

Explain Yagi-Uda Arrays and folded Dipoles & their characteristics
Describe reflector antenna
Explain Different types of feeds , F/D Ratio, Spill Over , Back lobes
Explain Cassegrain Feed
UNIT-VI
At the end of this unit the students will be able to
Explain about Horn Antennas and types

Explain about Lens Antenna in brief
Finding the gain of an antenna using two-antenna, three-antenna method
Measure directivity of antenna using different methods
UNIT-VII
At the end of this unit the students will be able to
Explain Concepts of propagation and frequency ranges

Explain Ground wave propagation in detail
Explain Sky wave propagation in detail
Define reflection and refraction
Differentiate atmospheric layers
Define different terms: virtual height, maximum usable frequency, sip distance.
Relate above terms.
UNIT-VIII
At the end of this unit the students will be able to:
Derive Fundamental Equation for Free Space Propagation

Explain Space Wave Propagation
Define LOS and Radio Horizon.
Describe Tropospheric Wave Propagation
Explain Effective earths Radius and Curvature
State M- curves and Duct Propagation
OBJECTIVE
TYPE
QUESTIONS
Antennas & Wave Propagation Objective Questions
UNIT-1
1. Transmitting and receiving antennas behave [ ]

a. identically b. differently c. equal in physical length d. annot determine
2. To increase the radiation from the transmission line [ ]
a. decrease the distance between the wires b. open circuit at the end of line is enlarged
c.short circuit at the end of line d. connect the matched load at the end of line
3. A dipole is same as [ ]
a.The two wires bent so as to be in same line b. The two wires connected with matched
load c. the two wires shorted at the end d. the two wires bent so as to form circle
4. The total length of two wires is a half-wavelength , then the antenna is called a [ ]
a. two wire line b. opened-out transmission line c. half-wave dipole
d. full wave dipole
5. The voltage and current along the antenna are [ ]
a. fixed to certain value b. vary from one point to the next
c. constant along the length d. equal to unity
6. Antennas made of wire whose diameter compared to wavelength is [ ]
a. large b. infinitely small c. twice d. independent of wavelength e. Independent of D and ; ;
7. Fresnel region does not exist if antenna has a [ ]
a. Maximum dimension smaller than the wavelength b. Maximum dimension larger than
the wavelength c. Minimum dimension smaller than the wavelength
b. Minimum dimension larger than the wavelength
8. In which region the angular field distribution is dependent upon the distance
from the Antenna. [ ]
a. Reactive near field region b. Radiating near field region
c. Far field region d. Farunhofer region
9. In which region the angular field distribution is independent of the distance from the
antenna [ ]
a. Reactive near- field region b. Radiating near - field region
c. Fresnel region d. Far- field region 2
10. The near zone fields of an oscillating time varying dipole are [ ]
a. dynamic static b. quasii-static c. constant
11. In a plane containing an isolated hertizian dipole the radiation pattern of the antenna is a [ ]
a. Circle and the radiation is circular polarized
b. Circle and the radiation is linearly polarized
c. Figure of eight and the radiation is circularly polarized
d. Figure of eight and the radiation is lineally polarized
12. Which of a minor lobe that occupies the hemisphere in a direction opposite to that of the
major lobe [ ]
a. Side lobe b. Main lobe c. Opposite lobe d. Back lobe
13. The ratio of the power radiated by the antenna to the square of the current at the feed point is ---
a. antenna losses b. radiation intensity c. radiation resistance d. antenna resistance
14. The radiation resistance of antenna is a [ ]
a. dc resistance b. ac resistance c. combination of ac and de resistance d. loss resistance
15. The radiation lobe containing the direction o maximum radiation is called [ ]
a. side lobe b. back lobe c. mirror lobe d. major lobe
16. A radiation lobe in any direction other than the intended lobe [ ]
a. back lobe b. major lobe c. side lobe d. main lobe
17. A radiation lobe whose axis makes an angle o approximately 1800 with respect to the beam of
an antenna [ ]
a. Major lobe b. Minor lobe c. Back lobe d. Main lobe
18. The largest lobe minor lobes is called [ ]
a. Major lobe b. Side lobe c. Back lobe d. Main lobe
19. Generally the horizontally polarized antennas are preferred at high frequencies because most of
manmade noise is [ ]
a. vertically polarized b. horizontally polarized c. linearly polarized d. circularly
polarized
20. In relation to the directional characteristics o the dipole antennas the terms and O polarization
are synonymous with and may be used for the following terms in that order [ ]
a. Horizontal and vertical polarization b. Vertical and Horizontal polarization
c. Circular and elliptical polarization d. Elliptic and circular polarization
ANSWERS
1.A 2.B 3.A 4C. 5.B 6.B 7.A 8.B 9.D 10.A
11. B 12.D 13.C 14.B 15.D 16.C 17.C 18.B 19.A 20.B
UNIT-2
1. At intermediate distance, the an Er of eclectic dipole approach time phase quadrature so the
total electric field exhibiting the phenomenon of [ ]
a. Electric field b. Magnetic field c. Cross field d. No field
2. If the ground is good conductor, it converts grounded dipole into [ ]
a. a dipole of twice the height b. Two dipole array c. not effect on it
d. dipole of same height
3. If the ground is good conductor, it converts grounded dipole into [ ]
a. a dipole of twice the height b. Two dipole array c. not effect on it
d. dipole of same height
4. The directivity of a short monopole is [ ]
a. 1.5 b. 1.64 c. 3.00 d. 3.28
5. Find the radiation resistance o an infinitesimal dipole whose overall length is l= [ ]
2
a. 30 b. 73 ohms c. 36 ohms b. 0.316 ohms
6. . The 3-dB beam width o a dipole o length is [ ]
0 0 0 0
a. 87 b. 64 c. 78 d. 47.8
7. The 3-dB beam width o a dipole o length is [ ]
a. 870 b. 640 c. 780 d. 47.80
8. The 3-dB beam width of a monopole antenna is [ ]
a. 1.64 b. 1.5 c. 1.0 d. 1.75
9. For a lossless antenna the real Part of the input impedance was designated as [ ]
a. Lossless resistance b. Radiation resistance c. Lossless inductance
b. Radiation inductance
10. The vertical radiator taller than about 0.53 is not used in ground wave propagation
because [ ]
a. their presence will cause high radiation b. they have high directivity
c. their presence will cause high radiation resistance
d. their presence will cause quite objectionable sky wave interference
11. An antenna much shorter than has a [ ]
a. high resistance b. low capacitive reactance c. poor input impedance
d. efficient radiator
12. A center fed full wave antenna is said to be [ ]
a. voltage fed b. current fed c. low impedance feed d. mixed fed
13. An antenna much shorter than has a [ ]
a. high resistance b. low capacitive reactance c. poor input impedance
d. efficient radiator
14. The input impedance of a short dipole with length nearer to 0.23 contains a reactance which is
normally [ ]
a. Large & capacitive b. Small and capacitive c. Large & inductive d. Small and inductive
15. The input impedance of a dipole antenna having tip- to-tip physical length equal to half wave
length is [ ]
a. Pure resistance b. Pure capacitance c. Inductor impedance d. Capacitor impedance
16 .The top loading of antennas [ ]
a. decreases radiation resistance b. increases radiation resistance
c. increases capacitive reactance d. poor input impedance
17. The effective area of a very short lossless dipole is [ ]
a. 0.13 b. 0.119 c. 0.119 2 d. 0.13 2
18. The current distribution along the length o a small dipole is [ ]
a. uniform b. sinusoidal c. rectangular d. exponential
19. The current distribution along the length o linear antenna is [ ]
a. uniform b. sinusoidal c. rectangle d. constant
20. The effective length of antenna either in transmitting or receiving mode is same
according to the theorem of [ ]
a. Equiprinciple b. Superposition c. Maximum power d. Reciprocity
ANSWERS
1. C 2.A 3.B 4.C 5.D 6.C 7.B 8.A 9.B 10.D

11. C 12.A 13.C 14.B 15.A 16.B 17.C 18.A 19.B 20.D
UNIT-3
1. The initial pattern of the following will be a figure of eight shape [ ]

a. Two elements with spacing b. Two elements with spacing /2
c. Two elements with /4 spacing d. Two elements with spacing 0
2. The elements of array are placed equally spaced and fed in same phase from same
Source than the array is called [ ]
a. broadside array b. end fire array c. binomial array d. Two element array
3. The elements of array are placed equally spaced and fed in uniform phase difference
Same source than the array is called [ ]

a. broadside array b. end fire array c. binomial array d. two element array
4. The radiation pattern of broadside array is in the direction of [ ]
a. along the plane of array b. perpendicular to the array c. uniform radiation
d. circle in shape
5.The radiation pattern of end-fire array is in the direction of [ ]
a. along the plane of array b. perpendicular to the array c. uniform radiation
d. circle in shape
6. The end-fire array is [ ]
a. linear and non resonant b. non linear and resonant c. linear and resonant
d. non linear and non resonant
7. An array consisting of a number of dipoles of equal size, equally spaced along a straight
Line, with all dipoles fed in the same phase from the same source is called [ ]
a. End-fire array b. Back fire array c. Broad side array d. Binomial array
8. When the current ratios and phasings are properly chosen sharp directivity with an array
Of fixed length but sufficiently large number of elements can be obtained with this
Phasing and close spacings between elements the radiation resistance [ ]
a. Reduces to very low value b. Increases to very high value
c. Remains unaffected d. Changes only slightly
9. In the distribution of amplitude of element excitation o a center- symmetric linear array. With is
such that the farther the element from the center the lower is excitation, Than compared to the
uniformly excited array, the radiation pattern of such a graded Array will have [ ]
a. wide beam width b. narrow beam width c. almost the same beam width
d. beam related with grading function
10. At 450 MHz the half power beam width of a 3- element array is [ ]
a. 80 b. 100 c. 120 d. 280
11. At 450 MHz the half power beam width of a 7- element array [ ]
a. 100 b. 120 c. 80 d. 280
12. The side lobe less broadside arrays are called [ ]
a. Uniform array b. End-fire array c. Log periodic array d. Binomial array
13.The following antenna- array has no side lobes [ ]
a. End-fire array b. Back - fire array c. Broad side array d. Binomial array
14.The relative amplitudes of the elements in binomial array can be determined by [ ]
a. Polynomial expansion b. Sinusoidal expansion
c. Binomial series expansion d. TSChebyscheff expansion
15.The length of the resonant antenna is increased, the number of lobes must be [ ]
a. decreased b. increased c. single lobe d. independent of length
16. Indicate the false statement with respect to non resonant antenna [ ]
a. matched termination is used b. only a forward traveling wave will exist
c. two-thirds of the forward power is radiated d. there are standing waves
17. The broadside array is used for [ ]
a. only for single frequency reception b. only for multiple frequency transmission
c. only for multiple frequency reception d. only for single frequency transmission
18. The end-fire array is used for [ ]
a. only for single frequency reception b. only for multiple frequency transmission
c. only for multiple frequency reception d. only for single frequency transmission
19. The broadside array is used only for single frequency transmission because [ ]
a. have a single frequency operation b. have a narrow bandwidth
c. have a broad bandwidth d. have a multiple frequency operation
20. The end-fire array is used only for single frequency transmission because [ ]
a. have a single frequency operation b. have a narrow bandwidth
c. have a broad bandwidth d. have a multiple frequency operation
ANSWERS
1.B 2.A 3.B 4.B 5.A 6.C 7.C 8.A 9.B 10.D
11. A 12.D 13.D 14.C 15.B 16.D 17.D 18.B 19.B 20.B
UNIT-4
1. To achieve the unidirectional characteristics, the wire of the V antenna must be [ ]

a. Resonant b. Non resonant c. Series d. Parallel
2. In the normal mode the helix consists of (N turns) [ ]
a. N small loops b. N short dipole
c. N small loops and N short dipoles connected together in series
d. N small loop and N short dipoles connected together in parallel
3. A helical antenna is used for satellite tracing because of its [ ]
a. circular polarization b. maneuverability c. broad bandwidth
d. good front-to-back ratio
4. If the circumference of helix of helical antenna is very small compared to a wavelength then the
radiation is [ ]
a. a combination of small dipole and a small loop b. only due to a small dipole
c. only due to a small loop d. equal to a wire
5. When a monofilar helical antenna is operated in normal mode, the maximum radiation occurs in
the plane [ ]
a. parallel to the helix axis b. perpendicular to the helix axis
c. located at450 to the helix axis d. artritiarily located in respect to the helix axis
6. The axial ratio AR= =1 in helical antenna operating in normal mode, the radiated fieldIs [ ]
a. linearly polarized wave of horizontal polarization
b. linearly polarized wave of vertical polarization
c. circularly polarized d. elliptically polarized
7. The bandwidth of helical antenna in normal and axial mode correspondingly [ ]
a. narrow and greater b. greater and narrow c. both greater d. both narrow
8. An antenna that is circularly polarized is the [ ]
a. helical b. small circular loop c. rhombic d. V antenna
9. Helical antenna is used at frequencies of [ ]
a. Low frequencies b. high microwave frequencies
c. VHF and UHF d. Ku and Ka bands
10. Helical antenna will accept the polarization of [ ]
a. only vertical b. only horizontal c. both vertical and horizontal d. only circular
11. Helical antennas are often used for satellite tacking at VHF range because of [ ]
a. Troposcatter b. Super refraction c. Ionospheric refraction d. the faraday effect.
12. The pitch angle alpha = 00 then the helix antenna reduces to a [ ]
a. linear wire b. dipole c. loop d. half wave dipole
13. The pitch angle alpha = 900 then the helix antenna reduce to a [ ]
a. linear wire b. dipole c. loop d. V- antenna
14. Which of the following antenna is called Beverage antenna [ ]
a. Dipole b. Loop c. Rhombic d. Long wire
15. The radiation pattern of long wire antenna is [ ]
a. Single major lobe b. Figure of eight c. Spherical d. Multilobe pattern
16. As the length o long wire antenna increases then the angle of the maximum to the major lobe
approaches zero degrees then the structure becomes a [ ]
a. near end fire array b. near broadside array c. binomial array d. scanned array
17. The radiation patterns for travelling and standing wave long wire antennas respectively [ ]
a. Un directional and Bidirectional b. Bidirectional and unidirectional
c. Both area in unidirectional d. Both are in Bidirectional
18. A long wire antenna is mostly used for receiving than transmitting because of its [ ]
a. Poor radiation efficiency b. High gain c. Good sensitivity d. Low radiation resistance
19. As the wave travels along the long wire from the source toward the load, it continuously [ ]
a. radiates energy b. leaks energy c. Amplifies energy d. remains constant
20. A long wire antenna is [ ]
a. Circularly polarized b. Linearly polarized c. Elliptically polarized d. Spherically polarized
ANSWERS
1. B 2.C 3.A 4. A 5A. 6A. 7.A 8.A 9.C 10.C

11. D 12.C 13.A 14.D 15.D 16.A 17.B 18.A 19.B. 20.B
UNIT-5
1. The distance between reflector & driven element in yagi - uda antenna is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
2. The length of reflector of yagi - uda antenna is [ ]
a. 0.48 b. 0.28 c. 0.18 d. 0.3
3. The driven element in yagi-uda antenna is [ ]
a. folded dipole b. reflector c. lens d. horn
4. The length of first director of yagi -uda antenna in meters is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
5. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ polarization results in more signal strength [ ]
a. horizontal b.vertical c.left circular d.right circular
6. The diameter of elements in yagi Uda antenna is [ ]
a. 1 to 1.2 cm b.2 to 10 cm c.3 to 5 cm d.10 to 20 cm
7. Less reflection & reduced ghost images possible with _ _ _ _ polarized yagi uda [ ]
a. horizontal b.vertical c.left circular d.right circular
8. The adverse effect of closer radiators in yagi uda array is [ ]
a. lowering of input impedance of array
b. increasing of input impedance of array
c. lowering of output impedance of array
d. constant input impedance of array
9. For maximum pickup, the receiving yagi uda antenna is mounted [ ]
0 0
a. horizontally b.vertically c.30 inclined d.60 inclined
10. For 5 element yagi Uda (UHF & VHF TV channels) reflector length LR is [ ]
a. 0.15 b. c.0.1 d.2
11. The field pattern in the horizontal plane for corner reflector at a distance r from antenna is
a.
b.
c.
d.
12. If the feed to vertex distance d is made equal to side length L in reflector then the aperture width is
a. L b.2L c.1.6L d.1.334L
13. The corner angle for passive reflector is [ ]
a. 900 b.500 c.100 d.800

14. Compared to isolated /2 antenna, corner reflector antenna power gain will be _ _ _ _ times higher
[ ]
a. 10 to 20 b.30 to 50 c.20 to 60 d.40 to 50
15. If corner angle is 900 then range of corner to dipole spacing is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
16. The relative field pattern E in the plane of the driven /2 element of a square corner reflector is
[ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
17. A square corner reflector has a spacing of /4 between the driven /2 element and the corner. The
directivity is [ ]
a. dBi b.15.8 dBi c.121.8 dBi d.19.8 dBi
18. A square corner reflector has a driven /2 element. The distance between the driven element and
corner is /2 . The terminal impedance of driven element is [ ]
a. 125 ohm b.150 ohm c.100 ohm d.200 ohm
corner is /2 . The half power beam width in is [ ]
0 0 0 0
a. 60 b.90 c.45 d.120
corner is /2 Directivity from HPBWs is [ ]
a. 1dBi b.20.4 dBi c.3dBi d.15.3 dBi
21. For large circular apertures, the beam width between first nulls is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
22. The directivity D of a large uniformly illuminated circular aperture is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
23. The field intensity ratio in the aperture plane for parabolic reflector is [ ]
a. b. c. d.1
24. The beam width between half power points for a large circular aperture is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
25. The F/D for parabolic reflector is [ ]
a. 0.25 to 0.5 b.0.5 to 5 c.5 to 10 d.4 to 8
26. The distance from any point P on a parabolic curve to a fixed point F is called [ ]
a. focus b.vertex c.feed point d.cassegrain
27. A parabolic reflector have a [ ]
a. directional feed b.offset feed c.vertex feed d.isotropic feed
28. To make the field completely uniform across the aperture would require a feed pattern with-----
a. inverse taper b.exponential taper c.uniform taper d.non uniform taper
29. The loss in aperture due to feed antenna blockage avoided by using [ ]
a. offset feed b.directional feed c.Horn feed d.Dipolefeed
30. The flared out wave guide is also known as [ ]
a. Horn antenna b.Yagi-uda antenna c.dipole d.paraboloid
ANSWERS
1 to 20 ---- A
UNIT-6
1. For optimum horn antenna, optimum length ,L is [ ]

a. b.
c. d.
2. If = 0.2 , length L = 62.5 , then the pyramidal horn antenna flare angle in E- plane is [ ]
0 0 0 0
a. 9.1 b.1 c.5 d.6
3. For pyramidal horn directivity is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
4. Beam width between first nulls for optimum E-plane rectangular Horn is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
5. If a and b are mouth dimensions in Z & Y directions L is horn length from mouth to apex then `a`
is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
6. For optimum Horn antenna , optimum is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
7. If = 0.2 and E plane aperture aE = 10 , then length L for pyramidal horn is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
8. If E-plane aperture of pyramidal antenna is aE = 10 , then HPBW(E-plane) [ ]
0 0 0 0
a. 5.6 b.2 c.10 d.8
9. If H plane aperture of pyramidal antenna is aH = 13.7 , then HPBW(H-plane) [ ]
0 0 0 0
a. 4.9 b.10 c.6 d.2
10. Beam width between first nulls for optimum H- plane rectangular horn is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
11. For pyramidal horn antenna, if h is height in E -plane & w is width in H-plane, the power gain Gp
is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
12. If A is elemental area , E is magnitude of radiated field generated by A , d is the distance to
A , is angle with respect to an axis that is perpendicular to mouth of parabolic antenna then
strength of electric field at A is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
13. Beam width between half power points for optimum H-plane rectangular horn is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
14. Typical value of for H-plane horn antenna is [ ]
a. 0.4 b.0.3 c.0.1 d.1
15. If a and b are mouth dimensions in Z & Y directions L is horn length from mouth to apex. then
half power beam widths in degrees in H plane is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
16. Beam width between half power points for optimum E-plane rectangular horn is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
17. If a and b are mouth dimensions in Z & Y directions L is horn length from mouth to apex. Then
`b` is [ ]
a. 0.81 a b.0.98a c.2a d.0.5a

18. If a and b are mouth dimensions in Z & Y directions L is horn length from mouth to apex .then
gain is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
19. If a and b are mouth dimensions in Z & Y directions, L is horn length from mouth to apex. then
half power beam widths in degrees in E plane is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
20. the field across the mouth of horn antenna is [ ]
a. section of spherical wave front
b. elliptical wave front
c. triangular wave front
d. rectangular wave front
21. According to fermat`s principle, R/ 0 is equal to [ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
22. Delay type lens antennas regarded basically as [ ]
a. end fire antennas with poly rod
b. broadside antennas with poly rod
c. end fire antennas with dipole
d. broadside antennas with dipole
23. Many element yagi uda antenna is a [ ]
a. rudimentary lens b.dielectric lens c.director d.poly rod
24. One of the following material is used for constructing dielectric lens [ ]
a. Lucite b.Paraffin c.Teflon d.Wax
25. If the flare angles of horn are too large the field across the mouth considered to be [ ]
a. not equi phase field b.equi phase field c.rectangular field d.triangular field
26. One of the following applied to delay lenses antennas [ ]
a. electrical path length is increased by lens medium
b. electrical path length is decreased exponentially by lens medium
c. electrical path length is unaltered by lens medium
d. electrical path length is decreased linearly by lens medium
27. One of the following applied to fast lenses antennas [ ]
a. electrical path length is increased exponentially by lens medium
b. electrical path length is decreased by lens medium
c. electrical path length is unaltered by lens medium
d. electrical path length is increased linearly by lens medium
28. One of the following is a delay type lens antenna [ ]
a. Dielectric lens b.E plane metal plate lens c.EH metal plate d.Horn
29. One of the following is a delay type lens antenna [ ]
a. H plane metal lens b.E plane metal plate lens c.EH metal plate d.Horn
30. One of the following material is used for constructing dielectric lens [ ]
a. Polystyrene b.Paraffin c.Teflon d.Wax
31. For a cylindrical lens field ratio is [ ]
a. b.
c. d.
32. The thickness Z of a zone step in zoned lens is [ ]

a. b. c. d.
33. For non magnetic materials, index of refraction n is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
34. One of the following is valid according to Fermat's principle [ ]
a. all paths from source to plane surface are of equal electrical lengths
b. all paths from source to plane surface are of unequal electrical lengths
c. all paths from source to load surface are of equal electrical lengths
d. some paths from source to plane surface are of equal electrical lengths
35. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ illumination of aperture suppresses minor lobes in lens antennas [ ]
a. taper b.Uniform c.random d.zero
36. To avoid resonance effect in artificial dielectric lens antennas the size of metal particles should
be [ ]
a. small compared to design wave length
b. 10 times larger compared to design wave length
c. 20 times larger compared to design wave length
d. equal to design wave length
37. The maximum particle dimension( parallel to electric field) in artificial dielectric lens antennas is
a. less than /4
b. equal to
c. greater than /2
d. 2
ANSWERS
1 to 20 ----- A
UNIT-7
1. Waves that arrive at receiver after reflection or scattering in the ionosphere are known as
a. sky waves b.surface waves c.ground waves d.troposperic waves
2. Ground wave signal divided as [ ]
a. space and surface wave b.space and sky wave
c.surface and sky wave d.reflected and refracted wave
3. Space wave is made up of [ ]

a. direct wave b.reflected wave c.refracted wave d.diffracted wave
4. Reflection factor for horizontal polarization, Rhis [ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
5. For smooth surface roughness R is [ ]
a. < 0.1 b.> 20 c.10 d.5
6. When the incident wave is near grazing over a smooth earth the reflection coefficient is [ ]
a. -1.0 b.-2 c.1 d.10
7. The attenuation function dependent on [ ]
a. distance , frequency, constants of earth b.distance & radiation
c..constants of earth & delay d.phase, constants of earth & radiation
8. For un attenuated surface wave, the attenuation function is [ ]

a. 1 b.10 c.5 d.2
9. At =0, un attenuated surface attenuation function ( at low frequency and good ground
conductivity) value is [ ]
a. 2 b.10 c.5 d.0

10. At =0 , surface of earth ground wave attenuation factor A is [ ]
2
a. b.F-10 c.F d.0
11. For surface wave numerical distance depends on [ ]
a. frequency, ground constants, actual distance to transmitter
b. frequency, ground constants
c. phase, frequency, ground constants
d. ground constants, actual distance to transmitter
12. The phase constant `b` is a measure of [ ]
a. power factor angle of earth
b. ground constant
c. numerical distance
d. attenuation factor
13. For vertical dipole antenna over a plane earth , electric field is [ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
14. Space wave field of a horizontal dipole in the plane perpendicular to axis of dipole is [ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
15. Real part of conductivity of ionized gas is [ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
16. For a wave propagating in a dielectric medium of permittivity, & incident upon a second
medium of , the reflection coefficient of horizontally polarized wave, Rh is [ ]
a.
b.
c.
d.
17. If earth constant and frequency are such that ,then earth will be [ ]
a. resistive[100 ohms] b.reactive c.conductive d.resistive(1000 ohms)
18. The numerical distance interms of phase constant b and for surface wave is
a. b. c. d.
19. If earth constant and frequency are such that x > > in r then power factor angle is [ ]
a. 0 b.10 c.2 d.5
20. If earth constant and frequency are such that x > > in r ,then earth will be [ ]
a. resistive b.inductive c.conductive d.capacitive
ANSWERS
1 to 20 ----- A
UNIT-8
1. For a wave propagating in a dielectric medium of permittivity, & incident upon a second
medium of , the reflection coefficient of vertically polarized wave, RV is [ ]
a. b.
c. d.
2. The refractivity of atmosphere, N is [ ]
a. (77.6 / T) P +( 4810 e / T) b.(77.6 / T) +( 4810 e / T)
c. P +( 4810 e / T) d.(77.6 / T) P +( 4810 e )
3. Radius of curvature of earth is [ ]
a. b. c. d.
4. The curvature of the earth affects the propagation of [ ]
a. ground wave signal b.sky wave signal
c. surface wave signal d.duct signal
5. The divergence factor D for (spherical earth) ground reflected wave is [ ]
a. < 1 b.2 c.10 d.5
6. If the ground reflected wave is reflected from spherical earth, its energy is [ ]
a. more diverged b.less diverged c.unaffected d.more converged
7. Curves that show the variation of modified index of refraction with height is known as [ ]
a. M curves b.N curves c.H curves d.E curves
8. Standard propagation occurs when the modified index of refraction increases [ ]
a. linearly with height b.exponentially with height
c. linearly with distance d.uniformly with height
9. If the slope of M curve decreases near the surface of earth, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ propagation results [ ]
a. sub standard b.super standard c.standard d.non standard
10. If the slope of M curve increases near the surface of earth, _ _ _ _ _ _ propagation results [ ]
a. super standard b.sub standard c.standard d.non standard
11. Tropospheric forward scatter can provide reliable beyond the horizon signal for distances upto --
a. 300 or 400 miles b.100 or 200 miles c.500 or 1000 miles d.10 to 50 miles
12. If the lower side of the duct is at surface of earth, it is known as a [ ]
a. surface duct b.space duct c.sky duct d.tropospheric
13. Elevated ducts found at elevations of [ ]
a. 1000 to 5000 ft b.20 to 10,0 ft c.500 to 1000 ft d.8000 to 15000 ft
14. In folded dipole, two identical conductors in parallel serve as [ ]
a. transformer b.generator c.load d.source
15. When a reflector such as a copper screen is placed closed to a half wave antenna, the resultant
radiation pattern is [ ]
a. uni directional b.conical c.bi directional d.triangular
16. If the modified index decreases with height over a portion of the range of height, the rays will be
curved downward and this condition known as [ ]
a. duct propagation b.sky propagation c.space propagation d.tropospheric propagation
17. When the inverted portion of M curve is elevated above the surface of the earth, the lower side
of the duct is also elevated, and the duct is called an [ ]
a. elevated duct b.surface duct c.space duct d.sky duct
18. Elevated ducts are due to a subsidence of [ ]
a. large air masses b.ionosphere c.troposphere d.water vapor
19. Over land areas, surface ducts are produced by [ ]
a. radiation cooling of the earth b.water vapor c.heating of earth d.large air masses
20. Trapping more likely occurs at [ ]
a. UHF b.VHF c.VLF d.HF
ANSWERS
1 to 20 ---- A
ESSAY TYPE
QUESTIONS
Antennas & Wave Propagation Essay Questions

UNIT-1
1. Define Directivity and Gain of an antenna. Bring out the relation between Directivity and Gain.
2. The Normalized field pattern of an end fine array is given by En=Sin (/2N) Sin (n/2)/Sin (/2)
Where =dr (cos -1) - /n dr= /2 n=10.
i. Calculate the Gain G
ii. Calculate the Approximate Gain.
3. Explain the significance of principal planes in the description of Radiation Pattern of antennas. Hence
define and distinguish between: Horizontal and Vertical plane patterns, E & H plane patterns.
4. For a source with radiation intensity u = 6 Cos, find the directivity and HPBW, when its pattern is uni
directional.
5. Prove that the impedance of an isolated antenna when used for receiving is Same as when used for
transmitting.
6. Define the following terms:
i. Directivity
ii. Gain
iii. Effective Aperture of Antennas.
7. Show that the Directivity of an elementary Dipole (Current Element) is 1.5 or 1.76dB.
8. Calculate the power gain of a half wave Dipole
9. Define antenna beam width and directivity and obtain the relation between hem.
10. Calculate the electric field (Erms) due to an isotropic radiator radiating 3KW Power at a distance of 2 Km
from it.
11. State the Reciprocity Theorem for Antennas? Prove that the Self Impedance of an Antenna in
transmitting and receiving mode is same.
12. Define Directivity. Obtain the Directivity of an Isotropic Antenna, Short Dipole and Half-Wave Dipole.
13. Evaluate the radiation characteristic HPBW, Null, Side lobe positions, and actual Side lobe levels for a
uniform linear array of 10 elements with quadrate wavelength Spacing fed with =2d/. Sketch the
pattern. What happens if is changed to =-2d/-/10.
14. Define the terms:
i. Beam Width
ii. Side Lobe Level
iii. Polarization
iv. Effective Aperture Area.
15. What is the effective length of an antenna? Determine the effective length of a half wave dipole antenna.
16. Define antenna radiation pattern. Draw and explain its parameters.
17. Calculate the radiation efficiency of an antenna if the input power is 2kW, Maximum directivity is 22dB,
and the radiated power density at a distance of 10km in the direction of the maximum directivity is
0.2mW/m2.
UNIT-2
1. Derive an expression for radiance resistance of current element starting from The expression for
radiation fields.
2. Assuming the expression of radiation fields for alternating current element, Find out its radiation
resistance. Explain the significance of the term Rr.
3. An antenna whose effective height is 100 meters at a frequency of 60KHz radiated 100KWof
power. Determine the strength of the electric field at a distance of 100km from the antenna. Neglect the
ground effect and atmospheric losses.
4. Show that the radiation resistance of a half wave dipole is 73.
5. With suitable representation show the equality of e effective length at transmit-ter and receiver.
6. A transmitter is fed with 100KW of power and produces the same Field strength At a given point
as a /2 dipole fed with 200KW of power. Calculate the gain Of the aerial
i. relative to /2 dipole
ii. relative to an isotropic aerial.
7. An elementary doublet is 10cm long. If the 1MHz current owing through it Is 2A, what is the field
strength 20km away from the doublet, in a direction Of maximum radiation?
8. What is Hertzian dipole? Write the relation between a current element and an electric dipole write
suitable expressions.
9. Draw the radiation pattern of an dipole Antenna and explain all its characteristics?
10. What is the maximum effective aperture area for a beam antenna having half- power widths of
300 and 250 in perpendicular planes intersecting in the beam axis? Assume that minor lobes are small
and can be neglected.
11. Compare the Loop antenna with Short Dipole.
12. A lossless quarter wave monopole antenna is situated above a perfectly conducting ground plane
and is driven from 300 MHz source with the amplitude of 100V. Calculate the average power radiated if
the antenna impedance is (36.5+j21.2) and internal resistance of source is 50.
13. Explain the concept of retarded scalar and vector potentials.
14. Derive the expression for radiation field of a small loop antenna of radius `a' at the centre of the
co-ordinate system
15. What is retarded potentials? Explain the significance of it.
16. Calculate the radiation resistance of an antenna which is drawing 15A current and radiating 6kW.
17. What is the maximum effective aperture area for a beam antenna having half- power widths of
300 and 250 in perpendicular planes intersecting in the beam axis? Assume that minor lobes are small
and can be neglected.
18. Describe an expression for the Radiation field of a thin half-wave dipole. An electric
fieldstrength of 10v/m is to be measured at an observation point= /2, 500 km
from a half wave dipole antenna operating at 50 MHz,
(a) Find its length l
(b) Calculate the current that is fed to the antenna and
(c) The average power radiated.
19. What is an Oscillating Dipole" and name the fields that emanate from it?
UNIT-3
1. Explain the principle of stacked arrays.

2. Obtain the array factor of a binomial array of 6 isotropic radiators.
3. Derive an expression for field pattern of a 2 element array and draw the field pattern
a) when d=/2 and =00
b) When d=/2 and =1800.
4. Explain Dolph-Tchebyshelf distribution for linear broadside arrays
Compute the principle beam width for broadside and end fire array.
5. A uniform linear array consisting of isotropic radiators spaced half wavelength
Apart has 10 elements, each element carries 0.5 amperes. Calculate the width
Of principle beam and maximum power radiated if operated as
i. Broadside array
ii. End fire array.
6. Derive the field components and draw the field pattern for two point source with spacing of _=2
and fed with currents of equal magnitude but out of phase By 1800.
7. Derive the expression for total far field for the two point sources with currents Of unequal
magnitudes and with same phase.
8. Derive the field components and draw the field pattern for two point source With spacing of /2
and fed with currents of equal magnitude and phase.
9. An antenna of jam aircraft is being used to jam enemy radar, if the antenna has a gain of 12dB in
the direction of transmission and the radiated power is 5kW, calculate the electric field intensity in the
vicinity of enemy radar which Is 3km away, The frequency of transmission is 4 GHz
10. Draw the neat setup for measuring gain of an antenna?
11. What is meant by zoning? Differentiate curved surface zoning and plane Surface zoning of lens
antenna
12. A six element receiving aerial array consists of a horizontal line of vertical Dipoles equally spaced
by 2.5m, the outputs of which are added in phase.
13. What are the significant properties of the pattern. Describe the directional Characteristic of this
array at 400MHz and 40MHz.
14. Derive Hansen-Woodyard condition for N element end _re array for enhancing its directivity.
15. Determine the fields at any far point P for an array of n elements with equal spacing and currents
equal in magnitude and phase.
16. What is end _re array? Derive expressions for the radiation pattern for an end fire array of `N'
identical elements
17. An array antenna consists of two elements with uniform in-phase excitation and an element
spacing of 2 _. Determine the number and the directions of maxima and nulls in the array factor
18. What is the maximum element spacing allowed in a binomial array so that no part of the grating
lobe appears in the visible region if it is a broadside array with 0 ? [
19. Explain the characteristics and properties of a Broad side array
20. Determine the polar diagram of the array in the plane containing the sources.
UNIT-4
1. Sketch the current distribution in vertical grounded antennas of /4 and 3/4

length.
2. Explain the radiation from traveling wave antennas.
3. Describe the design and performance of Rhombic antennas.
4. Derive an expression for Radiation pattern of a rhombic antenna. At what frequencies rhombic antenna is
used.
5. Write short notes on Helical Antenna.
6. Derive an expression for radiated electric field strength of a traveling wave radiation of length l.
7. What are the main characteristics of UHF and microwave antennas. Name at
least four and explain.
8. Write notes on:
(a) Yagi-uda Array
(b) Optimum Horn.
(c) Horns.
9. Name the types of broad band antennas and explain.
10. Compare the radiation patterns of helical in the normal mode and in the axial
mode.
UNIT-5
1. Explain the working of Yagi Antenna.

2. Compare Corner reflector and Parabolic reflector.
3. Write short notes on Folded Dipole.
4. A six feet parabolic reflector is to be used at 6GHz. Calculate the beam width between first nulls
and gain of the antenna in dB.
5. With reference to paraboloids, explain
a. Aperture Blocking.
b. FID ratio.
c. Spill over.
6. Evaluate the power gain directing and the required diameter of a paraboloid having a null beam
width of 100 at 3GHz. For what mouth diameter and capture area of a paraboloid reflector is a
BWFNof 120 obtained when it is operated at 2.5 GHz.
7. Describe the cassegrain feed mechanism of a parabolic reflectors
8. Explain why an antenna using a paraboloid reector is likely to be a highly directive receiving
antenna
9. For what applications wideband antennas are required? List the various broadband antennas,
giving typical percentage bandwidths for each?
10. With sketches describe two methods of feeding a paraboloid reector in which the primary
antenna is located at the focal point. Under what conditions this method of feed is unsatisfactory?
11. What are the three important characteristics of UHF and microwave antennas?
12. Explain the geometry of the parabolidal reectors
13. Calculate the 3dB beam width and power gain of a parabolic antenna at a frequency of 1.6GHz
with 2.4 meter diameter and 48% antenna efficiency?
14. Discuss different feed methods of paraboloidal reectors in terms of F/D ratio, Spill over, back
lobes ?
15. Explain the properties of parabolic reector antennas with centre fed and
cassegrain feed types and show that the gain of the same is G =6.0
UNIT-6
1. Explain radiation through aperture horn antenna and reflector antenna.
2. Write short notes on Antenna Pattern Measurement.
3. Describe the measurement procedures to obtain directive gain of an antenna.
4. State clearly the precautions taken with necessary justifications.
5. Describe the Dielectric Lens.
6. Calculate the minimum distance required to measure the field pattern of an antenna of diameter
2m at a frequency of 3GHz. Derive the necessary equation.
7. What is the major drawback of lens antenna, restricting their use to the highest frequencies?
8. What is meant by zoning?
9. Discuss the phenomenon of ground wave propagation at long and medium waves.
10. Show that this gives one of the most reliable methods of radio communications.
11. With neat sketch explain how gain measurement is carried out using direct comparison method?
12. Explain how antenna aperture efficiency measurement is carried out?
13. What is an \Anechoic Chamber" and how is it useful in radiation measure-
ments of antennas?
UNIT-7
1. Discus the salient features of Sky wave propagation.
2. Bring out the various problems associated with this mode of propagation. How are these
problems overcome?
3. State and explain Sommerfield equation for ground wave propagation.
4. Describe the salient features of multiple hop propagation. Mention the permissible ranges of
frequencies.
5. The critical frequency for reflection at vertical incidence of an ionospheric wave
is 10MHz. Calculate the maximum value of the electron density.
6. Write short notes on Characteristics of Ground wave propagation.
7. Show that MUF of ionized layer is given by fcp1+(D/2h)2 for flat earth.
8. Discuss the following:
a. Ionospheric Storms.
b. Sudden Ionospheric Disturbances.
9. What is the highest frequency that will be returned to earth 1000km from the transmitter by the E
layer?
10. Describe how the ionospheric layers D, E, F1 and F2 are formed?
UNIT-8
1. Show that the rms value of the electric field Erms produced at a distance ofr km in free space
by an antenna gain G and radiating a power of P kw isgiven by Erms=173 pPG/r mv/m.
2. Two aircrafts are flying at altitudes of 3000m and 5000m respectively. Whatis minimumpossible
distance along the surface of the earth over which they can have effective point to point
microwave communication? Radius of earth is 6.37 106 meters. provide a ground wave
having a strength of 0.5mv/m at a distance of 16km.
3. The transmitter antenna, having an efficiency of 50% produces a radiating field proportional of
cos. The ground wave has = 5 105 mho/cm and r= 15. Calculate the power transmitted.
4. Derive the fundamental equation for free space propagation.
5. Show that the rms value of the electric field Erms produced at a distance ofr km in free space
by an antenna gain G and radiating a power of P kw is given by Erms=173 pPG/r mv/m.
6. Two aircrafts are flying at altitudes of 3000m and 5000m respectively. Whatis minimum
possible distance along the surface of the earth over which theycan have effective point to point
microwave communication? Radius of earthis 6.37 106 meters
7. A television transmitting antenna mounted at a height of 120m radiates 15kw power equally in
all directions in azimuth at a frequency of 50MHz. Calculatethe maximum LOS range. the field
strength at a receiving antenna mounted at a height of 16m at a distance of 12km. the distance
at which the field strength reduces to 1mv/m. Derive the formulasused.
8. Determine the height of the transmitting antenna to obtain a maximum dis-tance of transmission
up to 38km from a 24meter high receiving antenna?
9. What is the effect of the curvature of earths surface on the propagation of microwave signal in a
line of sight link?
10. Briey describe the following terms connected with sky-wave propagation: virtualheight, critical
frequency, maximum usable frequency, skip distance and fading
11. Define maximum usable frequency and derive an expression for the same in thecase of a thin
ionosphere layer over a plane earth.
12. A communication link is to be established between the two stations using half wavelength
antenna for maximum directive gain .Transmitter power is 1KW,frequency of 3operation is
100MHz. and distance between transmitter and receiver is 100Km.whatis the maximum power
received by the receiver. Explain and derive the formulas
13. Explain the effect of the following on stratospheric wave propagation?
a) radius of curvature of path
b) Earths radius
c) Earths curvature.
14. Determine the maximum usable frequency for a critical frequency of 20MHz and an angle of
incidence of 350.
15. Write short notes on Duct propagation?
16. Determine the fade margin for the following conditions: distance between sites D=40Km,
frequency f=1.8GHz smooth terrain, humid climate and reliably objective 99.99%.
17. The antenna of a TV transmitter is located at a height of 500ftcalculate and plot as function of
distance to the transmitter, the height that the receiving antenna must have in order to be above
the radio horizon?
MODEL
QUESTION
PAPERS
Antennas & Wave Propagation Model Question Papers
MODEL QUESTION PAPERS
MODEL QUESTION PAPER- I

ANSWER ANY 5 FROM THE FOLLOWING:
1. a) Derive the expression for the total power radiated by a half wave dipole and hence determine
the radiation resistance.
b) Calculate the rms current required in a 1 cm. long Hertzian dipole antenna to radiate one watt
of power at a freq. of 300MHz.
2. a) Explain the term with suitable sketches, radiation intensity, beam efficiency, directivity, gain,
beam solid angle.
b) State the reciprocity theorem for antennas.
3. a) what is a folded dipole antenna and what are its applications.

b) Show that the effective aperture of Hertzian dipole = 0.199 2 .
4. a ) Explain the operation of parabolic reflector.

b) Find the directivity, beam width and effective area of a parabolic antenna for which the
reflector diameter is 6 m. and the illumination efficiency is 65%, the freq. of operation is 10GHz.
5. a) write short notes on rhombic antenna.

b) Explain the principle of Yagi-antenna and its applications.
6. a) Explain the operation of helical antenna.

b) Explain the features of loop antenna.
7. a) Discuss the abnormalities in ionosphere propagation.

b) Explain the effect of atmosphere on space wave propagation.
8. Write short notes on any of two

a) Duct propagation
b) Impedance measurement of antenna
c) Folded dipoles
MODEL QUESTION PAPER- II

1. a) Define and explain retarded potentials.

b) Define and explain the terms radiation resistance and radiation efficiency.
2. a) Establish the relationship between directivity and effective area.

b) Define reciprocity theorem and prove it in case of any antenna system.
3. a) Compare the broad side and end fire array.

b) Derive the condition for the linear array of N isotropic elements to radiate in end fire and
broad side modes.
4. a) what is parasitic elements. Why are they used?

b) Explain the difference between the driven and parasitic elements in an array.
5. a) List out the freq. ranges of operation and applications of

i) Loop antennas ii) Helical antenna iii) Lens antennas
b) Sketch and explain the constructional feature of helical antenna.
6. a) what is the principle of equality of path length, how is it applicable to horn antennas.
b) Write short notes on case-grain feed antennas
7. Explain detail about the methods for measuring half power beam width and radiation resistance
ofyagi-uda antenna and loop antenna.
8. Discuss the theory of formation of ionosphere regions, describes the properties of different
ionosphere region with special reference to seasonal variations
MODEL QUESTION PAPER- III

1. a) what are short antennas. Estimate the radiation resistance of short dipole and short mono-poles.
b) Show that only the redial component of the pointing vector has an average power flowing out
of the dipole.
2. As related to antennas define and explain the following terms

I) Gain ii) Directivity iii) Radiation resistance iv) Effective area v) Effective length vi) Efficiency
vii) Beam width viii) band width
3. a) fine the radiation pattern of four isotropic elements fed in-phase, space at ?/2 apart by using
pattern multiplication.
b) Explain the effect of earth on antenna radiation pattern.
4. a) what are the different type of antennas used at VHF. Discuss the advantages of a folded dipole.
b) What is yagi antenna? Explain its construction & properties with special reference to
directivity, band width and input impedance.
5. a) Explain & distinguish between the following.

i) Small and large loop antennas ii) short electric dipole and short magnetic dipole.
b) Sketch the image function in a square horn reflector and account for the number of images and
the resultant patterns.
6. With reference to lens antenna explain the following:

i) E-plane metal plate lens antenna ii) Aperture blocking
iii) Linearity tapered and exponential tapered horns iv) Dielectric lens
7. Describe how the gain and field patterns of the Yagi antenna can be measured with neat sketches.
8. a) Discuss the salient features of sky wave propagation. Bring out the various problems
associated withthis mode of propagation.
b) Define and distinguish between the terms: MUF, LUHF, optimum frequency.
ASSIGNMENT
QUESTIONS
Antennas & Wave Propagation Assignment Questions
UNIT-1
1. a) Define and explain: Directivity and power gain for an antenna. What is the relation
between the two? Prove that the directivity of an aerial is 0.39 db more than that of
a short dipole.
b) What are principal planes? How the antenna beam width is defined in such Planes?
2. a) An array consists of four identical isotropic sources located at the corner of a square
having diagonal 3 /4 and excited with equal current in same phase. Determine the polar
diagram of the array in the plane containing the sources
b) Compare the broad side and end fire arrays.
3. a) Define and explain effective length for an antenna. With the help of reciprocity theorem
(or otherwise) establish the equality of transmitting and receiving effective lengths of
transmitting and receiving antennas
b) Define gain, power gain, directive gain and directivity of an antenna. Prove that the
Directivity of a /2 dipole is 2.15 dB.
UNIT-2
1. a) Define and explain retarded potentials

b) Starting with the expression Idl for a current element, show that the phasor expression for
vector potential and field strengths will be Where l = / 2
2. a) Obtain expressions for potential fields due to sinusoid ally varying sources and bring out
the importance of Lorentz gauge condition
b) Define and explain the terms: radiation resistance and radiation efficiency.
3. a) Write down the radiation components of the fields for an electric dipole.
b) Estimate the power radiated and hence derives an expression for the radiation resistance
UNIT-3
1. a) Derive the conditions for the linear array of N isotropic elements to radiate in end fire and
broad side modes.
b) What is a uniform linear array and what are its applications?
2. a) An array consists of four identical isotropic sources located at the corner of a square
having diagonal 3 /4 and excited with equal current in same phase. Determine the polar
diagram of the array in the plane containing the sources.
b) Compare the broad side and end fire arrays.
3. a) obtain the expression for the beam width of broadside and end fire arrays and compare
them?
Antennas & Wave Propagation Assignment Questions
b) Explain the principle of multiplication of patterns
UNIT 4
1. a) What are the advantages yagi antenna over a single wire antenna.
b) What is a parasitic element? Where are they used?
2. a) Give the current distribution and radiation pattern of a folded dipole antenna.
Explain how the radiation pattern will be modified with the addition of a reflector and two
directors with such an antenna.
b) What are the different types of antennas used at very high frequencies? Discuss
the advantages of a folded dipole. What is a balun and why it is used at these
frequencies?
3. a) Sketch and explain the constructional features of a helical antenna. Distinguish between
axial and normal modes of helix radiations, and list out their requirements.
b) Explain the characteristics of an active square corner reflector with the help of image
principle
UNIT-5&6
1. a) Compare corner reflectors and parabolic reflectors.

b) Describe Micro Strip antenna and list out the advantages and disadvantages.
2. a) Explain the geometry, requirements and properties of parabolic reflectors. Hence establish
the Fermats principle with a neat sketch
b) Distinguish between sectoral, pyramidal and conical horns. Explain their utility
3. a) Write short notes on F/D Ratio, Spill Over, Aperture blocking, Off-set Feeds &
Cassegrain Feeds
b) Explain the gain measurement using three antenna methiod
UNIT-7
1. Explain in detail about Sky wave propagation

2. Brief explanation of reflection and refraction
3. What is MUF & Skip distance, absorption?
UNIT-8
1. Explain fundamental equation for Free Space Propagation & transmission

2. Explain in detail Space Wave Propagation
3. Explain in detail Tropospheric Wave Propagation
4. M-Curves and Duct Propagation
****THE END****
INTEGRATED
CIRCUIT
APPLICATIONS
COURSEFILE
Department of
Sponsored by
COURSE
OBJECTIVES
Integrated Circuit Applications Course Objectives
COURSE OBJECTIVES
PURPOSE
To enable the students to understand the fundamentals of integrated circuits and designing electronic
circuits using it.
A fiction voiced by the less perceptive observer of the electronics world is that analog electronics, i.e.
the domain of linear IC devices, is dead, and that digital electronics is taking over every task. While it is
true that digital electronics is growing rapidly, and has already taken over many functions previously
performed in analog circuits, that doesn't mean that analog electronics is ready to die. There are still
jobs that are either best done in analog circuits, or are more cost- effective when done in analog circuits
rather than computers. Many digital instruments, for example, require a relatively extensive analog
subsystem in order to work properly. In fact, demand for analog electronics, and for people well versed
in it, is increasing. There is a worldwide shortage of skilled personnel. This course addresses that
shortfall and equips the students to apply linear ICs in a wide range of settings.
This course is about practical applications of linear and Digital IC circuits. Although most of the
circuits are based on the ubiquitous operational amplifier, other devices are examined as well lie IC 555
timer, IC 556 dual timer, IC 565. Apart from Linear ICs the Digital ICs are also discussed such as TTL
gates, logic gates using TTL logic, Mux and Demux, Encoders, Flip-flop, memories, sequential circuit
etc. The course will allow you the students to design circuits for the applications covered. But more
than that, the principles of design for each class of circuit are transferable to other projects that are
similar in function.
This course tells how integrated circuits (ICs) evolved and the benefits and technological advancements
made possible by them. How they are designed and constructed is explained, concentrating on the TTL
and MOS types, and telling about the evolution of the small-scale, medium-scale, large-scale, and very-
large-scale ICs. First few 5 units cover linear types of ICs and the next 3 units digital types and logic-
type ICs.
Objectives of the Course:

Explain the operating principles for linear devices: What is "linear" operation, curve characteristics
in diodes, transfer curves in bipolar transistors, Concepts in the evolution of linear ICs.
Describe IC packaging for industrial uses, package outlines, pin-out conventions, effects of
environment on packaging, and how environment affects mounting
Describe the operating characteristics of linear ICs: What you learn from the specification sheet,
explanation of major parameters, construction of linear ICs, connecting linear devices in practical
circuits, transfer curves, what they mean to operation and densities of IC packaging.
Identify circuit applications for linear ICs: Oscillators and frequency control, operational amplifiers,
differential amplifiers, phase comparators, and other linear applications in industry; how to find
more applications information
Explain the operating principles for digital devices: What digital operation is and how it came
about; advantages of digital operation (over linear), switching diodes and transistors, bi-polar
digital transistors.
Describe modern integrated circuits for industry; understand linear IC application principles,
digital IC application principles, and hybrid IC application principles.
Show how to use logic devices in industrial circuits: Interchangeability of logic gates, truth tables
affected by gate material, simple flip flop latches, clocked flip flops.
Show how to interface logic devices including source requirements, buffering and fan-in, fan-
out, three-state logic and its purposes and managing open-collector logic.
Integrated Circuit Applications Course Objectives
Explain memories in industrial equipment.
Outcomes
Graduate will demonstrate the ability to identify, formulate and solved engineering problems
Graduate will demonstrate the ability to design and conduct experiments, analyze and interpret
data
Graduate will demonstrate the ability to design a system, component or process as per needs and
specification
SYLLABUS
Integrated Circuit Applications Syllabus
SYLLABUS
UNIT I: INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

Classification, chip size and circuit complexity, basic information of Op-amp, ideal and practical Op-
amp, internal circuits, Op-amp characteristics, DC and AC characteristics, 741 op-amp and its features,
modes of operation- inverting, non-inverting, differential.
UNIT II: OP-AMP APPLICATIONS

Basic application of Op-amp, instrumentation amplifier, ac amplifier, V to I and I to V converters,
sample & hold circuits, multipliers and dividers, Differentiators and Integrators, Comparators, Schmitt
trigger, Multivibrators, introduction to voltage regulators, features of 723.
UNIT III: ACTIVE FILTERS & OSCILLATORS

Introduction, 1st order LPF, HPF filters. Band pass, Band reject and all pass filters. Oscillator types
and principle of operation RC, Wien and quadrature type, waveform generators triangular,
sawtooth, square wave and VCO.
UNIT IV: TIMERS & PHASE LOCKED LOOPS

Introduction to 555 timer, functional diagram, monostable and astable operations and applications,
Schmitt Trigger. PLL - introduction, block schematic, principles and description of individual blocks
of 565.
UNIT V: D-A AND A- D CONVERTERS

Introduction, basic DAC techniques, weighted resistor DAC, R-2R ladder DAC, inverted R-2R DAC,
and IC 1408 DAC, Different types of ADCs - parallel comparator type ADC, counter type ADC,
successive approximation ADC and dual slope ADC. DAC and ADC specifications.
UNIT VI: : CMOS AND TTL ICS

Classification of Integrated circuits, comparison of various logic families, standard TTL NAND Gate-
Analysis& characteristics, TTL open collector O/Ps, Tristate TTL, MOS & CMOS open drain and
tristate outputs, CMOS transmission gate, IC interfacing- TTL driving CMOS & CMOS driving TTL.
UNIT VII: COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN

Design using TTL-74XX & CMOS 40XX series, code converters, decoders, Demultiplexers,
decoders & drives for LED & LCD display. Encoder, priority Encoder, multiplexers & their
applications, priority generators/checker circuits.Digital arithmetic circuits-parallel binary
adder/subtractor circuits using 2s, Complement system. Digital comparator circuits.
Integrated Circuit Applications Syllabus
UNIT VIII: SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS

Flip-flops & their conversions. Design of synchronous counters. Decade counter, shift registers &
applications, familiarities with commonly available 74XX & CMOS 40XX series of IC counters.
Memories: ROM architecture, types & applications, RAM architecture, Static & Dynamic RAMs,
synchronous DRAMs.
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury

2. Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
3. Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
4. OP-AMP AND LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS-James M.fiore
Websites: giga pedia,wiki pedia

Journals: nptel.iitm.ac.in
STUDENTS
SEMINAR
TOPICS
Integrated Circuit Applications Students Seminar Topics
1) DIFFERENTIATOR
2) Integrator application
3) a,c amplifiers
4) v to I and I to v converters
5) Active differentiator not used in analog computers
6) RC Phase Shift Oscillators
7) Second order High Pass Filter design
8) PLL block diagram
9) Astable Multivibrator as missing pulse detector
10) IC-555 as Schmitter
11) Schmitter design using IC-741
LECTURE PLAN
Integrated Circuit Applications Lecture Plan
LECTURE PLAN
SN Topic Teaching aides Resources

1. INTRODUCTION BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
2. Classification of Ics BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
3. Op-amp characterstics BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
4. Ic741 characterstics BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
5. Inverting mode BLACKBOARD and CHALK Linear integrated circuits- Ramakanth
A.gayAkwad
6. Non-inverting mode BLACKBOARD and CHALK Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth
A.gayAkwad
7. Linear applicationsof op-amp BLACKBOARD and CHALK Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth
A.gayAkwad
8. Op-amp as adder and subtractor BLACKBOARD and CHALK Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth
A.gayAkwad
9. Define Inverting amplifier,Non-Inverting Amplifier. BLACKBOARD and CHALK Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth
A.gayAkwad
10. Design of Integrator and differentiator. BLACKBOARD and CHALK Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth
A.gayAkwad
11. Voltage gain of instrumentation amplifier, AC amplifier BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
12. Compute the conversion of current to voltage and BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
voltage to current.
13. List and describe the non linear applications of op amp BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
14. Compute the Designing of comparators, multivibrators. BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
15. Describe the generation og triangular and square waves Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
BLACKBOARD
using Op-Amp
16. Describe log and antilog amplifiers & List their applications. BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
17. Describe the features of IC 723. BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
18. Problems BLACKBOARD and CHALK Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury

19. State filter& List the different types of filters BLACKBOARD and Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
CHALK
20. Compute the designing of LPF and HPF BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
21. Find the frequency response of LPF,HPF BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
22. Describe the designing of 2nd order LPF,HPF BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
23. Decribe the Band pass and band reject filters BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
24. Define VCO and decribe the block diagram of VCO. BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
25. List applications of VCO BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
26. Comparison of different types of oscillator BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
27. Define timer and describe its functional diagram of Ic BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
555
28. Describe the 555 opertaion and list its application BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
29. Astable multivibrator application BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
30. Monostable multivibrator applications BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
31. Describe the block diagram of PLL BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
32. Operation of vco BLACKBOARD and ,OHP Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
33. List the applications of PLL. BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
34. Application of PLL BLACKBOARD AND PPT Linear integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
35. AM,FM BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
36. BPSK DEMODULATIOM BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
37. FSK DEMODULATION BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
38. FREQUENCY TRANSILATOR BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury

39. Introduction BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
40. List the different types of A to D converters BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
41. List the different types of A to D converters BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
42. Monolithic form of ADC Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
43. List the different types of D to A converters BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury, Linear
integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
44. List the different types of D to A converters BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury, Linear
45. Describe the applications of S & H circuits, D to A BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury, Linear
and integrated circuits-Ramakanth A.gayAkwad
46. Describe the specifications of ADC and DAC BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury, Linear
47. Indirect typr adc BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
48. Monolithic form of ADC BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
49. Monolithic form OF DAC BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
50. PROBLEMS BLACKBOARD AND PPT Liner INTEGRATED Circuits-D. Roy Chodhury
51. List the classification of ICS. BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
52. Describe standard TTL NAND gate-Analysis & BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
characteristics
53. Describ TTL open collector o/ps, tristate. BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
54. Describe TTL,MOS&CMOS open drain and tristate BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
outputs.
55. Describe IC interfacing. BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
56. TTL opem collector output BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
57. NAND analysis BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
58. Comparision of various logics PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
59. Tristate TTL PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
60. TTL Driving cmos PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
61. Describe the design encoders, PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
62. mux/demux PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
63. Know the basics of 74XX & CMOS 40XX series of PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
IC counters
64. Analyse adder/substractor circuit using 2's PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
complement
65. Magnitude comparator BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
66. Priority encoder BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
67. Demultiplexers BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
68. Decoders BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
69. Describe the operation of difeerent Flip-FloP BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
70. Describe the designing of synchronous counters BLACKBOARD AND PPT R.P JAIN , Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th
edition
71. Design of synchronous counters PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
72. Decade counter BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
73. available 74XX & CMOS 40XX series of IC counters BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
74. shift registers & applications, BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
75. ROM architecture, types & applications BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
76. Dynamic RAMs, synchronous DRAMs BLACKBOARD AND PPT Digital fundamentals-Floyd and Jain,,8 th edition
LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Integrated Circuit Applications Learning Objectives
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
UNIT I: INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
At the conclusion of this unit the student should be able to:
Discuss the general properties of an operational amplifier (op-amp).
State the two types of integrated circuits classified according to their mode of operation and
explain the significance of each.
Discuss the three basic types of linear IC packages.
Explain the three basic temperature grades for ICs.
Discuss the op-amp parameters.
Discuss the electrical characteristics of an ideal op-amp.
Define the terms input offset voltage, input offset current, common mode rejection ratio, slew
rate.
Discuss the need for compensation and compensation techniques.
UNIT II: OP-AMP APPLICATIONS

Analyze the operation of an ac amplifier.
Analyze a summing amplifier using the non inverting configuration.
Analyze a subtractor circuit.
Analyze an instrumentation amplifier circuit and discuss its applications.
Analyze a difference amplifier.
Analyze voltage to current converter.
Analyze integrator and differentiator circuits.
Analyze current to voltage converter.
Discuss the operation of a basic comparator circuit and draw its input output waveforms when
used as a noninverting comparator.
Discuss important characteristics of a comparator and limitations of op-amps as comparators.
Discuss the multivibrator circuits using op amp.
Analyze a square wave and triangular wave generators.
Analyze Log and Antilog amplifiers.
Analyze Precision Rectifier circuits using op amp.
UNIT III: ACTIVE FILTERS & OSCILLATORS

Discuss the basic filters and their frequency response.
Discuss Butterworth filter.

Design a first order low pass and high pass Butterworth filter according to the given
specifications.
Design second order low pass and high pass Butterworth filter
Analyze a band pass and band reject filters.
Anlyze and design all pass filter.
Discuss oscillator principles, oscillator types and frequency stability as it relates to its operation.
Analyze the operation of a Voltage controlled oscillator.
UNIT IV: TIMERS & PHASE LOCKED LOOPS

Discuss the operation of 555 timer.
Analyze 555 timer as a Monostable multivibrator.
Analyze 555 timer as a Astable multivibrator.
Explain the operating principles of a Phase-Locked loop (PLL).
Explain the operation of a 565 PLL.
Analyze a frequency multiplier circuit using a 565 PLL.
UNIT-V: D-AANDA-D CONVERTERS

Explain the operation of digital to analog converter and compare the converter with binary
weighted resistors to that with R and 2R resistors.
Explain the operation of the successive approximation type analog to digital converter and
discuss their applications.
Discuss the operation of some of the most commonly used monolithic / hybrid D/A and A/D
converters
UNIT VI: CMOS AND TTL ICS

At the conclusion of this unit the student will be able to
Discuss the MOS Transistor operation(all types)
Explain about the Basic CMOS Logic levels, CMOS Inverter
Give the Basic CMOS NAND and NOR gate operations and implement Boolean expressions
based on them.
Noise margins, Fanin and Fanout of the CMOS gate
Describe the CMOS steady state electrical behavior (Circuit behavior with resistive loads and,
nonideal inputs )
Explain the CMOS Dynamic Electrical Behavior (Transition time, Propagation Delay)
Discuss about the CMOS Dynamic Electrical Behavior ( power consumption)
Give the different CMOS input and output structures.
Explain the CMOS with different pullup structures.
Compare all the logic families.
Give the Models of a diode, Diode logic.
Explain the basic operation of BJTs,Transistor as an inverter, Schottky
transistors
Exlain the different types of transistor-transistor logic(TTL) and their properties
Give methods for CMOS/TTL interfacing
Explain the Emitter coupled logic- their different types
Explain the properties of the Emitter coupled logic
UNIT VII: COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN

TTL-74XX & CMOS 40XX series
Design logic circuits using 74x139, 74x138, 74x49 decoders
Design of 74x148 priority encoders
Analyze three-state buffers such as 74x125 and 74x126 with the necessary timing diagram
Analyze of 74x151, 74x157 and 74x153 multiplexers with the necessary truth tables
Combine 74x151 multiplexers to get a higher order multiplexers
Construct the various odd and even parity Generator and Checker Design of logic circuit
Construct the 1-bit and 2-bit comparator circuits using 74x86 IC
Describe the various comparators such as 74x85s and 74x682 ICs
Analyze the various adder circuits such as ripple, carry look ahead, MSI group carry look ahead
and the MSI ALU units.
Developing a faster combinational multiplier
UNITVIII : SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS

Implement random combinational functions using ROMs.
Analyze the internal ROM structure and identify the sneak paths.
Discuss about two dimensional decoding in a ROM and the commercial ROM types.
Analyze the control inputs of a ROM and the ROM timing.
Clearly explain the internal structure of SRAM and its timing
Operation of a synchronous SRAM with its timing behavior.
Analyze the internal structure of a DRAM and also about a storage cell along with its read-
cycle, write-cycle timing waveform.
Explain about synchronous DRAMs
OBJECTIVE
TYPE
QUESTIONS
Integrated Circuit Applications Objective Type Questions
UNIT-1: INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
1. The effect of IB is _________________Iio on the o/p offset voltage [ ]

a) less than b) greater than c) equal to d) None
2. AC characteristics of an OP-amp are ______________ [ ]

a) offsetcurrentb) offset voltage c) ( 1+ R1 / RF) d) slew rate
3. The closed loop gain of a non-inverting amplifier is [ ]

a) ( 1+ RF/R1 ) b) RF/R1 c) ( 1+ R1 / RF) d) -R1 / RF
4. Under negative feed back , the total offset voltage is given by [ ]

a) Vsat /( 1+ A ) b) Vsat ( 1+ A) c) Vin( 1+ A) d) None
5. In a voltage follower the [ ]

a. Non inverting input is shorted to output
b. Inverting input is shorted to output.
c. Both inputs are shorted to output
d. None of the above
6. CMRR is defined as [ ]
a. ADM/ACM b. ACM/ADM
c. (ACM + ADM)/ ADM d. ADM/(ACM+ADM)
7. SVRR stands for ------------------- -------------------- ----------------- ----------------

8. In which of the following integration number of gates available are 300 to 3000 per chip
[ ]
a) SSI b) MSI c) LSI d) VLSI
9. In ideal Op- amp the input impedance is [ ]

a) Ri = 0 b) Ri = 1 c) Ri = d)none
10. Which of the following is First stage of Op-amp Internal circuit [ ]
a) Buffer amplifier b) CB amplifier c) A pair of differential amplifier d) o/p driver

11. Which of the following is the closed loop gain of Non inverting amplifier [ ]
a) (1 + R1/RF ) b) (1 RF/R1 ) c) - RF/R1 d) (1 + RF/R1 )
12. Small difference between IB+ and IB- at the I/P of Op-amp circuit is known as
[ ]
a) Bias difference b) I/P OFF set current c) O/P OFF set current d) none
13. At higher frequencies gain of practical Op-amp will [ ]

a) Increase b) Decrease c) Moderate d) None
14. For sine wave I/P slew rate [ ]
a) 2Vm v/s b) 2 f Vm v/s c) f / Vm s/v d)None
15. Which of the following are applications of 741-Op-amp [ ]
a)Voltage follower b) Integrator c) Summer d)All the above
16. In an Inverting amplifier if gain = -10 and I/P resistance = 10Kohms [ ]

then RF =
a) 1Kohm b)105 ohm c) 10Kohm d) 3Kohm
17. If R1= 10kohm and RF = 40 kohms , then the gain of non inverting amplifier is
a) 10 b) +10 c) 5 d)5 [ ]
18. The differential amplifier can also be used as ________ckt [ ]
a) Adder b) Subtractor c)Multiplier d) divider
19. The effect of OFFSET current can be minimized by keeping ____small [ ]
a) Ri b)Ro c)RF d) None
ANSWERS
1.Various mathematical 2. and . 3.Vo=9V 4.0 and 5. Buffer or unity

operations like gain follower
addition ,
Subtraction,scale
changing ,integration ,
and so on can be done.
6.0C to 70C 7.1 an d 5 8. +15 V and -15 V 9. Vio / T 10. Vo=Vin sin t ;SR
= | =2
V/ sec
UNIT 2: OP-AMP APPLICATIONS
1. The expression for total time period in simple op-amp square wave generator is [ ]
a) RC ln 1+ / 1- b) 2 RC ln 1- / 1+ / 1-
c) 2RC ln 1+ d) 2RC ln -1 / +1
2. At higher frequencies ____of op-amp limits the slope of the output square wave. [ ]
a) gain b)slew rate c) output impedance d)None
3. O/P voltage Vo of log amplifier is [ ]

Vi Vi kt V kt Vref
a) ln ( ) b) KT ln ( ) c) - ln ( i ) ln ( )
Vref Vref n Vref n Vi
4. The need of Rf in shunt with feed back capacitor Cf in the integrator ckt is [ ]
a) To decrease low b) To decrease c) To increase low d) a & b
frequency gain o/p voltage variation frequency gain
5. Which of the following is the application of the comparator [ ]

1. Phase meter b) Window detector c) zero crossing d) All the above
detector
6. Non-inverting amplifier is converted to voltage follower by making RF =. and R1= .. [ ]
a)0,0 b)0, c),0 d),
7. Which of the following is the zero DB frequency of the practical differentiator ckt [ ]
a) 2RfC1 b) 2RfCf c) 1 / 2RfC1 d) 1 / 2RfCf
8. Which of the following is the o/p waveform of the differentiator when a sinusoidal is passed
through it [ ]
0
a) spikes b) sine wave with 90 c) sine wave with d) sine wave with no
phase shift 2700 phase shift phase shift
9. Which of the following ckt is used to compress the dynamic range of the signal [ ]
a) Comparator b) Inverting amplifier C)log amplifier d) Sample-Hold ckt
11 Which of the following ckt is used in pulse code modulation [ ]

a) log amplifier b) comparator ckt c) Sample & Hold ckt d) none
12 The phase angle between two voltages can also be measured using __________ circuit
13 Write an expression for output voltage of an ideal integrator----------------
14 The expression for frequency of oscillation of triangular waveform generator using lesser
components is _____________
15 A ckt which compares a signal voltage applied at one input of an op-amp with known
reference voltage at the other input is known as ____________________________
16 For radio frequency range __________________ oscillators are used.
17 _________ determines when an unknown input is between the threshold levels.
18 Another name for monostable multivibrator is ______________
19 In an instrumentation amplifier high resistance buffer is used preceding each input of op-amp
to avoid _____________
20 Precision diode is capable of rectifying i/p signal of the order of _____________ volts.
ANSWERS:
1.Loading of the 2.Current 3.Better 4.Voltage less than 5.Diode

input source is amplifier. cut in voltage Vv
reduced. can be rectified
6.Logarithmic 7. Necessary 8.Square and 9.f= R2 /4RR1C 10.Linear rectifier

amplifier triangular circuit, super diode
UNIT 3: ACTIVE FILTERS & OSCILLATORS
1 To realize butter-worth 3rd order filter one can combine . order and .. order filters [ ]
a) 1 & 2 b) 5 & 2 c) 4 & 1 d) none
2 A HPF will [ ]
a) Pass high frequencies b) Pass low c) Block DC d) a & c
frequencies
3 With the increase in order of the filter, the gain will increase or decrease at the rate of [ ]
a) 40 dB/decade b) 60 dB/Decade c) 20 dB/Decade d) none
4 ..filter is used to reject an unwanted frequency like 50 HZ
5 For sustained oscillation, how many conditions must be satisfied [ ]

a) 4 b)3 c) 2 d) 1
6 Which of the following are elements of passive filters [ ]

a)op-amps b)R,L,C c)diode D) Transistors
7 In which of the following range of frequencies are attenuated [ ]

a) stop band b)pass band c)band pass d)none
8 Which of the following filter is also called as Multiple feedback filter [ ]

a) Wide band pass filter b) Narrow band pass c) wide band d) Narrow band
filter elimination filter elimination filter
9 A low pass filter will [ ]
a)Pass high frequencies b)Block low frequencies c)pass DC d) Block DC
10 . A high pass filter [ ]

a) pass high frequencies b)pass low frequencies c) pass DC d)none
11 Above cutoff frequency of 4th order LPF output voltage decrement rate of [ ]
a) 20db/decade b)40db/decade c) 60db/decade d) 80db/decade
12 Below cutoff frequency of 2nd order HPF the output voltage increase at a rate of [ ]
a) 20db/decade b) 40db/decade c) 60db/decade d) 80db/decade
13 All pass filter is also called as [ ]

a) Delay equalizers b) Phase correctors c) Notch filter d) a & b
14 Butter worth filter response have a . pass band &..stop band

a) Flat, Flat b) Ripple , Ripple c) Flat, Ripple d) Ripple, Flat
15 Combine.order&order filters
a)1&2 b)5&2 c)4&1 d)none
16 Standard transfer function of narrow band reject filter is given by . [ ]

2
A0 ( S + ) 2
b)
A0 2
A0 ( S + ) 2
2
a) c) d)
S 2 + 0 S + 02 S 2 + 0 S + 02 S 2 + 0 S + 02 S 2 + 0 S + 02
17 Below the cut off frequency of fourth order of HPF the output voltage decreases at a rate of
____________ db/decade
a) 20 b) 40 c) 60 d) 80
18 Which of the following is called Relaxation oscillator. [ ]

a) Colpitts b) Hartley c d c) Saw tooth wave d)RC Phase shift
generator
19 Narrow band reject filter is commonly called as . Filter
20 The frequency at which maximum attenuation occurs in notch filter is called as _____________
ANSWERS:
1.Av 2.Minimized 3.Increases 4.HPF 5.LPF

6.First-order 7.First-order LPF 8.(1-s)(1+s) 9.<1 , about 0.1 10.Parallel
HPF
UNIT 4: TIMERS & PHASE LOCKED LOOPS
1 Which of the following is the feature of 555 timer [ ]

a) Adjustableduty cycle b) It provides c) It is compatible with d) All the above
time delay TTL and CMOS circuit
2 Which of the following is dual timer IC [ ]

a)IC 555 b) IC 565 c) IC 556 d)IC 1496
3 Which of the following is Balanced modulator [ ]

a)IC 556 b)IC565 C)IC1496 d)IC 555
4 Which of the following IC works as phase locked loop [ ]

a)IC 556 b)IC 565 d)IC 555 c)IC 1596
6 Which of the following can be used as both linear & switched regulator [ ]
a)IC 555 b)IC 7805 c)IC 7912 d) IC 723

7 In which of following regulator ,Transistor will act as a controlled switch [ ]
a) Regulated power supply b)SMPS c) IC 7809 d) 7905
9 8.-------------circuit can be also called as square wave converter [ ]

a) Bi stable multi b)Mono stable multi c)A stable multi d)Schmitt trigger
vibrator vibrator vibrator
10 A stable multi vibrator is also called as [ ]
a)Square wave b)Square wave c)Sine wave d)Triangular wave

converter generator generator generator
11 Which of the following is the expression for pulse width of 555 mono stable multivibrator
a)1.1 RA C b)0.69 RC c)0.119RC d)none
12 Free running frequency of 565 PLL is [ ]
a) 0.3/ R1 C1 b) 1.2/ R1 C1 c) 1.45/ R1 C1 d)2.2 R1 C1
13 Which of the following is an application of 555 IC Astable [ ]

a) PWM generator b) PPM generator c) FSK demodulator
14 To use Monostable multivibratror as divide by-2 circuit the relation between the length of
timing cycle tp and the time period of the trigger input T is [ ]
a) tp =T b) tp > T c) tp < T d) none
15 Connection between + Vcc and reset terminal in 555 IC Timer [ ]
a) Prevents b) Stabilizes Vcc c) Prevents false d) serves no purpose
oscillations triggering
16 IC 566 simultaneously produces and . Waves.

17 IC 566 is a to . Converter.
18 When the input frequency is equal to VCO frequency, the PLL will be in . State
19 The capture range is given by the expression .
20 Capture range is always .. lock range

21 A capacitor is connected between output and ground terminal to remove the effecy
ANSWERS:
1.a 2.dacb 3.50 4.Direct and 5..weighted 6.R-2R

Intigrated type resistor type LADDER
TYPE
7.stray 8.1456 9.Direct type 10.0808 11.SOC,EOC
capacitance effect and integrated
due suddentages type
UNIT 5: D-A AND A- D CONVERTERS
1 Feed Through Rejection Ratio is computed as [ ]

a) 20 log vi / vo b) 20 log vi / vo c) 20 log vi * vo d) 20 log vi + vo
2 Arrange the following ADCs in the order of speed fastest on top slowest below
a) Successive b) Dual Slope ADC c) Servo ADC d) Flash ADC
Approximation ADC
3 A 12 bit DAC has a reference voltage of 5.0 V. What is its resolution in mVolts.------------
4 Depending upon the conversion technique , ADCs are classified as .. and .
5. ----------------- DAC uses many different values of resistors
6. ----------------- DAC uses only two different values of resistors.

7. The Inverted R-2R DAC is better than R-2R DAC because --------------------------------------------------
8. The Part Number of one of the Monolithic DAC is ______________
9. The Inverted R-2R DAC is better than R-2R DAC because ------------------------------------------------------
10. The Part Number of one of the Monolithic DAC is ______________
11. Name the two classes of Analog to Digital Convertors-----------------------------------
12. The control Signals of an ADC are------------------------------
ANSWERS:
1.A 2.C 3.C 4.B 5.D 6.B 7.D 8.A

9.B 10.A 11.B 12.A 13.B 14.C 15.C
UNIT 6: TTL AND CMOS ICS
1 Which of the following is non-saturated Logic family [ ]

a) DTL b) Standard TTL c) Schottky TTL d) HTL
2 In modified Integrated DTL NAND gate the fan-out is increased by replacing diode by a [ ]
a) Resistor b) Schottky diode c) Transistor c) Capacitor
3 Emitter Coupled Logic offers simultaneously [ ]

a) AND / OR Logic b) AND / NOR logic c) OR / NOR logic d) None
4 4. Advantage of MOS Logic family is [ ]

a) large propagation b) Small power c) large fan out d) high speed of
delay consumption operation
6 In Tristatic logic the three states are [ ]

a) Low, low b) High, Low, c) High, Low, high d) High, Low, high
impedance states low impedance gain state current states
states
7 High, Low, high impedance states 6.The fastest of all the logic families is [ ]
a) HTL b) I2L c) ECL d) Schottky TTL
9 The unconnected inputs of CMOS NAND gate is considered to be at [ ]

a) Logic 1 a) Logic 0 c) high impedance d) None
10 Which of the following logic family has more power dissipation per gate [ ]
a) ECL b) DTL c) TTL d) Schottky TTL
11 The condition required for CMOS gate driving N TTL gates [ ]

a) VOH ( CMOS ) VIH b) VOH ( CMOS ) c) VOH ( CMOS ) d) VOH ( CMOS ) VIL
(TTL) VIL (TTL) VIH (TTL) (TTL)
12 10 The condition required for TTL gate driving CMOS gate [ ]

a) IOL ( TTL) -N IIL b) IIL ( TTL) -N IOL c) IOL ( TTL) -N IIL d) IIL ( TTL) -N IOL
(CMOS) (CMOS) (CMOS) (CMOS)
13 Large Memory Chips and Advanced Micro Processors fall in ________Category [ ]

a)SSI b)ULSI c)MSI d)VLSI
14 Low power Schottky has IOH = -400A, IOL = 8mA, IIH = 20A and IIL = -400A when interfacing
two such gates, the fanout can be __________
a) 30 b) 10 c) 15 d) 20
15 If a CMOS circuit has +10V supply, the typical high output voltage is ___________
a) 5V b) 15V c) 2V d) 10 V
16 What is the signal level for logic zero in diode logic system
a) 0-1V b) 0-3V c) 0-2V
17 The basic advantage of LS- TTL over TTL is _____________
18 The noise margin of ECL is very high ( TRUE /FALSE)
19 The static power dissipated in CMOS circuit is known as CV2f power ( TRUE/FALSE)
20 Which CMOS family is compatible with TTL _______________
21 Among all logic families which has got highest Fan-out.______________
22 Speed of operation is specified in terms of -------------------------time
23 Propagation delay time is the average of---------------------and ---------------
24 Units for Figure of merit---------------------
25 For military purposes the operating temperature range is ------------to ------------
26 In RTL logic, if the base resistors are removed then the obtained logic is-------------------
27 Current Hogging occurs in ------------------------
28 To eliminate Current Hogging we go for ---------------------------------logic.
29 ECL gives ---------------------and ---------------------------logic at the output
30 In DTL to increase the fan-out by increasing load current, one of the diode connected to base of
transistor is replaced with ----------------------.Propagation delay time of Schottky TTL is-------------
ANSWERS:
1.A 2.A 3.A 4.A 5.A 6.A 7.A 8.A
9.A 10.A 11.A 12.A 13.A 14.A 15.A
UNIT 7: COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS

1. The 74X139 is a ---------- [ ]
a) dual 2 X4 decoder b) 3X8 decoder c) 4X16 decoder d) none
2. What is the basic gate that is used in parity generation and checking [ ]
a) XOR b) XNOR c) AND d) OR
3. The adder which will use generate and propagate signals is called --------- [ ]
a) carry look ahead adder b) serial adder c) parallel adder d) carry save adder
4. In combinational multiplier to reduce delay -------- adder is used [ ]

a) carry look ahead b) serial adder c) parallel adder d) carry save adder
adder
5. 84X86 is a ________________ [ ]
a)2-input xor gate b)2-input and gate c) 2-input or gate d)none
6 11. 74x153 is a _____________ [ ]

a) 4-input, 2-bit MUX b) 2-input, 4-bit MUX
c) 8-input, 1-bit MUX d) 16-input, 2-bit MUX
7 10. 74X138 consists of _____________ [ ]

a) active-low o/ps b) active-high o/ps c) both a) and b) d) none
8 74X164 consists of ____________ serial input pins [ ]

a) 2 b) 1 c) 3 d) 4
9 The sensitivity list for DFF consists of __________ [ ]

a) clock b) D input c) output d) both a) and b)
10 Latch is a _________circuit. [ ]
a) level sensitive b) edge sensitive c) both a) and b) d) combinational
11 74X85 is a _______________ [ ]
a) 1-bit comparator b) 2-bit comparator c) 4-bit comparator d) 8-bit comparator
12 74X280 provides_____________ [ ]
a) even parity b) odd parity output c) both a) and b) d) none
13 74X541 consists of _________________
14 The compiler _________________ signals (same signal) that are driven in two or more different
processes.
15 7. In the 74X148 priority encoder GS is called ______________ and EO is used to handle

___________________priority request.
16 In three state driver when enable i/p is asserted the device behave like a ____________
17 The 16 X 5 ROM has ____________________ i/p & _________________o/p
18 Most of ROMS are constructed using ______________ and ____________
19 The control signals used in ROM are_______________ and _______________________
20 Each decoder o/p is called _______________ and it selects ________________________
21 In the ROM circuit, each intersection b/w ________________ and ___________ corresponds to one bit
of memory
22 In the EPROM ___________________________________ are used for storage .
23 74x181 is a ______________________
24 74x74 is a___________________
25 74X375 is a ____________________________________
26 Octal edge triggered DFF is also called as _____________
27 In 4-bit parallel-in,parallel-out shift register input to each ff is connected through______________
ANSWERS:
1.A 2.A 3.A 4.A 5.A 6.A
7.A 8.A 9.A 10.A 11.A 12.A
UNIT 8:SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS

1. In Johnson counter using 74 X 194 , LIN serial input connected to [ ]
a. QA1 b. QA c. CLR L d. TE
2. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is 8 bit parallel in serial out shift register [ ]

a. 74166 b. GAL22V10 c. 74 X 74 d. 74 X 112
3. To get a flip - flop out of metastable state [ ]

a. Force the flip - flop into a valid logic state b. force the flip - flop into a weak high logic
using input signals state using input signals
c. force the flip - flop into a weak low logic d. force the flip - flop into a unknown logic
state using input signals state using input signals
4. EPROM (CMOS Technology) Write cycle is [ ]

a. 10 - 50 s/byte b. 50 - 100 s /byte c. 70 - 500 s /byte d. 100 - 500 s /byte
5. For reliable synchronous design , one of the following is valid [ ]

a. synchronizers should have low probability of b. synchronizers should have medium
failure probability of failure.
c. ensure FF have negative set up & hold time d. maximize amount of clock skew
marging
6 Two dimensional decoding allows a 128 X 1 ROM to be built with [ ]
a. 3 to 8 decoder and 16 input multiplexer b. 2 to 4 decoder and 10 input multiplexer
c. 3 to 10 decoder and 20 input multiplexer d. 10 to 1024 decoder and 1024 input
multiplexer
7 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is used to reduce the decoder size in ROM [ ]
a. Two dimensional decoding b. one dimensional decoding
c. five dimensional decoding d. four dimensional decoding
8 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is 8K X 8 EPROM. [ ]
a. 2764 b. HM6264 c. 74 X 74 e. 74 X 112
9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ input must be asserted to enable outputs in EPROM [ ]

a. output enable(OE) b. CLR L c. WE L d. CS
10 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ supports burst mode

a. late write SSRAM with flow through outputs b. Extended data out DRAM
c. SRAMs output buffer d. ZBT SSRAM with pipelined outputs
11 Important Flip Flop function for ASIC testing is

a. scan capability b. input capability c. output capability d. switching capability
12 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is positive edge triggering D FlipFlop.

a. 74LS74 b. 74LS109 c. 74LS79 d. 74LS70
13 74x682 does not provide

a. less than output b. greater than output c. equal output D.NONE
Answers:
1.A 2.A 3.A 4.A 5.A 6.A 7.A

8.A 9.A 10.A 11.A 12.A 13.A 14.A
ESSAY TYPE
QUESTIONS
Integrated Circuit Applications Essay Type Questions

UNIT1: INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
1 (a) Broadly classify the integrated circuits for a wide range of applications.
(b) Derive the output voltage of an op - amp based differential amplifier
2. (a) Explain how the averaging circuit can be derived from the summer.
(b) Show that the output of the subtractor is proportional to the di_erence be-tween the two input voltages.
(c) Design the op-amp circuit which can give the output as V0 = 2 V1 - 3 V2 + 4V3 - 5V4
3. (a) For the 741 IC op - amp, the supply voltage rejection ratio (SVRR) is 150V/V.Calculate the change in
this op - amps input offset voltage Vio if the supply voltages are varied from 10V to 12V.
(b) List and explain the characteristics of an ideal op - amp.
(c) Draw the pin diagram of A741 op - amp
4. (a) What is an op-amp? Why it is called so?

(b) Explain the parameters that should be considered for ac and dc applications of an op-amp.
(c) Draw and explain the three open loop op - amp configurations with neat circuit diagram.
5. (a) Explain the following parameters of an op-amp:

i. Input bias current
ii. Input offset current
iii.Input offset voltage.
(b) An op-amp is given 7 KHz sine warye input signal. Find the largest amplitude
6. (a) An op - amp has a slew rate of 2V/s. What is the maximum frequency of an output sinusoid of peak
value 5 V at which the distortion sets in due to the slew rate limitation?
(b) What are the characteristics of an ideal op - amp and Explain them
7. (a) Define the following for a given op - amp.

i. CMRR
ii. PSRR
iii. Slew rate
iv. Input Offset voltage.
(b) Discuss the Pole - Zero and Dominant pole compensation techniques for an op - amp.
8 (a) List out the AC characteristics of an op-amp and discuss about them?
(b) For an op-amp, PSRR=70dB(min), CMRR=105, differential mode gain, Ad=105.The output voltage
changes by 20v in 4 microseconds. Calculate
i. numerical value of PSRR
ii. Common mode gain
iii. Slew rate of the op - amp.
9 (a) Discuss the stability of an op-amp by considering non-inverting amplier with resistive feed back
(b).For an op-amp PSRR = 70db (min) CMRR = 105 and differential mode gain Ad = 105. The output
voltage changes by 20V in 4Sec calculate:
i. PSRR
ii. Common mode gain
iii. Slew Rate.
10 Discuss Dominant pole, pole zero and Feed Forward compensation technique. Whatare its merits and
demerits.
a) An op - amp has a slew rate of 2V/s. What is the maximum frequency of an output sinusoid of peak
value 5 V at which the distortion sets in due to the slew rate limitation?
b) What are the characteristics of an ideal op - amp and Explain.?
11 (a) Explain the function of various blocks in block diagram of an op - amp.

(b) What are the specifications of ideal and practical op - amps and compare Them?
12 (a) What are the three operating temperature ranges of the IC?
(b) List out the AC characteristics of an op - amp and discuss about them.
(c) Draw an equivalent circuit of op - amp.?
13 (a) Explain the following parameters of an op-amp:

i. Input bias current (ii.) Input offset current iii. Input offset voltage.
(b) An op-amp is given 7 KHz sine warye input signal. Find the largest amplitude of undistored output of
the amplifier with ICQ of 8A and CC of 27pF
14 (a) Explain the following parameters of an op-amp.

i. CMRR
ii. PSRR
iii. Slew rate.
(b) For an op-amp having a slew rate of 3V/msec. What is the maximum closed loop voltage gain that can
be used when the input signal varies by 0.4 in 12microsec.
15 (a) Explain the various techniques used to compensate for thermal drift in Op-Amps.
(b) Explain the effects of time on input-Offset voltage and input-offset current.
16 (a)Explain the role of negative feedback in operational amplifiers.

(b) How does negative feedback effect, the performance of an inverting amplifiers?
UNIT2: APPLICATIONS OF OP-AMP

1 (a) Calculate the exact closed loop gain inverting amplifier shown in figure3 if AOL = 2,00,000, Ri = 2M
and R0 = 75.
(b) Explain about any two linear and nonlinear
applications of op - amp.
2 (a) Explain the operation of a practical integrator with suitable mathematicalexpressions.
(b) Obtain the frequency response of a practical integrator. What are its applications?
3 (a) What is the name of the circuit that is used to detect the peak value of non-sinusoidal input wave
forms? Explain its operation?
(b) Distinguish between positive and -ve cllipper circuits. Explain the operation of +ve and -ve chippers
with the help of circuit and wave form.
4 (a) Design a current to voltage converter using OP-AMP and explain how it can be used to measure the
output of photocell.
(b) Discuss the differences between differential amplifiers used in the first two stages of OP- AMP
5 (a) Draw the circuit diagram of a two input non-inverting type summing amplifier and derive the
expression for the output voltage.
(b) Briefly explain why negative feedback is desirable in amplifier applications.
(c) How does negative feedback affect the performance of an inverting amplifier?
6 (a) Find V0 for the circuit shown in figure
(b) Find R1 and Rf in the practical integrator (lossy integrator), so that the peak gain is 20 dB and the gain
is 3 dB down from its peak when = 10,000 rad/sec. Use a capacitance of 0.01F
7 (a) Design a differentiator to differentiate an input signal that varies in frequencyfrom 10 Hz to about
1KHz. If a sine wave of 1V peak at 1000 Hz is applied to this differentiator draw the output
waveforms.
(b) Why active differentiator circuits are not used in analog computer to solve differential equations.
8 Explain the difference between the integrator and differentiator and give oneapplication of each.
(b) Design an adder circuit using op - amp to get the output expression as V0 = -(0.1 V1 + 10V2 + V3)
Where V1,V2, V3 are the inputs.
(c) Explain voltage follower with neat diagram.
9 (a) How the operational amplifier can be used as a differentiator and integrator.
(b) Explain how an operational amplifier can be used as summing amplifier
10 What is an instrumentation amplier? What are the basic requirements of a good instrumentation
amplier.?explain operation?
11 (a) Explain how the averaging circuit can be derived from the summer.?
(b) Show that the output of the subtractor is proportional to the diference between the two input voltages.?
12 (a) Explain the operation of a practical integrator with suitable mathematical expressions.
(b) Obtain the frequency response of a practical integrator. What are its applications?
13 (a) Explain the operation of voltage to current converter.

i. With oating load ii. Grounded load.
(b) An inverting ampli_er using op-amp has R1 = 10 k and Rf = 47 K. It is applied with 2V peak to peak
sine wave. An AC voltmeter is used between the output terminal and ground to measure the output
voltage calculate the reading on the voltmeter. Assume supply voltage to be 12V.
14 (a) Calculate the exact closed loop gain

inverting amplifier shown in figure3 if
AOL = 2,00,000, Ri = 2M and R0 = 75.
(b) Explain about any two linear and
nonlinear applications of op - amp.?
15 (a) In an integrator circuit, Ri = 10Kohms, CF = 1 second, and the input is a step input Vin = 2V for
0 t 4. Determine the output voltage and sketch it.
(b) Draw the frequency response curve of a differentiator. How is it modified when a small resistor is
connected in series with the capacitor?
16 (a) Distinguish between astable, bistable and monostable multivibrators.

(b) Determine VTH and VTL (TL: Lower threshold, TH: upper threshold) and hysteresis of the inverting
comparator shown in figure4
17 Draw the circuit diagram of a triangular wave generator using a comparator and integrator. Explain its
operation by referring to the output waveform?
18 (a) What is the name of the circuit that is used to detect the peak value of non-sinusoidal input wave
forms? Explain its operation?
(b) Distinguish between positive and -ve chipper circuits. Explain the operationof +ve and -ve chippers
with the help of circuit and wave form.?
19 (a) What is absolute value output circuit? How can it be used as a full wave rectification.
(b) For an op-amp Comparator assume VCC = 12V, Vsat = 0.9VCC If a sine wave of 10V is applied,
calculate threshold level and plot input output waveforms
20 (a) What are the limitations of comparator.

(b) In the square wave oscillator as shown in figure , calculate the frequency of oscillations. If R2= 10K
R1= 8:6K Rf= 100K and C = 0:01uf:
21 (a) Design a logarithmic amplifier for positive input voltages in the range 5mV to 50V.
(b) With suitable circuit diagram explain the operation of a triangular wave generator using a comparator
and a integrator.
22 (a) What is a precision diode?

(b) Draw the circuit of a negative peak clamper and explain its operation withnecessary waveforms.
(c) Explain the functioning of a peak detector with necessary diagrams.
23 (a) Design a monostable multivibrator with trigger pulse shape which will drive an LED, ON for 0.5
seconds each time it is pulsed.
(b) Derive the frequency of oscillation of a RC phase shift oscillator and explain the operation of the
circuit.
24 (a) What is absolute value output circuit? How can it be used as a full ware rectification.
b) For an op-amp Comparator assume VCC = 12V, Vsat = 0.9VCC If a sine wave of 10V is applied,
calculate threshold level and plot input output waveforms
25 (a) What are the limitations of comparator.
(b) In the square wave oscillator as shown in _gure , calculate the frequency of oscillations. If R2= 10K
R1= 8:6K Rf= 100K and C = 0:01uf
26 (a) Explain the operation of voltage to current converter. i). With oating load ii) Grounded load.
(b) An inverting ampli_er using op-amp has R1 = 10 k and Rf = 47 K. It is applied with 2V peak to peak
sine wave. An AC voltmeter is used between the output terminal and ground to measure the output
voltage calculate the reading on the voltmeter. Assume supply voltage to be _ 12V
27 (a) Design a logarithmic amplifier for positive input voltages in the range 5mV to 50V.
(b) With suitable circuit diagram explain the operation of a triangular wave gen-
erator using a comparator and a integrator.
28 (a) With the help of transfer characteristics, input and output wave forms explain the operation of non-
inverting Schmitt trigger circuit.
(b) What is sample and hold circuit? Explain its operation with the help of circuit diagram and waveform.
UNIT3: OSCILLATORS AND ACTIVE FILTER

1 (a) What is VCVS configuration. Explain.
(b) Design a VCVS low pass butter worth second order filter with a cut of_ frequency of 4KHz assume
necessary data.
2 (a) Define afilter? How filters are classified?

(b) Explain various types of filters alongwith their frequency response.
(c) Define the conditions on the feedback circuit of an amplifier to convert it into an oscillator?
3 (a) What is VCVS conFIG_guration. Explain.
(b) Design a VCVS low pass butter worth second order filter with a cut of fre-quency of 4KHz assume
necessary data
4 (a) Derive the expression for voltage to frequency conversion factor.

(b) Draw the pin diagram of 566 VCO IC and list important specifications of 566 VCO IC.
5 (a) Explain the operation of Quadrature oscillator with neat diagram.

(b) Design a notch filter for fo = 8kHz and Q = 10. Choose C= 500pF.
6 (a) List the conditions for oscillation in all the three types of oscillators, namely,RC phase shift, Wien -
bridge and quadrature oscillators.
(b) Design an op - amp based relaxation oscillator and derive the frequency of oscillation
7 (a) Derive the expression for the transfer function of 2nd order Low pass filter.
(b) Give the functional block diagram of VCO NE 566 and explain its working and necessary expression for
free running or center frequency.
8 (a) Explain the term VSVS configuration. Design a VCVS low pass Butterworth second order filter with a
cutoff frequency of 4kHz. Assume necessary data in the design process.
(b) What is meant by all pass filter? Draw the circuit of it.
9 (a) Explain the advantages of active filter. Explain different configurations of active filter. Discuss their
merits and demerits.
(b) List out the applications of VCO 566.Design an RC phase shift oscillator for a frequency of 500Hz.
10 (a) Draw a band - pass filter circuit with its frequency response curve. Explain its working.
(b) Design a first order wide band reject filter with a higher cutoff frequency of 100Hz and a lower cutoff
frequency of 1kHz. Calculate the Q of the filter?
11 (a) Draw a band - pass filter circuit with its frequency response curve. Explain its working.
(b) Design a first order wide band reject filter with a higher cutoff frequency of =100Hz and a lower cutoff
frequency of 1kHz. Calculate the Q of the filter?
12 (a) Explain the term Frequency Scaling with a suitable example.

(b) Design a wide band-pass filter with fH=200Hz , fL=1KHz and a pass-band gain=4. Draw the frequency
response and calculate Q factor for the filter.
13 (a) Definene a filter? How filterters are classiffied_ed?

(b) Explain various types of filters alongwith their frequency response.
(c) Define the conditions on the feedback circuit of an ampli_er to convert it into an oscillator.
14 (a) Derive the expression for voltage to frequency conversion factor.

(b) Draw the pin diagram of 566 VCO IC and list important speci_cations of 566 VCO IC.
15 (a) Draw the circuit and explain the operation of narrow band pass _lter.
(b) Design a narrow band pass _lter with two feed back paths with Fc=1.5KHz Q=7 and AF =15.
16 (a) Draw the circuit and explain the operation of wide band reject _lter.
(b) Design a wide band reject _lter having fH= 400 Hz and fL= 2KHz with a pass band gain of 2.
UNIT4:TIMERS AND OSCILLATORS

1 (a) With the help of circuit diagram and wave forms explain how IC 555 can be operated as monostable
multi-vibrator.?
(b) What is the importance of Pin5 of IC 555? Explain
2 (a) An IC555 timer used as a monostable has R=20 K and C = 0.01uf. What is the duration of output pulse?
(b) Explain how IC555 can be used as missing pulse detector.
3 (a) Compare monostable and astable multi-vibrators.

(b) What are the features of IC 555 timer.
(c) Design a timer, which should turn ON heater immediately after pressing a push button and should hold
heater ON state for 5 seconds
4 a) Describe any two application of 555 timer in

i. Astable multivibrator confiuration.
ii. Monostable multivibrator configuration.
5 a) Draw and explain the functional diagram of a 555 timer.

(b) Explain the function of reset pin
6 (a) An IC555 timer used as a monostable has R=20 K and C = 0.01_f. What is the duration of output pulse?
(b) Explain how IC555 can be used as missing pulse detector
7 .(a) Draw and explain the functional block diagram of IC 555.

(b) Explain the functioning of 555 in Monostable configuration
8 (a) Derive the expression for the frequency of the output of an astable multi-vibrator.
(b) A 555 timer is configured to run in astable mode with R1 = 20K and R2 = 8K and C = 0.1_f. Determine
the output frequency and duty cycle..
9 (a) Explain the significance of each of comparators and operation of 555 timer.
(b) Explain the application of 555 timer as linear ramp generator.
(c) List out the applications of VCO 566
10 (a) Explain how phase locked loop is used as a frequency translator and AM demodulator.
(b) Explain linear ramp generation using 555 timer.
11 (a) Explain the operation of Monostable multivibrator using 555 timer. Derive the expression of time delay
of a Monostable multivibrator using 555 timer.
(b) Design monostable multivibrator using 555 timer to produce a pulse width of 100 m sec
UNIT5:DAC AND ADC:

1 (a) Find the resolution of 12-bit D/A converter.
(b) List the draw backs of binary weighted resistor technique D/A conversion.
(c) Explain the working of inverted R-2R ladder D/A converter
2 (a) Write a short notes on i. Limitations of weighted resistor type D/A converters. ii. Resolution of a
converter circuit.
(b) Calculate the number of bits required to represent a full scale voltage of 10V with a resolution of 5 mV
approximate
3 (a) Write a note on multiplying DACs. (b) List important speci_cations of a standard ADC IC.
(c) An 8 bit successive approximation Register type ADC is driven by a 1 MHz clock. Find its conversion
time.
4 (a) Explain successive approximation ADC with the help of block diagram. Also illustrate conversion
process.
(b) An 8-bit successive approximation ADC is driven by a 1 MHz clock. Find its conversion time.
5 (a) Discuss the features operation and pin diagram of 0803 and 0808 .
(b) Calculate the quantizing error for 12-bit ADC with full scale input voltage 4.095V.
6 (a) Draw a schematic diagram of a D/A converter. Use resistance values whose ratios are multiples of 2.
Explain the operation of the converter.
(b) Draw the block diagram of a converting 4-bit A/D converter and explain its operation. Sketch the
output waveform.
7 (a) What are the basic blocks preceding an Analog to Digital converter in a typical application like digital
audio recording?
(b) Draw the circuit of weighted resistor DAC and derive expression for output analog voltage Vo.
(c) Compare merits and demerits of A/D converters.
8 (a) Compare the conversion times and e_ciencies of 8-bit tracking type and successive approximation type
A/D converters.
(b) Determine the resolution of an 8-bit A/D converter for a 10V input range.
(c) If the maximum output voltage of a 7-bit D/A converter is 25.4 V. What is the smallest change in the
output as the binary count increases.
9 (a) Explain the operation of a Successive Approximation type analog to digital converter.
(b) Calculate the no. of bits required to represent a full scale voltage of 10V with a resolution of 5mV
approximately
10 (a) Tracking type analog to digital converters.

(b) Comparison of conversion times and hardware complexities of various analog to digital converters.
11 (a) Draw the timing wave forms of ADC 0808.

(b) Compare Dual slope type, Flash type successive approximation register type and counter type ADCs
interms of conversion times and accuracies
12 (a) What are the important features of counter type A/D converter.
(b) Compare tracking and counter type converters.
(c) Determine the resolution of a 8-bit A/D converter for a 10V input range.
13 (a) Define important performance specifications of Digital to Analog converters listing their typical values.
(b) Describe the operation of an R - 2R ladder type DAC.
14 (a) Compare the conversion times and e_ciencies of 8-bit tracking type and successive approximation type
A/D converters.
(b) Determine the resolution of an 8-bit A/D converter for a 10V input range.
(c) If the maximum output voltage of a 7-bit D/A converter is 25.4 V. What is the smallest change in the
output as the binary count increases
UNIT VI:CMOS AND TTL
1 Draw the circuit for Diode logic AND gate and explain its operation with the help of truth table. compare
this logic family with TTL and CMOS logic family.
2 (a) What are the salient features of CMOS logic family. Compare this with PMOS and NMOS logic
families.
(b) Draw the circuit for CMOS NOR logic gate and explain its functioning clearly giving truth table
3 (a) Draw the CMOS circuit diagram of tri-state buffer. Explain the circuit with the help of logic diagram
and function table.
(b) Design a CMOS transistor circuit that realizes the following Boolean function. f(a) = (P + Q). (Q + R)
Also explain its functional operations
4 Compare CMOS, TTL and ECL with reference to logic levels, DC Noise margin, propagation delay and
fan-out.
5 (a) Design CMOS transistor circuit for 3-input AND gate. With the help of function table explain the
operation of the circuit diagram.
(b) Design a CMOS transistor circuit that has the functional behavior as f(x) = (a + b) (b + c)(a + c) Also
explain its functional operation.
6 (a) Explain the following terms with reference to TTL gate.

i. Voltage levels for logic 1 & logic 0 ii. DC Noise margin
iii. Low-state unit load iv. High-state fan-out
(b) Design a transistor circuit of 2-input ECL NOR gate. Explain the operation with the help of functional
table.
7 (a) What are the parameters that are necessary to define the electrical characteristics of CMOS circuits?
Mention the typical values of a CMOS NAND gate.
(b) Design a CMOS 4-input AND-OR-INVERT gate. Draw the logic diagram and function table
8 (a) What is the necessity of separate interfacing circuit to connect CMOS gate to TTL gate? Draw the
interface circuit and explain the operation.
(b) Draw the circuit diagram of basic CMOS gate and explain the operation 9. (a) Draw the CMOS circuit
diagram of tri-state buffer. Explain the circuit with the help of logic diagram and function table
9 (a) Draw the circuit diagram of a two-input LS-TTL NOR gate and explain its functional behavior?
(b) Mention the DC noise margin levels of ECL logic family. Compare DTL, TTL and CMOS logic
families, giving typical values of various parameters.
10 (a) Draw the internal structure of a MOS transistor based Read only memory.
(b) Describe the procedure to fuse a combinational circuit in to this type of ROMwith the help of a simple
example
11 (a) Explain about the terms

i. Fan-in ii. Fan-out iii. Noise margin iv. Propogation delay
(b) Draw the circuit for CMOS NAND and clearly explain about its functioning
12 Draw the typical Input-Output transfer charactersters of CMOS Inverter and explain about the various
terms associated with the characteristics. Explain the term Noise Margin.
13 Explain how CMOS-TTL interfacing can be achieved. Give the input and output levels of voltages and
explain?
14 Explain about ECL 100K family and positive ECL (PECL), bringing out, salient features of the same
15 Draw the circuit for CMOS OR logic gate and explain its working clearly, giving truth table and symbol
16 (a) Realize 2-input exclusive OR function using four 2-input NAND gates.
(b) What is parity? Describe how an odd parity can be generated for an n-bit input speci_cation.
(c) Design an n-bit input odd parity generator using daisy-chain structure
17 Explain about ECL 100K family and positive ECL (PECL), bringing out, salient features of the same
18 Draw the circuit for CMOS OR-AND-Invert logic gates and explain its functioning clearly with the help of
function table.
UNIT VII: COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS

1 (a) Construct a full adder circuit using two half adders and basic logic gates.
(b) Draw the circuit diagram of a 4-bit ripple carry adder using 4 full adder circuit blocks.
(c) Compare and contrast ripple carry adder and a carry-look-ahead adder for same number of input bits.
2 (a) Draw the truth table for implementing a 3-to-8 decoder similar to 74X138 MSI
(b) List out different categories of characteristics in a TTL data sheet? Discuss electrical and switching
characteristics of 74LS00
3 (a).Using the full adders design an 8-bit ripple carry adder

(b).Design a full adder using two half adders.
4 (a) Design an encoder circuit that can recognize first and second priorities of 8 requests.Show the first
priority request and the corresponding encoded data and show it for second priority request
(b)Explain how serial data communication is possible using 74X166 as transmitter and 74X164 as
receivers.
5 (a) Explain how a 44 binary multiplier can be designed using 2568 ROM.
(b) How many ROM bits are required to build a 16-bit adder/subtractor with mode control, carry input,
carry output and twos complement overflow output? Show the block schematic with all inputs and
outputs.
6 (a).Realize the following expression using 74151 IC f(Y ) = AB + BC + AC

(b) A simple floating-point encoder converts 16-bit fixed-point data using four high order bits beginning
with MSB.
7 (a) Discuss the logic circuit of 74377 register. (b) Design a modulo-50 counter using 74163 Ics
8 8. Design the logic circuit and

(a) F(X) = _A,B,C,D (1, 7, 9, 13, 15) (b) F(Y ) = _A,B,C,D (1, 4, 5, 7, 12, 14, 15) + d (3, 11)
9 Construct the function, F (w3, w2, w1,) =Pm(0; 1; 3; 4; 6; 7)

by using a 3-to-8 decoder and an OR gate. Draw the circuit diagram for the function representing 3-to-8
decoder as a block
10 Construct the function, F (w3, w2, w1,) =P m(0; 1; 3; 4; 6; 7) by using a 3-to-8 decoder and an OR gate.
Draw the circuit diagram for the function representing 3-to-8 decoder as a block.
11 Generate the truth table and draw the circuit diagram for
(a) Dual parity generator for an 8-bit input (b) 4-bit magnitude comparator
12 10(a)Draw the logic diagram of 74283 IC and explain its operation

(b) Design the logic following function. F(A) = _p,q,r,s (1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13, 14)
13 (a) Design a 32 to 1 multiplexer using four 74151 multiplexers and 74139 decoder?
(b)Design a 16-bit comparator using 7485 IC. Draw the relevant circuit diagram
14 Draw the circuits of NAND and NOR gates using CMOS logic and explain
their operation with truth tables.
UNIT VIII: SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS

1 Draw the circuit diagram, function table and logic symbol of an edge triggered J-K ip-op. Explain the
operation through its functional diagram.
2 With the help of internal structure of a small SRAM and its timing diagram,describe Read and write
operations performed in the SRAM
3 Architecture for a 3-bit synchronous counter using Flip-Flops
4 (a) Realize the logic function performed by 74381 with ROM.

carry output and twos complement overflow out-put. Show the block schematic with all inputs and
outputs.
5 (a) Explain how a 44 binary multiplier can be designed using 2568 ROM.
carry output and twos complement overflow out-put? Show the block schematic with all inputs and
outputs
6 Architecture for a 3-bit synchronous counter using Flip-Flops

7 (a) Define clock skew. Explain how clock skew leads to incorrect outputs in syn chronous circuits. Design
one logic circuit that minimizes clock skew.
(b) Design an 8-bit universal parallel-in and serial out shift register with a control input. Shift-left
operation with control input 1 and shift-right operation with control input 0 is to be performed
8 a) Design an 8x4 diode ROM using 74X138 for the following data starting from the first location. 1, 4,
9,B, A, 0, F,C
(b) Draw the internal structure of synchronous SRAM and explain its operation?
9 (a) Draw the timing diagram to specify typical timing parameters of an SRAM to perform write operation.
(b) Describe the sequence of operations taking place in a DRAM cell to refresh the cell after write
operation is performed
10 .(a) Describe the sequence of operations taking place in a DRAM cell to refresh the cell after write
operation is performed.
(b) Does the ROM realization remain the same even if two of the input columns are interchanged? Justify
your answer
11 (a) How many number of address lines are required to access all the locations of a 256K x 8 memory?
what is the data word size stored in this memory?
(b) What are synchronous SRAMs? Describe how synchronous operations are performed in SSRAM with
the help of its internal block diagram showing the inputs and outputs
12 (a) Discuss whether it is possible to build a ROM using bipolar Junction transistors?
(b) List out the merits and demerits of the above three types of ROM.
13 (a) Draw the circuit diagram and function table of a positive edge triggered commercial D ip-op which is
similar to one of the two ip-ops on an MSIIC 74x74.
(b) What is a scan ip-op? Draw the extra logic necessary to convert a normal
14 How many ROM bits are required to build a 16-bit adder/subtractor with mode control, carry input, carry
output and two?s complement overflow out-put? Show the block schematic with all inputs and outputs?
15 (a) Design a 4-bit binary synchronous counter using 7474. Write VHDL program for this logic. Using
data flow style.
(b) Design a modulo-60 counter using 74163 Ics
16 (a) Draw the Dflipflop and Tflip flop and explain the operation with truth table.
(b) Draw the J-K flip-flop and explain its operation with truth table.
ASSIGNMENT
QUESTIONS
Integrated Circuit Applications Assignment Questions
ASSIGNMENT I
1. What is the difference between digital and linear ICs?

2. What is the difference between monolithic and hybrid ICs?
3. What are the three operating temperature ranges of the IC?
4. List four basic building blocks of an op-amp.
5. What are the three factors that affect the electrical parameters of an op-amp?
6. Define the following electrical parameters: input offset voltage, input resistance, CMRR,
output voltage swing and slew rate.
7. An op-amp has a slew rate of 2V/s. What is the maximum frequency of an
output sinusoid of peak value 5V at which the distortion sets in due to the slew
rate limitation.
8. If the sinusoid of 10V peak is specified, what is the full power band width?
9. (a) What are the three factors that effect the electrical parameters of an op - amp
(b) Compare and contrast an ideal op - amp and practical op - amp.
(c) What are the features of 741 op - amp and also draw the pin diagram
ASSIGNMENT II
1. What is instrumentation amplifier? List any three applications of the instrumentation

amplifier.
2. For the non inverting a.c amplifier Rin = 50O, Ci = 0.1f, R1 = 1KO, R0 = R3 = 820O,
Rf = 5.6KO and Rl = 10KO. Determine the gain & band width of the amplifier.
3. Design a circuit to convert a 4mA to 20mA input current to 0V to 10V output
Voltage. The circuit is powered from +15V regulated supplies.
4. Design a differentiator to differentiate an input signal that varies in frequency from
10Hz to about 1KHz. If a sine wave of 1V peak at 1000Hz is applied to this
differentiator. Draw the output wave forms.
5. Distinguish between Astable, Monostable & Bistable Multivibrators.
6. Explain the operation of an op amp based monostable multivibrator. Design a
monostable multivibrator with trigger pulse shape which will drive an LED , ON for
0.5 secs each time it is pulsed.
7. What is the advantage of comparator based triangular wave generator over free running
astable multivibrator based circuit?
8. Draw the basic Logarithmic multiplier circuit and explain how it multiplies two voltages.
9. a) Derive the expression of the output voltage of an antilog amplifier using op -amp
b) Design a saw tooth wave form generator using op - amp and plot the waveforms for
the given specifications frequency: 5kHz, Vsat = 15V (Assume necessary data.
ASSIGNMENT III
1. Explain the advantages of active filter. Explain different configurations of active filter.
Discuss their merits and demerits.
2. Design a band pass filter with Butterworth response for the following specifications f0 =
10 kHz, Q = 10 and Pass band gain > 10.
3. With necessary external components to a VCO IC NE556, Explain the generation of a

triangular wave.
4. Determine the component values for a control voltage Vc = 9 volts and a frequency of
oscillation = 10KHz. Make necessary assumptions.
5. A certain narrow band pass filter has been designed to meet the following
Specifications: fc=2 KHz, Q=20, and AF=10. what modifications are necessary in the filter
design to change fc to 1KHz keeping gain and bandwidth constant ?
6. Define Bessel, Butterworth and Chebysher filters, and compare their frequency response. Sketch
the circuit diagram of band elimination filter and design a wide band- reject having fH=200Hz
and fL=1KHz. Assume necessary data
7. a) Draw the wide band reject filter circuit and also the frequency response of it.
b) Draw the schematic diagram of an all pass filter and determine the phase shift between the
input and output at f = 2kHz.
ASSIGNMENT IV
1. Describe any two applications of 555 timer in Astable multivibrator configuration and
monostable multivibrator configuration.
2. Determine the terms Lock range , Capture range and Pull in time of a PLL.
3. What are the important parameters of PLL which make it suitable for frequency multiplication
and division applications?
4. With necessary external components to a VCO IC NE556, Explain the generation of a triangular
wave.
5. Determine the component values for a control voltage Vc = 9 volts and a frequency of
oscillation = 10KHz. Make necessary assumptions.
6. Configure a 555 timer as a Schmitt trigger and explain.
7. Explain the functional block diagram of IC 555 timer with diagram.
ASSIGNMENT V
1. Explain the working of a successive approximation type Analog to Digital converter.
2. Calculate the no. of bits required to represent a full scale voltage of 10 volts with
resolution of 5mvolts approximately.
3. Define the terms resolution , conversion time and linearity of an analog to digital converter.
4. Define the important specifications of Digital to Analog converters listing their typical values.
5. Explain the operation of a multiplying DAC and mention its applications. With the help of a
neat circuit diagram and waveforms, explain the operation of a dual slope ADC. What are its
special features?
ASSIGNMENT-VI
1. Compare HC,HT, VHC , VHCT CMOS logic families with the help of output specifications
with VCC=4.5 V to 5.5V.
2. Explain how to estimate sinking current for low output and sourcing current with high output of
CMOS gate.
3. Explain the behavioral difference between simple transistor logic inverter and schottkey logic
inverter.
4. Design a CMOS transistor logic that has a functional behavior f(Z) =*[A(B+C)]
5. Design a CMOS AND-OR-INVERT gate. Draw the logic diagram and function table.
6. Explain the sinking current and sourcing current of TTL output. Which of the above two
parameters decide the fan out and How?
7. What is the necessity of separate interfacing circuit to connect CMOS to TTL gate. Draw the
interface circuit and explain he operation.
8. Explain following terms with reference to TTL gate. a) Logic level, b) DC noise margin, c) Low
state unit load
ASSIGNMENT-VII
1. Design a 16-bit ALU using 74x381 and 74x182 ICs

2. Design a 24-bit comparator circuit using 74x682 ICs and discuss the functionality of the
circuit.
ASSIGNMENT-VIII
1. Discuss in detail the synchronous system structure with neat sketch..

2. Draw a 3bit LFSR counter using 74x194 .List out the sequence assuming that the initial
state is 111.
3. Distinguish between latch and flip flop. Show the logic diagram for both. Explain the
operation with the help of function table..
4. Design a conversion circuit to convert a T-flip flop to J-K flip flop.
5. Define clock skew. Explain how clock skew leads to incorrect outputs in synchronous
circuits. Design one logic circuit that minimizes clock skew
6. Write a program to generate a clock with off time and on time equal to10nS.
7. What is the difference between ring counter and Johnson ring counter. Design self
correcting 4-bit 4state ring counter with a single circulating 0 using 74x194.
8. Draw the internal structure of synchronous SRAM and explain the operation.
9. Explain the internal structure of 64 Kx1 DRAM with the help of timing wave forms
discuss DRAM access
****THE END****
ELECTRONIC
MEASUREMENTS &
INSTRUMENTATION
COURSEFILE
Department of
Sponsored by
COURSE
OBJECTIVES
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Course Objectives
COURSE OBJECTIVES
In general, the course hopes to provide an overall understanding of the elements and processes,
including sources of errors, involved in obtaining electrical analog measurements and digitally
acquiring these measurements.
The course specific objectives are to develop an understanding of:

1. Voltage, current, resistance, capacitance, and inductance;
2. Voltage and current supplies, resistors, capacitors, inductors and diodes;
3. Techniques for analyzing simple circuits when driven by
4. Initial conditions or direct or alternating power sources;
5. Important basic circuit concepts such as transfer function, loading effects and frequency
response;
6. Operational amplifiers and circuits using operational amplifiers;
7. Filters, transducers and D/A and A/D converters;
8. The concept of a measurement channel and
9. Possible sources of error when performing electronic measurements.
10. Lectures, regular laboratory work and periodic assignments are used to pursue the course
objectives.
SYLLABUS
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Syllabus
SYLLABUS
UNIT-I: PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF MEASURING SYSTEMS & ANALOG

METERS
Block Schematics of Measuring Systems,Performance Characteristics, Static Characteristics, Accuracy,
Precision, Resolution, Types of Errors, Gaussian Error, Root Sum Squares formula, Dynamic
characteristics, Repeatability, Reproducibility, Fidelity, Lag , Measuring Instruments: DC Voltmeters
DArsonval Movement , DC Current Meters, AC Voltmeters and Current Meters, Ohmmeters,
multimeters , Meter Protection, Extension of Range, True RMS Responding Voltmeters, Specifications
of Instruments
UNIT-II: ELECTRONIC METERS AND SIGNAL GENERATORS

Electronic Voltmeters, Multimeters , AC, DC Meters, Digital Voltmeters: Ramp Type, Staircase Ramp ,
Dual slope; Integrating type, Successive Approximation Type, Auto ranging, 3 1/2, 33/4 Digit display,
Pico ammeter, High Resistance Measurements,Low Current Ammeter, Applications, Signal Generators:
AF, RF Signal Generators, Sweep frequency Generators, Pulse and Square wave Generators, Function
generators , Arbitrary waveform Generator, Video signal Generators, Specifications
UNIT-III: SIGNAL ANALYZERS

AF Wave Analyzers, HF Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion , Heterodyne wave analyzers,
Spectrum Analyzers, Power Analyzers, Capacitance-Voltage Meters, Oscillators.
UNIT-IV: DC AND AC BRIDGES

Wheat stone Bridge, Kelvin Bridge, AC Bridges, Maxwell, Hay Bridges, Schering, wien, Anderson
Bridges, Resonance Bridge, Similar Angle Bridge, Wagners ground connection, Twin T, Bridged T
Network, Detectors.
UNIT-V OSCILLOSCOPES
CRT, Block Schematic of CRO, Time Base Circuits, Lissajous Figures, CRO Probes, High Frequency
CRO Considerations, Delay lines, Applications, Specifications.
UNIT-VI: SPECIAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES

Dual Trace oscilloscope, Dual Beam CROs, Sampling oscilloscope, Storage oscilloscope, Digital
Storage CRO, Frequency Measurement, Period Measurement, Errors in time/Frequency measurements,
universal counters, Extension of range, Recorders: Strip-Chart. XY
Oscillographic recorders.
UNIT-VII: TRANSDUCERS
Classification, Strain gauges, Bonded, unbounded Strain gauges, Force and Displacement Transducers,
Resistance Thermometers, Hotwire Anemometers, LVDT, Thermocouples, Synchros, Special
Resistance Thermometers, Digital Temperature sensing system, Piezoelectric Transducers, Variable
Capacitance Transducers, Magneto strictive Transducers.
UNIT-VIII: MEASUREMENT OF PHYSICAL PARAMETERS

Flow Measurement, Displacement Meters, Liquid level measurement, Measurement of Humidity and
Moisture Measurement, Velocity, Force Measurements
Pressure High Pressure Measurement, Vacuum level Measurement, Temperature Measurements
Data Acquisition Systems.
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Syllabus
TEXTBOOKS :
1. Electronic instrumentation, second edition - H.S.Kalsi, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

2. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques A.D. Helfrick and W.D.
Cooper, PHI, 5th Edition, 2002.
REFERENCES :
1. Electronic Instrumentation & Measurements - David A. Bell, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2003.
2. Electronic Test Instruments, Analog and Digital Measurements - Robert A.Witte, Pearson
Education, 2nd Ed., 2004.
3. Electronic Measurements & Instrumentations by K. Lal Kishore, Pearson Education - 2005.
WEBSITES:
1) http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
2) http://www.rfdesign.com
JOURNALS:
1). Journal of Instrumentation
STUDENTS
SEMINAR
TOPICS
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Students Seminar Topics
1. Thermocouple type RF ammeter, Ohmmeters series type, shunt type, Millimeter for Voltage,
Current and resistance measurements.
2. fixed and variable, AF oscillators, Standard and AF sine and square wave signal generators
3. Wave Analyzers, Harmonic Distortion Analyzers, Spectrum Analyzers
4. Measurement of amplitude and frequency.
5. Dual trace oscilloscope, sampling oscilloscope, storage oscilloscope,
6. AC Bridges Measurement of inductance- Maxwells bridge, Anderson bridge
7. Transducers- active & passive transducers
8. Measurement of physical parameters force, pressure, velocity, humidity
LECTURE PLAN
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Lecture Plan
LECTURE PLAN
SN Days Topic Teaching Aids Resource

1 Block Schematics of Measuring Systems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
2 Performance Characteristics-Static Characteristics, Accuracy, Precision, BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
Resolution
3 Dynamic Characteristics, Repeatability, Reproducibility, Fidelity, Lag BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
4 Types of Errors, Gaussian Error, Root Sum Squares formula,example problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
5 Measuring Instruments: DC Voltmeters,DArsonval Movement, DC Current OHP & BLACK Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
Meters BOARD
6 example problems in DC voltmeter & current meter BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
7 AC Voltmeters and Current Meters BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
8 example problems in AC voltmeter & current meter BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
9 Ohmmeters, Multimeters,Meter Protection, Extension of Range OHP & BLACK Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
BOARD
10 exercise problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
11 True RMS Responding Voltmeter,sSpecifications of Instruments BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
12 Electronic Voltmeters,Multimeters BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
13 AC, DC Meters BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
14 Digital Voltmeters: Ramp Type, Staircase Ramp BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
15 Dual slope; Integrating type, Successive Approximation Type BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
16 Auto ranging, 3 1/2, 33/4 Digit display BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
17 Pico ammeter BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
18 High Resistance Measurements,Low Current Ammeter, Applications BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
19 Signal Generators: AF, RF Signal Generators BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
20 Sweep frequency Generators BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
21 Pulse and Square wave Generators BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
22 Function Generators-Arbitrary waveform Generator BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
23 Video signal Generators, Specifications BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
24 Unit test-1
25 Signal Analyzers, AF Wave Analyzers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
26 HF Wave Analyzers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
27 Harmonic Distortion BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
28 Heterodyne wave Analyzers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
29 Spectrum Analyzers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
30 Power Analyzers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
31 Capacitance-Voltage Meters BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
32 Oscillators. BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
33 DC and AC Bridges: Wheat stone Bridge BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
34 Wheat stone Bridge,example problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
35 AC Bridges, Maxwell, Hay Bridges BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
36 Maxwell, Hay Bridges,example problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
37 Schering, Wien, Anderson Bridges,example problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
38 Resonance Bridge,example problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
39 Similar Angle Bridge, example problems BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
40 Wagners ground connection BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
41 Twin T, Bridged T Network BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
42 Detectors. BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
43 Oscilloscopes: CRT BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
44 Block Schematic of CRO BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
45 Time Base Circuits, Lissajous Figures BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
46 CRO Probes BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
47 High Frequency CRO Considerations BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
48 Delay lines,Applications, Specifications BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
49 Special purpose oscilloscopes: Dual Trace oscilloscope BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
50 Dual Beam CROs BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
51 Sampling oscilloscope BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
52 Storage oscilloscope BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
53 Digital Storage CRO BLACK BOARD Electronic Instrumentation by H.S.Kalsi
54 Frequency Measurement, Period Measurement BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
55 Errors in Time/Frequency measurements BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
56 universal counters, Extension of range, example BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
problems
57 Recorders: Strip-Chart. XY,Oscillographic recorders BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
58 unit test-2 -- Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
59 Transducers: Classification BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
60 Strain gauges-Bonded, unbounded Strain gauges BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
61 Force and Displacement Transducers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
62 Resistance Thermometers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
63 LVDT,Thermocouples BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
64 Synchros BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
65 Special Resistance Thermometers,Digital Temperature BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
sensing system
66 Piezoelectric Transducers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
67 Variable Capacitance Transducers BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
68 Magneto strictive Transducers. BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
69 Measurement of Physical Parameters: Flow BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
Measurement
70 Displacement Meters,Liquid level Measurement BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
71 Measurement of Humidity and Moisture Measurement BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
72 Velocity, Force Measurements BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
73 Pressure High Pressure Measurement,Vacuum level BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
Measurement
74 Temperature Measurements, Data Acquisition BLACK BOARD Electrical and electronic Measurements by A.K.Sawhney
Systems
LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Learning Objectives
LEARNING OBJECTIVE
UNIT I: PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF MEASURING SYSTEMS & ANALOG

METERS
After completion of this unit the student should be able to understand
1. The basic definitions and the Static and dynamic performance characteristics of Instruments and
their relevance .
2. The sources of errors and their remedial measures.
3. The Basic DC meter movement, measurement of voltage and current and conversion into
multirange meter.
4. The physical principles and construction of AC voltmeter and ammeter and Ohmmeters.
5. The circuit configurations of different sections of millimeters
UNIT II:: ELECTRONIC METERS AND SIGNAL GENERATORS

1. The principles of electronic voltmeters and digital volt meters.

2. The principle of AF Oscillators, Sine and Square wave generator.
3. Tthe principle of Function generator with phase lock capability.
4. Standard functions, Random noise and arbitrary waveform generator.
5. The working principle of video signal generator and its specifications.
UNIT III: SIGNAL ANALYZERS
1. The Principle of Wave analyzer based on different techniques

2.Distortion analyzer as an extension of Wave analyzer .
3. Importance of communication signal ,Transmission analyzers
4.Applications and significance of Logic and Spectrum analyzers.
5. Issues involved in serial data compliance.
UNIT IV: DC AND AC BRIDGES
1. Bridge balance in AC bridges , balance equations.

2. Inductance bridge , Maxwells bridge and disadvantages , Andersons bridge.
3. Capacitance measurement using Schearing bridge, limitations.
4. Kelvins double bridge, measurement of low impedances.
5. Precautions in using bridges, LCR bridge, significance of Q-meter
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Learning Objectives
UNIT V: OSCILLOSCOPES
1. To understand the constructional details of CRT.

2. Appreciate the importance of Vertical amplifier and Horizontal deflection system
3. Need for sweep, trigger pulse ,delay lines
4. Role of sync selector circuits in maintaining a continuous display.
5. Block schematic , functional details of simple, triggered sweep, Dual beam CRO
UNIT VI: SPECIAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES
1. Different techniques of achieving Dual trace , advantages over Dual Beam.

2. The Need for High frequency oscilloscope, sampling oscilloscope.
3. Advantages and Principles of Analog and Digital Storage in Oscilloscopes .
4. The Measurement of parameters like frequency , capacitance and inductance using Lissajous
methods and others.
5. Methods of frequency and Time measurement using Frequency counters.
6. The principles of Recorders like X-Y and oscillographic recorders
UNIT VII : TRANSDUCERS
1. The application of a Transducer and different types of transducers and their

Principle of operations.
2. The passive Transducers using the Resistance and Capacitance and inductive
Properties of elements.
3. The principles and construction of Strain gage and LVDT and Piezo Electric transducers.
4. The transducers based on Thermal properties of materials.
UNIT VIII: MEASUREMENT OF PHYSICAL PARAMETERS
1. The fundamental principles behind the measurement of physical parameters like force, pressure ,
velocity etc..
2. The Hot wire anemometer
3. Tthe principles behind measurement of Humidity, Vacuum ,Moisture Acceleration and the
limitations behind them.
4. The measurement of proximity and displacement.
5. The Data acquisition system and its requirements.
OBJECTIVE
TYPE
QUESTIONS
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Objective Type Questions
UNIT I: PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF MEASURING SYSTEMS & ANALOG

METERS
1. A digital voltmeter has a readout range from 0 to 9,999 counts. Determine the resolution
a. 1 mv b.10 mV c.1 V d.100 mV
2. Which of the following is not a static characterstics?
a. Drift b.Dead zone c.Sensitivity d.Fiedlity
3. ______ is defined as the difference between the largest and smallest reading of instrument
a. Span b.Range c.Dead space d.Resolution
4. ____ refers to the degree of closeness or conformity to the true value of quantity under
measurement
a. Precision b.Accuracy c.Drift d.Resolution
5. ________ is defined as the nearness of the indicated value to the true value of the quantity being
measured
a. Accuracy b.Resolution c.Reproducibility d.Static error
6. ______ is defined as the ability of the instrument to reproduce a certain set of readings within a
given accuracy
a. Accurancy b.Precision c.Reproducibility d.Static error
7. ______ is defined as the largest change in input quantity for which there is not output of the
instrument
a. Drift b.Dead zone c.Fiedlity d.Accuracy
8. The smallest measurable input change is called _______
a. Resolution b.Threshold c.Dead Zone d.Drift
9. The smallest measurable input is called _______
a. Resolution b.Threshold c.Dead Zone d.Drift
10. A wheat stone bridge requires a change of 7 in the unknown arm of the bridge to produce a
change in deflection of 3mm of the galvanometer sensitivity is _____
a. 3/7 b.7/3 c.9/49 d.49/9
11. The voltage of a circuit is measured by a voltmeter having input impedance comparable with the
output impedence of the circuit there by causing error in voltage measurment. This error may be
called as
a. Gross error b.Random c.Error caused by misuse of instrument d.Error

caused by loading effect
12. A meter reads 127.50V and the true value of voltage is 127.43
(i) static error ___________
(ii) static correction _______
a. 0.07V, 0.07V b.0.07V, -0.07V c.-0.07V, 0.07V d.-0.07V, 0.07V
13. Find the span for given range

Upper limit:55V
Lower Limit: 0V
a. 55 b.60 c.45 d.40
14. ______ is the time for the instrument ot reach and stay within a specified tolerance band around
its final value
a. Fiedlity b.Dynamic error c.Speed of response d.Settling time
15. A Thermometer reads 95.450C and the static correction given in the correction curve is -0.080C.
Then the True value is ______
a. 95.37 b.95.53 c.95.47 d.95.63
16. What type of errors are due to shortcomings of the instruments like detective (or) worn parts?
a. Gross errors b.Systematic errors c.Random errors d.Environment errors
17. What type of errors are due to largely human errors like misreading of instruments?
a. Gross errors b.Systematic errors c.Random errors d.Environmental errors
18. Variance =
a. Standard deviation b.1/standard deviation c.1/(standard deviation)2

d.(standard deviation)2
19. A 0-300V voltmeter has an error of 2% of full scale deflection. What would be the range of
readings if true voltages is 30V ?
a. 24V-36V b.29.4V-30.6V c.20V to 40V d.30V-40V
20. ______ is defined as the degree to which the instrument indicates the changes in the measured
without dynamic error
a. Fiedlity b.Dynamic error c.Speed of response d.Settling time

ANSWERS
1.A 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.A 6.B 7.B 8.A 9.B 10.A
11.D 12.B 13.B 14.D 15.A 16.A 17.A 18.D 19.A 20.A
UNIT II:: ELECTRONIC METERS AND SIGNAL GENERATORS
1. The following characteristics are common to various type of signal generators

(i) The frequency of the signal should be well known and stable
(ii) The Output signal should be free from distortion
a. Both are True b.(i) True (ii) false c.Both are false d.(i) false (ii) true
2. The range of AF oscillators
a. 10 kHz - 30 MHz b.20 H3 to 20 kHz c.dc - 5 MHz d.1.5 MHz to 30 MHz
3. The pulse Risetime is defind as the time taken by the pulse
a. to go from 10% to 90% of its amplitude
b. to go from 0% to 100% of its amplitude
c. to go from 0% to 90% of its amplitude
d. to go from 10% to 100% of its amplitude
4. A wien's bridge oscillator circuit is shown in fig.

R=6k , C=3 nF, Rs=6k R4=12 k The frequency of oscillator
a. 8.8 kHz b.4.42kHz c.8.84 MHz d.No oscillations occur as Barkhousen

Criteria is not satisfied
5. A video frequency oscillator has a frequency range of
a. 20 Hz to 20 kHz b.20 kHz to 30 mHz c.dc to 5mHz d.2 mHz to 30 mHz
6. In phase shift oscillator, it consists of equal valued capacitors and resistors connected in cascade.
Each stage provides a phase shift of
a. 300 b.450 c.600 d.900
7. In signal generator
a. energy is created b.energy is generated c.energy is converted from a simple

dc source into a.c energy at some specific frequencies d.energy is consumed
8. Which combination of the statemnts is applicable

(i) The most common outputs from the function generates is sine, square, Triangular waves
The frequency of these wave forms may be adjusted from a fraction of a hertz to several
hundred kilo Hertz
a. (i), (ii) are correct b.(i), (ii) are wrong c.(i) correct, (ii)wrong d.(i) wrong,
(ii) correct
9. A wein bridge oscillator operates in ___________ range
a. AF b.RF c.Video frequency d.High frequency
10. Which of them is not a AF oscillators?

a. Beat frequency oscillator b.Wein bridge oscillator
c. Phase shift oscillator d.Tunnel diode oscillator
11. The simple sine wave generator consists of

a. Only an oscillator b.Only an attenuator
c.Oscillator, attenuator d.Frequency divider, attenuator
12. The amplitude accuracy of sine wave generaor depends on
a. Only design of the attenuater
b. Only design of the oscillator
c. Only design of the frequency divider
d. Both the attenuator, oscillator
13. Output impedence of a laboratory quality pulse generator (Typical specification)
a. 50 b.100 c.1K d.5K
14. Pulse width of a laboratory quality pulse generator (Typical specification)
a. 25n sec to 3 sec b.4 sec to 10 sec c.1 sec to 3 sec d.7 sec to 10 sec
15. Determine frequency for pulse generator R=75 k, C=0.01 F, F=
a. 924 Hz b.724 Hz c.824 Hz d.1024 Hz
16. Determine pulse width for pulse generator R=75 k, C=0.01 F, T=0.693 RC=?
a. 0.173 ms b.0.173 ns c.0.173 s d.1.73 s
17. Compute duty cycle for given information pulse width=0.173, pulse period = 1.08; Duty cycle=?
a. 16% b.26% c.36% d.06%

18. In the oscillatory circuit, the elements can be used to set the frequency of oscillator
a. inductor, resistor b.inductor, capacitor c.capacitor, resistor d.inductor, resistor
19. _______ is defined as the ratio of average value of the pulse over one cycle and the peak value
are inversely related to their time duration
a. Duty cycle b.Complete cycle c.Synchro cycle d.Wave cycle
20. Expansion for B.F.O
a. Beat frequency oscillator b.Best frequency oscillator
c.Beat frequency oscilloscope d.Best frequency osciloscope
ANSWERS
1.A 2.B 3.D 4.D 5.D 6.C 7.C 8.A 9.B 10.A
11.C 12.C 13.A 14.A 15.A 16.A 17.A 18.B 19.A 20.A
UNIT III: SIGNAL ANALYZERS
1. The total harmonic distortion (or) factor ________
a. S b.1/s c.(d22+d3+-----+dn2)1/2 d.none
2. (i) The basic wave analyzer consists of a primary detector, which is a simple Lc circuit
(ii) This LC circuit is adjusted for resonance at the frequency of the particular harmonic
component to the measured
a. (i), (ii) are wrong b.(i) is wrong, (ii) is right c.(i), (ii) are right d.(i) is Right,
(ii) is wrong
3. The wave analyzers are tuned in range of
a. 20Hz - 20KHz b.20KHz - 200KHz c.200 KHz - 2MHz d.2MHz - 200MHz
4. ________ noise has a voltage spectrum which is inversely proportional to the square root of
frequency
a. Pink noise b.Black noise c.Usasi noise d.White noise
5. Basic wave analyzer uses a full wave rectifier, to obtain _______ of the input signal
a. Average value b.Rms value c.Square d.Double
6. The wave to be analysed is first passes through
a. Attenuator b.Selective amplifier c.Regulator d.single generator

7. The level range of hormonic analyzer using crystal filter from
a. -90 dB to 32dB b.20dB to 40dB c.40dB to 90dB d.90dB o 180dB
8. Fundamental Hormonic Dn = _____

Vpn=Amplitude of nth hormonic
Vp1= Fundamental wave Amplitude
a. (Vpn/Vp1) *100 b. (Vp1/Vp1) *100 c.(Vp1/Vpn) *100 d.none
9. RF Hetrodyne wave analyzer operates in the range of
a. 1 Hz to 990Hz b.10KHz to 18MHz c.10KHz to 100 KHz d.10Hz to 10KHz
10. Ordinary wave analyzers are useful for measurement in the _______ range only
a. Audio frequency b.Low frequency c.Radio frequency d.Very high

frequency
11. Hormanic distrotion is due to
a. Liner behaviour of circuit element
b. Non-linear behaviour of circuit element
c. Change in behaviour of circuit element due to change in temperature
d. change in behaviour of circuit element due to change in environment
12. Periodic wave = ___________
a. DC Term+first hormonic - second Hormonic + Third hormonic + ----------------
b. DC Term + first hormonic - second Hormonic - Third hormonic - ---------
c. DC Term - first ghormonic + second Hormonic + Third hormonic + -------
d. DC Term + first hormonic + second hormonic + Third Hormonic + --------
13. _____________ Types of distortions occurs in push-pull amplifiers on account of incorrect boas
levels
a. Frequency distortion b.Phase distortion c.Cross-over distortion d.Amplitude

distortion
14. _____________ Types of distortions occurs because the amplification factor of the amplifier is
different for different frequencies
a. Frequency distortion b.Phase distortion c.Cross-over distortion d.Amplitude

distortion
15. The RF Specturn analysis covers a frequency range of
a. 10 MHz to 40GHz b.10 kHz to 100kHz c.1 kHz to 10kHz d.100 kHz to 1MHz
16. Rms value of amplitude of fundamental wave is 100v and RMS value of amplitudes of all
higher harmonics is 0.3v. Find the
a. 0.3 b.0.1 c.3.33 d.10
17. The signal amplitude is displayed verses frequency. These measurement are said to be in the
______
a. Amplitude Domain b.Frequency domain c.Phase domain d.Power domain
18. Specturn analyzer operates on the same principle of
a. wave analyzer b.amplitude analyzer c.Frequency analyzer d.Phase analyzer
ANSWERS
1. 2.c 3.B 4.A 5.A 6.A 7.A 8.A 9.B 10.A

11.B 12.D 13.C 14.A 15.A 16.A 17.A 18.A 19. 20.
UNIT IV: DC AND AC BRIDGES
1. A bridge circuit works at a frequency of 2 KHz. The following can be used as detectors for
detection of null conditions in the bridge
a. headphones and vibration galvanometer
b. headphones and tunable amplifiers
c. vibration galvanometers and tunable amplifier
d. tunable amplifiers and vibration galvanometers
2. Wagner's earth devices are used in ac bridge circuits for
a. eliminating the effect of earth capacitances
b. eliminating the effect of inter-component capacitances
c. shielding the bridge elements
d. eliminating the effect of stray electrostatic fields
3. For the bridge, Z1=200<300 Z2 = 150<00 and Z3=250<-400. In order that the bridge be balanced
Z4 should be
a. 120<600 b.187.5<-700 c.333.3<100 d.100<-400
4. How an AC bridge is used in amplifiers and oscillators ?
a. generate an additional amount of power
b. provide a impedance matching
c. provide a feed back
d. path provide filtering
5. The equation under balance conditions for a bridge are: R1=R2R3/R4 and L1=R2R3/C4 where R1
and L1 are respectively unknown resistance and inductance. In order to achieve converging
balance
a. R1 and C4 should be chosen as variable
b. R2 and C4 should be chosen as variable
c. R1 and R2 should be chosen as variable

d. R4 and C4 should be chosen as variable
6. For the measurement of inductance and capacitance using AC bridge, the oscillator have
a. variable frequency and high power of about kw
b. variable frequency and very high power of about kw
c. fixed frequency and low power of mw
d. fixed frequency and output of about 1 w
7. In order to satisfy both conditions for balance and for convenience of manipulation, the bridge
must contain
a. a head phone and an oscillator
b. vibration galvanometer and head phones
c. two variable elements in its configuration
d. four fixed elements in its configuration
8. In order that the bridge to be balanced
a. Z1Z4 =Z2Z3 and <1+<4 = <2+<3
b. Z1/Z4 =Z2 /Z3 and <1+<4 =<2+<3
c. Z1Z4 =Z2Z3 and <1 <4 = <2<3
d. Z1Z4 =Z2Z3 and <1 -< 4 = <2 -<3
9. For the bridge abcd, arm ab consists of resistance in series with an inductance, arm bc and ad
consist of pure resistance. In order to achieve balance are cd should consist of
a. pure resistance
b. inductance in series with capacitance
c. a variable resistance in series or parallel with a variable capacitance
d. a pure resistance in parallel with a inductance
10. An AC bridge in its basic form, consists of
a. four arms and shielding the bridge element
b. four arms, a source of excitation and balance detector
c. Wagner's earth device and four arms
d. four arms and source of excitation
11. Wagner Earthing devices are used to remove all the
a. earth capacitances from the bridge networks b.dc resistance
c. ac resistance d.frequency
12. In a voltage sensitive Wheatstone, having a resistance, R, the resistance of one of the arms is
changed to R+R where R < < R. The Wheatstone bridge is supplied with an input voltage of
ei. The output voltage on account of unbalance is
a. b. c. d.
13. The advantage of Hay's bridge over Maxwells inductance-capacitance bridge is
a. it can be used for measurement of inductance of low Q coils
b. it can be used for measurement of inductance of high Q coils
c. it can be used for measurement of inductance of low and medium Q coils
d. its equations for balance do not contain any frequency term
14. The expression for unknown inductance of high Q coils using Hay's bridge is
a. b. c.L1=R2R3/C4 d.L1=R2R3C4
15. In the Wein's bridge, to balance the harmonics
a. a vibration galvanometer is used
b. high voltage supply is used
c. a square wave is used as input
d. a filter is connected in series with the null detector

16. Frequency can be measured by using
a. Maxwell's bridge b.Hay's bridge c.Schering bridge d.Wien's bridge
17. The following bridge is used in harmonic distortion analyzer
a. Wein's bridge b.Campbell's bridge c.Maxwell's bridge d.Hay's bridge
18. Why the sinusoidal voltage is required to balance the Weins Bridge?
a. it required a high voltage as supply
b. because of its frequency sensitivity
c. harmonics will sometimes produce masking
d. a filter is used to balance the bridge
19. The expression for frequency using Weins bridge is
a. b. c. d.
20. LCR meter is used to measure
a. R only b.C only c.L only d.R, L and C
ANSWERS
1.B 2.A 3.B 4.C 5.D 6.D 7.C 8.A 9.C 10.B
11.A 12.D 13.B 14.D 15.D 16.D 17.A 18.C 19.C 20.D
UNIT V: OSCILLOSCOPES
1. For spectral display uses
a. CRO b.T.V c.LCD d.Digital display
2. The Heart of the oscilloscope
a. Power supply Block b.Vertical amplifier c.Cathode ray Tube d.Horizontal

amplifier
3. It is not a part of CRT
a. Vertical amplifier b.Deflection plates c.Electron gun d.Fluorescent screen
4. If the distance of screen from a CRT to centre of deflection plates is 15cm. The length of
deflection plates is 2cm, The distance between plates is 1cm and the accelerating voltage is
500V, The deflection sensitivity
a. 33.2 V/cm b.0.03 cm/V c.66.4 V/cm d.0.015 cm/v
5. The deflection of an electron beam on a CRT screen is 10mm. Supose the pre-accelerating
anode voltage is halved and the potential between deflecting plates is doubled. The deflection of
the electron beam will be
a. 80mm b.40mm c.20 mm d.10 mm
6. It is not a source of synchronization
a. Internal b.External c.Triggered d.Line
7. The pre-accelerating anode and accelerating anode are connected to a common positive high
voltage of about ______
a. 1350 V b.1200 V c.1500V d.2000V
8. The focusing anode is connected to a lower adjustable voltage of _____
a. 250v b.100v c.500v d.50v
9. Synchronization can be accomplished by
a. Triggerd sweep b.Attenuator c.Clipper d.Clammper
10. The source of emission of electrons in a CRT is _____
a. Post-accelerating anode b.P-n junction diode c.Accelarting anode d.a barium

and strontium oxide coated cathode
11. CROS operates on _____
a. Voltage b.current c.strain d.pressure
12. A certain oscilloscope with 4cm by 4cm screen has its own speed output fed to its input at the x
and y sensitivities are same. The oscilloscope will display a
a. Triangular wave b.Diagonal wave c.Sine wave d.Circle
13. The horizontal amplifier should be designed for :
a. high frequency signals with a fast rise time
b. high amplitude signals with a slow rise time
c. high amplitude signals with a fast rise time
d. low amplitude signals with a fast time
14. A vertical amplifier for a CRO can be designed for

a. only a high gain b.only a broad band width
c.constant gain time band width product d.only a low gain
15. Which meter is suitable for the measurement of 10mV at 50mHz ______
a. moving-iron voltmeter b.CRO c.VTVM d.Electrostatic Voltmeter
16. The vertical amplifiers is the principle factor in determining the _____ and _______ of an
oscilloscope
a. Voltage, current b.Voltage, Bandwidth
c.Power factor, current d.Bandwidth sensitivity
17. Sensitivity expressed in terms of
a. V/cm b.Cm/V c.V/Cm2 d.V-Cm
18. The relation between sensitivioty of oscilloscope and gain of th vertical amplifier
a. Sensitivity (gain)2 b.Sensitivity c.Sensitivity gain d.Sensitivity
19. To minimize the loading of the circuit under test, the input impedance of a CRO
a. be Low b.be high c.capacitive d.Match with the output impedance of the
circuit
20. If the bandwidth of an oscilloscope is given direct current to 10MHz, what is the fastest rise
time a sine wave con have to be accurately reproduced by an instrument
a. tr=20ns b.tr=30 ns c.tr=35ns d.tr=25ns
ANSWERS
1.A 2.C 3.A 4.B 5.B 6.C 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.D
11.A 12.B 13.B 14.C 15.B 16.D 17.A 18.C 19.A 20.B
UNIT VI: SPECIAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES
1. The sampling oscilloscope is able to respond and store

a. rapid bits of information and present them in a continuous display
b. slowly varying bits of information and present them in continuous display
c. rapid bits of information and present them in a discrete display
d. samples and display in digital form
2. The sample frequency used in sampling oscilloscopes is
a. lower than one hundredth of the signal frequency
b. twice that of signal frequency
c. equal to signal frequency
d. not related to signal frequency
3. In dual trace oscilloscope, the display will show a continuous line for each channel when the
chopping rate is
a. much slower than fly back period
b. much slower than the hold-off period
c. much faster than the vertical sweep rate
d. much faster than the horizontal sweep rate
4. The disadvantage of a sampling oscilloscope is that
a. it can measure only high speed events
b. it can only make measurement on repetitive waveform signals

c. it requires sweep speeds of the order of 10ps per division
d. it require a bandwidths of 15 GHz
5. The sampling oscilloscopes are overcome the limitations of conventional high frequency
oscilloscopes by
a. using higher band width amplifiers
b. converting high frequency signal into low frequency signal using sampling techniques
c. using highly effective displays
d. using highly sensitive displays
6. The dual trace oscilloscope cannot capture
a. two fast transient events
b. high frequency signals
c. low frequency signals
d. dc voltages
7. The alternate mode of dual trace oscilloscope cannot used for
a. letting each channel for one cycle of the horizontal sweep
b. displaying very low frequency signals
c. switching alternates between channels A and B
d. displaying high frequency signals
8. The common operating modes of dual trace oscilloscope are
a. internal and external mode b.X and Y mode
c. alternate and chopped mode d.ac and dc mode
9. At a high frequency of the order of 100kHz to 500kHz , the dual trace oscilloscope operate in
[01S04]
a. X and Y mode b.alternate mode c.dc mode d.chopped mode
10. A sampling oscilloscope is used to examine
a. dc signals b.high hold off signals c.very fast signals d.very slow signals
11. In variable persistence storage oscilloscope, the image traced on its CRT will be retain by using
a. storage shift register b.constant signal output
c. storage mesh in addition to phosphor screen d.resonance circuit
12. The digital storage oscilloscope is more accurate than analog storage oscilloscope because
a. the time base is generated by a crystal clock
b. collects data after it has been triggered
c. it operate in a baby sitting mode
d. constant refresh time
13. The attenuation factor of the voltage divider used in CRO is
a. 1:10 b.1:100 c.reciprocal of the voltage divider ratio d.twice that of
voltage divider ratio
14. The attenuator of CRO is loaded when the
a. vertical amplifier resistance is much larger than the attenuator resistance
b. horizontal amplifier resistance is much lower than the attenuator resistance
c. horizontal amplifier resistance is much larger than the attenuator resistance
d. vertical amplifier resistance is much lower than the attenuator resistance
15. If the bandwidth of an oscilloscope is given as direct current to 10MHz, what is the fastest rise
time a sine wave can have to be accurately reproduced by the instrument?
a. 10ns b.5ns c.35ns d.100ns
16. The following oscilloscope is used for the capture and storage of transients and the steady
display of a very low frequency signals
a. dual trace oscilloscopes b.dual beam oscilloscopes
c.storage oscilloscopes d.sampling oscilloscopes
17. The bistable storage oscilloscopes depend for their operation, on the principle of
a. bridge balance b.photo conductive c.resonance d.secondary emission
18. The advantage of storage oscilloscope over digital oscilloscope is
a. lower writing speed b.higher bandwidth c.more accuracy d.larger retain time
19. The high amplitude signals are measured using CRO by placing an attenuator between the
a. vertical input terminal and the input terminal of the horizontal amplifier
b. vertical input terminal and the input terminal of the vertical amplifier
c. horizontal input terminal and the input terminal of the vertical amplifier
d. horizontal input terminal and the input terminal of the horizontal amplifier
20. The Fast storage oscilloscopes enhance the speed with which they can capture transient
information by using
a. amplifier at two plates b.two storage meshes
c.variable persistence tubes d.bistable storage tube
ANSWERS
1.A 2.A 3.D 4.B 5.B 6.A 7.B 8.C 9.D 10.C
11.C 12.C 13.C 14.A 15.C 16.C 17.D 18.B 19.B 20.B
UNIT VII : TRANSDUCERS
1. In a transducer, the experimentally obtained transfer function is different from the theoretical
transfer function, the errors result from this difference are called
a. zero error b.Hysteresis error c.sensitivity error d.non-conformity errors
2. The lower limit of useful working range of a transducer is determined by
a. minimum useful input level b.constant current source
c.transducer error and noise d.constant current source
3. In transducer, the observed output deviates from the correct value by a constant factor the
resulting error is called
a. zero error b.Hysteresis error c.sensitivity error d.non-conformity errors
4. Passive transducers derive the power required for transduction from
a. a constant power supply b.an auxiliary power source
c.physical quantity being measured d.internal power supply
5. Active transducers derive the power required for transduction from

a. a constant power supply b.an auxiliary power source
c.physical quantity being measured d.internal power supply
6. Transducer converts
a. analog signal into digital signal
b. digital signal into analog signal
c. one form of energy into other form of energy
d. mechanical displacement into mechanical energy
7. An inverse transducer converts
a. analog signal into digital signal
b. digital signal into analog signal
c. an electrical energy to any other form of energy
d. an optical signal to any other form of energy

8. one of the following can act as an inverse transducer
a. strip chart recorder b.strain gauge c.LVDT d.piezo electric crystals
9. One of the following is an active transducer
a. strain gauge b.photovoltaic cell c.photo emissive cell d.selsyn
10. In a resistance potentiometer high value of resistance leads to
a. high value of sensitivity b.low value of error
c.low value of non-linearity d.high value of selectivity
11. What is the order of minimum displacement that can be measured with capacitive transducers?
a. 1cm b.1 mm c.1m d.1 m
12. Capacitive transducers using the principle of change of capacitance with change of dielectric are
normally used for measurement of
a. displacement b.pressure c.force d.liquid levels
13. Two inductive transducers working on the principle of change of self inductance L, are
connected in a push pull arrangement. If the change of inductance of transducers is L the
change of inductance exhibited at the output terminals is
a. 1/L b.L c.1/2L d.2L
14. The dynamic characteristics of capacitive transducers are similar to those of
a. low pass filters b.high pass filters c.notch filters d.band stop filters
15. A capacitive transducer working on the principle of change of capacitance with change of
displacement exhibits non linear characteristics. The response of these transducers can be made
linear by using
a. non -magnetic material
b. a solid ferror-electric material
c. nickel-iron hydrogen annealed material
d. differential arrangement or use of an opAMP
16. The sensitivity of the capacitive transducer can be increased by making
a. the distance between the plates extremely small
b. the distance between the plates extremely large
c. the electric field in the air gap exceeds the break down voltage
d. dielectric constant low
17. Air cored inductive transducers are suitable for
a. low frequencies b.high frequencies
c.same frequencies as iron cored transducers d.both low and high frequencies
18. The size of air cored inductive transducers as compared with the iron cored transducers
a. smaller b.higher c.same d.exactly halved
19. Capacitive transducers are normally used for
a. dynamic measurements b.static measurements
c.transient measurements d.gauge measurements
20. Capacitive transducers can be used for measurement of liquid level. The principle of operation
used in this case is
a. change of capacitance b.change of area of plates
c.change of dielectric strength d.change of distance between plates
ANSWERS
1.D 2.C 3.C 4.B 5.C 6.C 7.C 8.D 9.B 10.A
11.B 12.D 13.C 14.B 15.D 16.A 17.B 18.B 19.A 20.C
UNIT VIII: MEASUREMENT OF PHYSICAL PARAMETERS
1. Which of the following is not used for static and dynamic pressure measurements?
a. capacitive transducers b.photoelectric transducers
c. oscillation transducers d.piezoelectric transducers
2. The electrical strain gauges attached to a diaphragm is used for

a. Pressure b.velocity c.humidity d.resistivity
3. In the measurement of pressure, the piezoelectric transducers used as secondary transducers
would have a disadvantage of
a. no external power needed
b. good high frequency response
c. does not affected by changes in temperature
d. cannot measure static pressure
4. How the pressure measuring devices are used to measure the force?
a. pressure is twice that of force
b. pressure is halved that of force
c. pressure is force per unit area
d. pressure and force are equal
5. Pressure is represented as a stress because
a. both are defined as resistance per length
b. force per unit area
c. temperature per unit area
d. power per given input
6. The nanometers, ring and belt type gauges are used to measure the pressure based on--principle
a. balancing the unknown force by means of applied strain per unit area
b. balancing an unknown force with a known force
c. balancing of unknown force due to stress in an elastic member
d. producing strain in the load ring
7. The Force summing devices in the measurement of pressure are used to convert
a. pressure into mechanical energy
b. mechanical to electrical energy
c. pressure into displacement
d. pressure into electrical energy
8. The function of secondary transducers in the measurement of pressure is
a. converts pressure into mechanical energy
b. converts displacement into electrical parameter
c. converts pressure into displacement
d. increases the strength of electrical energy
9. The function of primary transducers in the measurement of pressure is
a. converts pressure into mechanical energy
b. converts displacement into electrical parameter
c. converts pressure into displacement
d. increases the strength of electrical energy
10. The following device is used to measure a angular velocity with a ripple free output
a. Moving Coil type Velocity transducer
b. Seismic type velocity transducer
c. DC tachometer generator
d. Drag Cup Rotor AC tachometer generator

11. The following characteristics of lithium chloride is changed when it is exposed to variations in
humidity
a. Pressure b.force c.frequency d.capacitance
12. The disadvantage with measurement of linear velocity compared to a measure of angular
velocity is
a. a fixed reference must be used
b. output voltage is proportional to amplitude of the vibration
c. forms a closed magnetic circuit with a constant air gap
d. frequency of the output is equal to the frequency of vibration
13. To cover the entire range of humidity, which of the following device is used?
a. Resistive Hygrometer
b. Aluminium oxide Hygrometer
c. capacitive Hygrometer
d. microwave refractometer
14. The disadvantage of Velocity measurement using Tachometer generators is
a. measures angular speed
b. brushes produce an appreciable error
c. direction of rotation is directly indicate the polarity of the output voltage
d. output voltage is typically 10mV.rpm
15. The most commonly used transducer for the measurement of liner velocity is
a. pivot torque b.strain gauge c.electro-magnetic transducer d.pirani gauge
16. In the moving coil type velocity transducer, the velocity of coil is
a. inversely proportional to the voltage generated in the coil
b. proportional to the voltage generated in the coil
c. proportional to the applied voltage to the coil
d. inversely proportional to the current applied to the coil
17. The following device is used to measure the relative humidity
a. LVDT b.scintillation counters c.barometer d.hygrometer
18. The following characteristics of lithium chloride is changed when it is exposed to variations in
humidity
a. Pressure b.force c.resistance d.capacitance
19. Microwave Refractometer is used to measure the
a. Humidity b.velocity c.liquid leve d.acceleration
20. The major drawback of a seismic accelerometer using resistance potential divider are
a. high resolution and natural frequency
b. high resolution and low natural frequency
c. limited resolution and low natural frequency
d. limited resolution and high natural frequency
ANSWERS
1.C 2.A 3.D 4.C 5.B 6.D 7.C 8.B 9.C 10.D
11.A 12.A 13.A 14.B 15.C 16.B 17.D 18.C 19.A 20.C
ESSAY TYPE
QUESTIONS
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Essay Type Questions
UNIT 1: PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF MEASURING SYSTEMS & ANALOG

METERS
1. a) Explain about Ammeter Loading effect

b) Determine the Multiplier resistance on the 50V range of a DC voltmeter, which
uses 300mA meter movement having internal resistance of 1.2
2. a) Draw the Ayrton Shunt Circuit and explain how current measurement is done?
b) It is desired to extend the range of a 10mA Ammeter with Rm =100 to measure
15A. Draw the circuit and determine the value of R
3. a) Explain about different types of errors that occur in measurements. How they
can be minimized?
b) A Voltmeter having a sensitivity of 15k/V reads 80V on a 100V scale, when
connected across an unknown resistor. The current through the resistor is 2mA.
Calculate the % of error due to loading effect.
4. a) Explain the Principle and working of differential Voltmeter
b) Draw the Sketch and explain the principle and operation of True RMS measuring
Thermocouple type Voltmeter
5. a) Explain the constructional details and differentiate between Ohmmeter series
type and shunt type.
b) Explain the front panel of a multimeter. Suppose if we are measuring a voltage
230V AC. What should be the voltage range we select?
6. a) Explain the functionality of multimeter. Explain how a continuity test is done by using
multimeter.
b) Explain how a Passive and Active components can be measuerd using a multimeter.
7. a) Draw the circuit for a FET input electronic Voltmeter and explain its working
b) Give the Schematic for true RMS responding Voltmeter and explain its operation.
8. a) Explain the terms :

i. Significant figures
ii. Conformity.
b) How are random errors analyzed? Explain them with examples. Explain about true
RMS voltmeter
9. a) Define voltmeter sensitivity. What is the loading effect of a DC voltmeter?
Explain with an example
b) In the circuit shown in figure 1b, two resistors R1 and R2 are connected to
a 100V dc source. If the voltage across R2 is to be measured by voltmeters
having.
i. a sensitivity of 1000 /V and

ii. a sensitivity of 20,000/V, then find which voltmeter will read the accurate value of
voltage across R2. Both the meters are used on the 50V range
10. a) Explain about systematic errors clearly with the help of examples
b) A resistance is measured by the voltmeter and ammeter method, the voltmeter
reading is 125.4V on the 250V scale and the ammeter reading is 288.5mA on
500mA scale. Both meters guaranteed to accurate within 1 percent of
fullscale reading. Calculate
i. the indicated value of the resistor
ii. the limits within which you can guarantee the result.
11. a) What is Ayrton Shunt? Describe it with a neat sketch. Specify its applications
b) Design a universal Ayrton shunt to provide an ammeter with a current range of
2A, 5A, 10A using a d'Arsonval movement with an internal resistance
Rm=50 and full scale deection current of 1mA.
12. a) Draw the block diagram of the measuring system and explain the function of
each stage of this system
b) Explain the types of test signals used in determining dynamic characteristics
of measurements applied to a system
13. Explain about the following terms pertaining to Instrumentation system, giving
examples.
i. Accuracy
ii. Precision
iii. Sensitivity
iv. Resolution
v. Repeatability
vi. Reproducibility.
UNIT 2:: ELECTRONIC METERS AND SIGNAL GENERATORS
1. a) List out some important features like, operating and performance characteristics of
digital voltmeters
b) What are the different sections of a frequency synthesized Signal Generator? Explain
the function of each in waveform generation
2. a) Explain the Principle and working of a Function Generator
b) Give the Specifications and Typical Values of a Function Generator Instrument
3. a) Explain the principle and working of Arbitrary waveform Generator Instrument
b) Draw the Circuit for Hartley oscillator and explain the principle of operation
4. a) What are the different Types of signal Generators ? Explain each of them briefly
b) What are the considerations to be made in choosing an oscillator Instrument or Signal
Generator Instrument
5. a) Draw the block diagram of a Pulse Generator Instrument and explain the operation of
the Instrument
b) Determine the frequency of Colpitts oscillator with L =100mH C1 =0.005F, C2
= 0.01F
6. a) Explain the Principle and working of FM Signal Generator
b) Give the specifications and Typical values of FM signal Generator
7. a) How Function Generator Instrument is different from signal Generator? Draw the block
schematic and explain the principle of function Generator Instrument
b) Determine the oscillator frequency of a Hartley oscillator withL1 =100mH , L2 =1mH ,
M=50mH and c =100pf
8. With respect to construction and circuit configuration, explain how a square wave
generator differs from sine wave generator
9. a) With a neat diagram describe the principle of operation of Random pattern generator
b) Explain with a block diagram the working of a AF signal generator
10. a) What are the precautionary measures to be taken in a signal generator application?
b) Discuss in detail about RF signal generators operation
11. a) What is the need for inserting isolation between the signal generator output and
oscillator in a simple signal generator? What are the different ways in which this can be
achieved?
b) With the help of a block diagram, explain the working of laboratory type pulse
generator
12. a) What are the different types of digital voltmeters? Briefly explain each one of them
b) The lowest range on a 41/2 digit DVM is 10 mV full scale. What is the sensitivity of
this meter?
13. a) With a neat diagram describe the principle of operation of Video pattern generator
b) With a block diagram explain the working of an AF oscillator
14. a) Draw the block diagram of a function generator and explain its operation
b) With a neat diagram discuss the operation of a pulse generator
15. a) What is meant by arbitrary waveform? Discuss with a neat block diagram the working
of a arbitrary waveform generator
b) Distinguish between a random pattern and video pattern generators. Discuss about
important features of both
16. a) A 31/2 digit of DVM has an accuracy of 0.5 percent of reading 1 digit.
i. What is the possible error in volt, when the instrument is reading 5.00 V on the 10 V
range?
ii. What is the possible error in volt, when reading 0.1 V on the 10 V range?
b) With neat diagrams, discuss about fixed and variable AF oscillators
17. a) Describe the following terms related to signal generators:

i. Random Noise
ii. Arbitrary waveform
iii. sweep generator
b) What are the precautionary measures to be taken in a signal generator application?
18. a) Discuss in detail about RF signal generators operation
b) Explain the Principle and working of Ramp Type DVM
19. Give the specifications and Typical Values of a DVM
UNIT 3: SIGNAL ANALYZERS
1. Draw the Circuit and explain the principle and working of Tuned circuit Harmonic
Analyzer
2. a) Draw the block Schematic of a Wave Analyzer and explain its working . what are the
applications of Wave Analyzes ?
b) Estimate the value of a minimum detectable signal (MDS) of a Spectrum analyzer with
a NF of 25dB using 1KHz 3dB filter
3. a) What is wave analyzer? What is the role of active filter heterodyne wave analyzer
b) What are the limitations of frequency spectrum analyzer?
4. Draw the block Schematic of a Basic Spectrum Analyzer and explain its working?
What are applications of this Instrument
5. a) Draw the Block Schematic of AF Wave analyzer and explain its principle and Working
b) What is the maximum sweep rate in kilohertz per second that could be used
with a spectrum analyzer without introducing distortion with a 4-kHz Gaussian filter?
6. a) How the SSB modulated wave displayed on a spectrum Analyzer?
b) What are the limitations of the tuned circuit harmonic distortion Analyzer?
7. a) Explain the front panel of Spectrum Analyzer

b) Explain the importance of Spectrum Analyzer in communication systems
8. a) With a neat diagram explain the working of a capacitance - voltage analyzer

b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of a spectrum analyzer?
9. a) Draw and discuss the spectral displays of various modulations using Spectrum analyzer
b) Explain one application of distortion factor meter
10. a) Distinguish between spectrum analyzer and harmonic distortion analyzer

b) Explain the operation of a wave analyzer with a neat diagram
11. a) Explain how distortion occurs during transmission of a waveform or communication

signal
b) Explain about various types of distortions occurring in signals. How can they be
analyzed
12. a) Draw and discuss the spectral displays of various modulations using Spectrum analyzer.
b) Explain one application of distortion factor meter
13. a) What is the difference between a wave analyzer and harmonic distortion analyzer?
b) Explain with the help of block diagram the working of a harmonic distortion analyzer?

b) Explain the operation of a wave analyzer with a neat diagram
15. a) Explain any two types of Spectrum Analyzers

b) Explain the following terms associated with Spectrum Analyzer.
i. Sensitivity
ii. Dynamic Range
iii. Harmonic Mixing
16. a) Explain with the help of a block diagram the working of harmonic distortion analyzer
b) Explain briey the characteristics and terminology of a wave analyzer. Also draw its
block diagram
17. a) Explain with the help of block diagram the working of a spectrum analyzer
b) Explain the different applications of spectrum analyzer
18. a) Explain with a neat block diagram, the working principle of a distortion analyzer
b) Explain about the following terms:
i. Distortion in a waveform
ii. Distortion in a communication signal
b) Describe a signature analyzer and explain usage in locating faults in digital circuits
UNIT 4: DC AND AC BRIDGES
1. a) Draw the circuit for Schering Bridge and derive the expression for unknown
Capacitance Cx.
b) In the case of a Schering Bridge, arm Ac has R=4.7k. Arm CD has unknown
elements . Arm BD has C=0.1F Arm AB=4.7K is shunt with 1MF. Determine
Values of components is the arm CD.
2. a) Draw the Wien Bridge and derive the expression for the frequency of excitation Signal
at balance. What are the salient features of this bridge curcuit?
b) Which type of Bridge Circuit is used to determine L having Q factor in the range of 1to
10? Draw the circuit and derive the expression for the unknown inductance.
3. a) Balancing of which type of Bridge circuits AC or DC is difficult ? Why?
b) Draw the circuit for Schering bridge and derive the expression for unknown elements
4. a) Which type of Bridge Circuit is used to determine the Dissipated factor of a Capacitor?
Draw the Circuit and derive the expression for the unknown elements.
b) Draw the Andersons Bridge Circuit and derive the expression for the unknown Elements
5. a) Draw the Maxwells bridge Circuit and derive the expression for the unknown Elements
at balance.
b) Draw the Wien Bridge Circuit and derive expression for the frequency at which
The bridge elements are balanced
6. Compare Ac Bridge circuit with DC Bridge circuits
7. a) Draw the circuit for the Hay's Bridge and derive the expression for unknown Inductance
Lx
b) In the case of Hay's Bridge one arm has resistance of 2K .Another arm has a
resistance of 4.7K . The third arm 5K in series with a capacitor of 0.1F.
Determine the values of the elements Rx and Lx in the fourth arm
8. a) The standard resistor arm of a Wheatstone bridge has a range of 0 to 100 ohms
with a resolution of 0.001 ohm. The galvanometer has an internal resistance of
100 ohm and can be read to 0.5 A. The other two arms have each 1 Kohm. The
bridge is supplied with a 10V DC source. When the unknown resistance is taken
as 50 ohm, what is the resolution of the bridge in
i. ohms and
ii. percentage of unknown.
b) Discuss about various errors that occurs during measurement.
9. a) With neat sketch explain the measurement of unknown inductance by using

Hays bridge? What are the advantages and limitations of it.
b) What are the limitations of wheat stone bridge?
10. a) Define Quality factor? Derive the expression of Quality factor in Hays bridge
which
is used for the measurement of unknown inductance?
11. With neat sketch explain how unknown resistance measured by means of wheatstone
bridge?
What are the applications of wheat stone bridge? And list out its limitations
12. a) Explain the parallel-connection method of using Q-meter and Obtain the expressions
for resistance, reactance and Q factor.
b) Give the list of the detectors used in ac bridges
13. a) Draw the Circuit of a basic Q-meter and explain its principle of operation using a vector
diagram
b) With circuit diagrams, explain the working of any two bridges that are employed for
measurements at radio frequencies
14. a) Explain the FM recording method.
b) What are the important features of a Kit type LCR bridge?
15. a) Discuss the Direct-connection technique of using Q-meter

b) A coil with a resistance of 5 is connected to the terminals of the basic Q-
meter. Resonance occurs at an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz and resonating
capacitance of 80 pF . Calculate the percentage of error introduced by the
insertion resistance, Rsh=0.01.
UNIT 5: OSCILLOSCOPES
1. a) By Lissajous pattern method , explain how the Phase difference between two Sinusoidal
Signals can be measured.
b) Give the specifications with Typical values of a CRO
2. a) With the help of a block Schematic explain the principle and operation of a CRO.
b) Derive the expression for Electromagnetic Deflection Sensitivity of Sm. Compare this
with CRT having Electrostatic Deflection Mechanism.
3. a) Draw the block Schematic of CRO and explain its working
b) Derive the expression for electrostatic deflection sensitivity SE of a CRO
4. a) Explain about
i. Triggered Mode
ii. Sweep Mode of a CRO.
b) The time base of a CRO has R = 470k and C = 0.01MF. Determine the %
of non-linearity in a Sawtooth output wave form having a period of 0.5m.sec.
5. a) Explain about Delay lines in CROs.
b) Determine the deflection sensitivity of a CRO, given with usual notation , l
=2cm ; d =4.5mm ; L=20cm ; Va = 3200V.
6. a) Explain how Lissajous patterns of Ellipse and circle are formed ? Derive necessary
equations to prove the same .
b) A Lissajous patterns on a CRO has Six Vertical maximum Values and Five
horizontal maximum Values. The frequency of the horizontal input is
1500Hz.Determine the frequency of the Vertical input
7. a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the function of associated circuits that are
used for CRT operation.
b) Explain how the light is emitted on the screen of a CRO
8. a) What are the advantages of dual beam for multiple trace oscilloscopes?
b) How is the vertical axis of an oscilloscope deflected? How does this differ from
horizontal axis?
9. a) Draw the neat diagrams of both vertical and horizontal deflection systems and
explain briefly about their working
b) Draw the block diagram of a dual beam oscilloscope and explain its working
10. a) With a neat block diagram, describe the working of a triggered sweep CRO
b) Mention the advantages of general purpose oscilloscope.
11. Write short notes on the following controls:

(a) Delayed Sweep
(b) ALT/ CHOP mode
(c) Astigmatism
12. a) Draw the neat block diagram of a general purpose oscilloscope and explain its
basic operation.
b) Explain the following terms briey:
i. Fluorescence
ii. Phosphorescence
iii. Persistence
13. a) Explain the working of a post deflection acceleration oscilloscope using a scan
expansion mesh.
b) Briefly summarize the characteristics of commonly used phosphors.
14. a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the function of associated circuits that are used for
CRT operation
b) Explain how the light is emitted on the screen of a CRO
UNIT 6: SPECIAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES
1. a) Explain the front panel of Digital storage Oscilloscope.

b) For a communication lab, signals up to 2 GHz are considered. Explain different
specifications you consider for CRO selection
2. a) Explain the principle and working of a Dual Trace Oscilloscope
b) Explain the method of measurement of period using CRO
3. With the help of a block Schematic explain the functioning of a Dual Beam
CRO.
Compare this with single beam CRO
4. a) Draw the block Schematic of a Period measuring instrument and explain its
Operation clearly. How do you determine whether frequency or period
Measuring to be done for a given Signal? Explain
b)
5. a) Draw the block Schematic of frequency counter and explain its operation
b) What are the different types of errors that occur in Frequency/Period
measurement? Explain.
6. Explain the principle and working of a storage oscilloscope and compare it with normal
CRO
7. a) Draw the block diagram of the sampling oscilloscope and explain with suitable
waveforms.
b) What is the function of an attenuator in CRO.
8. a) When is period measurement preferred over frequency measurement? Also

give two conditions for the period measurement.
b) With a suitable block diagram, explain the operation of a pre scaled frequency counter
9. a) Explain the operation of 10 to 1 probe

b) Explain the operation of the spot wheel method for frequency measurement
10. a) With a suitable block diagram and waveforms, explain the operation of a
frequency counter
b) How many displays (total decades) should a frequency counter have if its
accuracy and resolution are to be 0.001 percent?
11. a) Draw the block diagram of a digital storage oscilloscope and explain its operation
b) What are the advantages of an active probe?
12. a) Discuss the following display modes of dual-trace CRO

i. A and B chopped
ii. A and B alternate.
b) Explain the working principles of a current probe
13. a) Draw the neat diagrams of both vertical and horizontal deflection systems and explain
briefly about their working.
b) Draw the block diagram of a dual beam oscilloscope and explain its working
UNIT 7: TRANSDUCERS
1. Draw the sketches of elastic Transducers and explain how they are used to measure
pressure.
2. How are passive Transducer classified ? Give examples and explain the Principle
of operation of each of the them. What are the Various physical Parameters that
can be measured using them.
3. With the help of a neat sketch explain the principle , working , construction,
characteristics and applications of LVDTs
4. a) Explain the Principle and working of Strain gauges
What are Strain gauges Rosettes? Explain
b) What are the Salient features of Semiconductor Strain gauges? Explain
5. a) How are the Transducers classified ? Explain about each of them

b) Draw the Sketch of a potentiometer Transducer and explain how physical
parameters can be measured .
6. a) Explain the principle and construction of LVDT
b) Explain the principle of Strain gauges and give their constructional details.
7. How are Transducers classified? Give examples and briefly explain about the
Principle of operation of each of them
8. With the help of necessary diagrams, explain the Principle and operation of
LVDT.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of this transducer? What are
applications of LVDT?
9. a) What is a RTD and where is it used?

b) What is the difference between photo-emissive, photo-conductive and photovoltaic
transducers?
10. a) Compare RTD with thermistor.
b) Explain how the displacement is measured using LVDT.
11. a) With neat sketch, explain the resistance pressure transducers in detail?
b) Derive an expression for poissons ratio
12. a) Describe the operation of Optical pyrometers

b) Explain the working of a turbine flow meter with a neat diagram.
13. a) What parameters should be considered in selecting a transducer?

b) Define active transducer and passive transducer? Give the examples for each?
14. a) Differentiate the bonded resistance wire strain gauge and unbounded resistance wire
strain gauge?
b) Write short notes on the following terms:
i. Active transducers
ii. Passive transducers.
15. a) State the error introduced in thermocouple. Describe the various metod to
compensate this error.
b) Explain How the thickness of a sheet material can be measured?
16. a) Write a short note on pressure transducers?

b) Write a short note on any one of the bellow-type gauges for measurement of absolute
pressure?
17. a) Explain how an electrical transducer can be used to find the unknown pressure of a
liquid?
b) Briefly explain the principle and operation of piezoelectric accelerometer?
18. a) Compare thin film RTD and wire wound RTD.

b) Explain the working of a magnetic flow meter with a neat diagram
19. Briefly explain the different types of resistance thermometers? Also give their
applications
20. a) What is a RTD and where is it used?
b) What is the difference between photo-emissive, photo-conductive and photovoltaic
transducers?
UNIT 8: MEASUREMENT OF PHYSICAL PARAMETERS
1. Explain the Principle, working, Construction, characteristics and applications of

Thermistors.
2. a) Explain the principle and working of ultrasonic Level gauge.
b) How Humidity and Moisture are measured? Explain
3. Explain the principle of Elastic Force Device and other Electro mechanical Methods for
force measurement
4. Draw the Sketch and explain the principle and operation of Hotwire
Anemometer
for liquid flow measurement. What are the two types of anemometer available for liquid
flow measurement
5. Explain the principle and working of Ultrasonic Flow meters. Compare this with
other types of flow measurements .
6. a) Explain the principle and working of Proximity Detector
b) How Humidity and Moisture are measured? Explain
7. With the help of a neat sketch explain the principle and working of
Electromagnetic Flow meter. What are the advantages and Limitations of this
Method?
8. Explain the principle and working of magnetic flow meters. What are the
Advantages and Limitations of these meters. Compare them with other types of
Flow measurement techniques
9. a) Explain how an electrical transducer can be used to find the unknown pressure
of a liquid?
10. a) Define pressure? What are different methods of pressure measurement?

b) Define the following terms:
i. Gauge pressure
ii. Absolute pressure
iii. Differential pressure
11. a) Write about calibration of pressure measuring instrument?
b) What is piezo electric effect? How pressure is measured by using piezoelectric pressure
transducer?
12. Briefly explain the working principles and measurement of force by any two
nonelectric techniques?
13. a) Distinguish the A.C. tacho generator and D.C. Tacho generator?
b) With neat sketch briefly explain a.c. tacho generator?
14. a) How pressure can be determined by using well type manometer?

b) What are the errors in manometer? Explain them in detail?
15. a) With neat sketch, explain the resistance pressure transducers in detail?
b) Derive an expression for poissons ratio
16. a) Explain how an electrical transducer can be used to find the unknown pressure of
a liquid?
17. a) Explain briefly the construction and working of the Hydraulic Force Meter and also
explain its applications in various measurements?
b) Find the cause that produces the resistance or obstruction to a 10kg body, moving with
an acceleration of 10kg/m2. Name the cause and find the value of that cause?
18. a) With a neat sketch, briefly explain the principle of operation and force
measurement by cantilever beam type load cell?
b) Explain the working of D.C. Tacho generators with a neat sketch. What are its
advantages and limitations?
19. a) Write about calibration of pressure measuring instrument?
b) What is piezo electric effect? How pressure is measured by using piezoelectric pressure
transducer?
ASSIGNMENT
QUESTIONS
Electronic Measurements & Instrumentation Assignment Questions
UNIT-I
1. (a) Explain the Principle and working of differential Voltmeter .
(b) Draw the Sketch and explain the principle and operation of True RMS measuring Thermocouple
type Voltmeter.
2. (a) Explain the constructional details and differentiate between Ohmmeter series
type and shunt type.
(b) Explain the front panel of a multimeter. Suppose if we are measuring a voltage
230V AC. What should be the voltage range we select.
3. (a) Draw the circuit for a FET input electronic Voltmeter and explain its working.
(b) Give the Schematic for true RMS responding Voltmeter and explain its operation.
4. (a) Explain the terms :
i. Significant figures
ii. Conformity.
(b) How are random errors analyzed? Explain them with examples.
(c) Explain about true RMS voltmeter.
5. (a) What is Ayrton Shunt? Describe it with a neat sketch. Specify its applications.
(b) Design a universal Ayrton shunt to provide an ammeter with a current range of
2A, 5A, 10A using a d'Arsonval movement with an internal resistance Rm=50 and full scale deection
current of 1mA.
6. (a) Draw the block diagram of the measuring system and explain the function of
each stage of this system.
(b) Explain the types of test signals used in determining dynamic characteristics
of measurements applied to a system.
UNIT-II
1. (a) Explain the Principle and working of a Function Generator.
(b) Give the Specifications and Typical Values of a Function Generator Instrument.
2. (a) Explain the principle and working of Arbitrary waveform Generator Instrument.
(b) Draw the Circuit for Hartley oscillator and explain the principle of operation.
3. (a) What are the different Types of signal Generators ? Explain each of them briefly.
(b) What are the considerations to be made in choosing an oscillator Instrument or Signal Generator
Instrument .
4. (a) Draw the block diagram of a Pulse Generator Instrument and explain the operation of the
Instrument.
(b) Determine the frequency of Colpitts oscillator with L =100mH C1 =0.005F, C2 = 0.01F.
5. (a) Explain the Principle and working of FM Signal Generator.
(b) Give the specifications and Typical values of FM signal Generator.
6. (a) What are the different types of digital voltmeters? Briefly explain each one of them.
(b) The lowest range on a 41/2 digit DVM is 10 mV full scale. What is the sensitivity of this meter?
7. (a) With a neat diagram describe the principle of operation of Video pattern generator.
(b) With a block diagram explain the working of an AF oscillator.
8. (a) Draw the block diagram of a function generator and explain its operation.
(b) With a neat diagram discuss the operation of a pulse generator.
UNIT-III
1. Draw the block Schematic of a Basic Spectrum Analyzer and explain its working?
What are applications of this Instrument.
2. Draw the Block Schematic of AF Wave analyzer and explain its principle and Working
3. (a) What is the maximum sweep rate in kilohertz per second that could be used
with a spectrum analyzer without introducing distortion with a 4-kHz Gaussian filter?
(b) How the SSB modulated wave displayed on a spectrum Analyzer?
(c) What are the limitations of the tuned circuit harmonic distortion Analyzer?
4. (a) Explain the front panel of Spectrum Analyzer.
(b) Explain the importance of Spectrum Analyzer in communication systems.
5. (a) Explain any two types of Spectrum Analyzers.
(b) Explain the following terms associated with Spectrum Analyzer.
i. Sensitivity
ii. Dynamic Range
iii. Harmonic Mixing.
6. (a) Explain with the help of a block diagram the working of harmonic distortion analyzer.
(b) Explain briey the characteristics and terminology of a wave analyzer. Also draw its block diagram.
7. (a) Explain with the help of block diagram the working of a spectrum analyzer.
(b) Explain the different applications of spectrum analyzer.
UNIT-IV
1. (a) Balancing of which type of Bridge circuits AC or DC is difficult ? Why?
(b) Draw the circuit for Schering bridge and derive the expression for unknown elements.
2. (a) Which type of Bridge Circuit is used to determine the Dissipated factor of a Capacitor? Draw the
Circuit and derive the expression for the unknown elements.
(b) Draw the Andersons Bridge Circuit and derive the expression for the unknown Elements.
3. (a) Draw the Maxwells bridge Circuit and derive the expression for the unknown Elements at balance.
(b) Draw the Wien Bridge Circuit and derive expression for the frequency at which
The bridge elements are balanced.
4. Compare Ac Bridge circuit with DC Bridge circuits .
5. Define Quality factor? Derive the expression of Quality factor in Hays bridge which
is used for the measurement of unknown inductance?
6. (a) With neat sketch explain how unknown resistance measured by means of wheatstone bridge?
(b) What are the applications of wheat stone bridge? And list out its limitations.
7. (a) Explain the parallel-connection method of using Q-meter and Obtain the expressions for
resistance, reactance and Q factor.
(b) Give the list of the detectors used in ac bridges.
8. (a) Draw the Circuit of a basic Q-meter and explain its principle of operation using a vector diagram.
(b) With circuit diagrams, explain the working of any two bridges that are employed for measurements
at radio frequencies.
UNIT-V
1. (a) Explain about Delay lines in CROs.
(b) Determine the deflection sensitivity of a CRO, given with usual notation , l
=2cm ; d =4.5mm ; L=20cm ; Va = 3200V.
2. (a) Explain how Lissajous patterns of Ellipse and circle are formed ? Derive necessary equations to
prove the same .
(b) A Lissajous patterns on a CRO has Six Vertical maximum Values and Five horizontal maximum
Values. The frequency of the horizontal input is 1500Hz.
Determine the frequency of the Vertical input.
3. (a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the function of associated circuits that are used for CRT
operation.
(b) Explain how the light is emitted on the screen of a CRO
4. (a) What are the advantages of dual beam for multiple trace oscilloscopes?
(b) How is the vertical axis of an oscilloscope deflected? How does this differ from horizontal axis?
5. (a) Draw the neat diagrams of both vertical and horizontal deflection systems and explain briefly
about their working.
(b) Draw the block diagram of a dual beam oscilloscope and explain its working.
6. (a) Draw the neat block diagram of a general purpose oscilloscope and explain its
basic operation.
(b) Explain the following terms briey:
i. Fluorescence
ii. Phosphorescence
iii. Persistence.
7. (a) Explain the working of a post deflection acceleration oscilloscope using a scan expansion mesh.
(b) Briefly summarize the characteristics of commonly used phosphors.
8. (a) With a neat circuit diagram, explain the function of associated circuits that are used for CRT
operation.
(b) Explain how the light is emitted on the screen of a CRO.
UNIT-VI
1. (a) Explain the principle and working of a Dual Trace Oscilloscope.
(b) Explain the method of measurement of period using CRO.
2. With the help of a block Schematic explain the functioning of a Dual Beam CRO.
Compare this with single beam CRO.
3. Draw the block Schematic of a Period measuring instrument and explain its Operation clearly. How
do you determine whether frequency or period Measuring to be done for a given Signal? Explain.
(a) Draw the block Schematic of frequency counter and explain its operation.
(b) What are the di_erent types of errors that occur in Frequency/Period measurement? Explain.
4. Explain the principle and working of a storage oscilloscope and compare it with normal CRO.
5. (a) Draw the block diagram of the sampling oscilloscope and explain with suitable
waveforms.
(b) What is the function of an attenuator in CRO.
6. (a) Draw the block diagram of a digital storage oscilloscope and explain its operation.
(b) What are the advantages of an active probe?
7. (a) Discuss the following display modes of dual-trace CRO
i. A and B chopped
ii. A and B alternate.
(b) Explain the working principles of a current probe.
UNIT-VII
1. (a) Explain the Principle and working of Strain gauges.
(b) What are Strain gauges Rosettes? Explain.
(c) What are the Salient features of Semiconductor Strain gauges? Explain.
2. (a) How are the Transducers classified ? Explain about each of them.
(b) Draw the Sketch of a potentiometer Transducer and explain how physical parameters can be
measured .
3. (a) Explain the principle and construction of LVDT.
(b) Explain the principle of Strain gauges and give their constructional details.
4. How are Transducers classified? Give examples and briefly explain about the Principle of operation
of each of them.
5. With the help of necessary diagrams, explain the Principle and operation of LVDT.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of this transducer? What are applications of LVDT?
6. (a) What is a RTD and where is it used?
(b) What is the difference between photo-emissive, photo-conductive and photovoltaic transducers?
7. (a) Compare RTD with thermistor.
(b) Explain how the displacement is measured using LVDT.
8. (a) With neat sketch, explain the resistance pressure transducers in detail?
(b) Derive an expression for poissons ratio.
9. (a) Describe the operation of Optical pyrometers.
(b) Explain the working of a turbine flow meter with a neat diagram.
UNIT-VIII
1. (a) Explain the principle and working of ultrasonic Level gauge.
(b) How Humidity and Moisture are measured? Explain.
2. Explain the principle of Elastic Force Device and other Electro mechanical Methods for force
measurement .
3. Draw the Sketch and explain the principle and operation of Hotwire Anemometer
for liquid flow measurement. What are the two types of anemometer available for liquid flow
measurement.
4. Explain the principle and working of Ultrasonic Flow meters. Compare this with
other types of flow measurements .
5. (a) Explain the principle and working of Proximity Detector.
(b) How Humidity and Moisture are measured? Explain.
6. With the help of a neat sketch explain the principle and working of Electromagnetic Flow meter.
What are the advantages and Limitations of this Method?
7. Explain the principle and working of magnetic flow meters. What are the Advantages and
Limitations of these meters. Compare them with other types of Flow measurement techniques.
8. (a) Explain how an electrical transducer can be used to find the unknown pressure
of a liquid?
(b) Briefly explain the principle and operation of piezoelectric accelerometer?
****THE END****
CONTROL SYSTEMS
COURSEFILE
Department of
Sponsored by
COURSE
OBJECTIVES
Control Systems Course Objectives
COURSE OBJECTIVES
Analog control part:
1. To familiarize the students with the analog computer
2. To help the students understand and practice the modeling, simulation, and implementation of a physical
dynamical system by a linear time invariant ordinary differential equation.
3. To highlight the electrical modeling of a second order system and analyze the under damped, over-damped
and critically damped cases
4. To study the effects of poles and zeros location in the s-plane on the transient and steady state behavior
5. To study the effects of Lead, Lag and Lag-Lead series compensator on a second order system transient and
steady state system response.
Digital control part:

1. To familiarize students with Servo-Motor.
2. To implement the basic principles of Servo-Motor calibration.
3. To investigate the Servo-Motor speed and position control principles by designing and selecting specific P,
I and PI gains for specific responses.
4. To experimentally determine the transfer function of a Servo-Motor using the PC software, Servo-Motor
Hardware and skills and techniques learned.
Objectives related to both analog and digital parts:

1. To encourage students to work as a team (group) and learn to communicate effectively
2. The practical and wide applications of control systems in this course might lead some students to choose it
as a research topic of interest, for either graduate or undergraduate.
SYLLABUS
Control Systems Syllabus
SYLLABUS
UNIT I INTRODUCTION
Concepts of Control Systems- Open Loop and closed loop control systems and their differences-
Different examples of control systems- Classification of control systems, Feed-Back Characteristics,
Effects of feedback. Mathematical models Differential equations, Impulse Response and transfer
functions - Translational and Rotational mechanical systems
UNIT II TRANSFER FUNCTION REPRESENTATION

Transfer Function of DC Servo motor - AC Servo motor- Synchro transmitter and Receiver, Block
diagram representation of systems considering electrical systems as examples -Block diagram algebra
Representation by Signal flow graph - Reduction using masons gain formula.
UNIT III TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS

Standard test signals - Time response of first order systems Characteristic Equation of Feedback
control systems, Transient response of second order systems - Time domain specifications Steady
state response - Steady state errors and error constants Effects of proportional derivative, proportional
integral systems.
UNIT IV STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S-DOMAIN

The concept of stability Rouths stability criterion qualitative stability and conditional stability
limitations of Rouths stability. Root Locus Technique: The root locus concept - construction of root
loci-effects of adding poles and zeros to G(s)H(s) on the root loci.
UNIT V FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS

Introduction, Frequency domain specifications-Bode diagrams-Determination of Frequency domain
specifications and transfer function from the Bode Diagram-Phase margin and Gain margin-Stability
Analysis from Bode Plots.
UNIT VI STABILITY ANALYSIS IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN

Polar Plots, Nyquist Plots Stability Analysis.
UNIT VII CLASSICAL CONTROL DESIGN TECHNIQUES

Compensation techniques Lag, Lead, Lead-Lag Controllers design in frequency Domain, PID
Controllers.
UNIT VIII STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS

Concepts of state, state variables and state model, derivation of state models from block diagrams,
Diagonalization- Solving the Time invariant state Equations- State Transition Matrix and its
Properties Concepts of Controllability and Observability
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Automatic Control Systems 8th edition by B. C. Kuo 2003 John wiley and sons.,
2. Control Systems Engineering by I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, New Age International
3. (P) Limited, Publishers, 2nd edition.
4. Control systems engineering by Nagoor khani
5. Control systems engineering by Anand kumar and Ramesh babu.
Control Systems Syllabus
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Modern Control Engineering by Katsuhiko Ogata Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 3rd edition,
1998.
2. Control Systems by N.K.Sinha, New Age International (P) Limited Publishers, 3rd Edition, 1998.
3. Control Systems Engg. by NISE 3rd Edition John wiley
4. Modelling & Control Of Dynamic Systems by Narciso F. Macia George J. Thaler, Thomson
Publishers.
5. Control Systems U.Bakshi and Bakshi.
6. Automatic Control System- B.C. Kuo, seventh edition.
JOURNALS
1. Journal of automation control and systems engineering.
2. International journal of systems controlled communications.
3. The open automation and control systems journal.
4. International journal of intelligent control and systems.
STUDENTS
SEMINAR
TOPICS
Control Systems Students Seminar Topics
1. Open loop control systems and closed loop systems with examples.
2. Ac & dc servo motors
3. PID controllers
4. Time and frequency domain specifications of second order systems.
5. Routh Hurwitz criterion
6. Root locus concepts
7. Nyquist criterion
8. Bode plots
9. Polar plots
10. Lead, lag, lag-lead, lead-lag compensators
11. State models representations
LECTURE PLAN
Control Systems Lecture Plan
LECTURE PLAN
No of Method of
Periods Teaching
1. Concepts of Control Systems- Open Loop and closed loop control systems 3 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
and their differences
2. Different examples of control system 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
3. Classification of control systems, Feed-Back Characteristics, Effects of 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
feedback.
4. Mathematical models Differential equations 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
5. Impulse Response and transfer functions - 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
6. Translational and Rotational mechanical systems 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
7. related problems 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
8. university question paper discussion 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
UNIT II: TRANSFER FUNCTION REPRESENTATION
10. Transfer Function of DC Servo motor - AC Servo motor 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
11. Synchro transmitter and Receiver 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
12. Block diagram representation of systems considering electrical systems as 3 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
examples
13. Block diagram algebra 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
14. Representation by Signal flow graph 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
15. Reduction using masons gain formula. 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
UNIT III: TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS
18. Standard test signals - Time response of first order system 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
19. Characteristic Equation of Feedback control system 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
20. Transient response of second order systems 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
Vignans Institute of Technology & aeronautical engineeringIII Year B.Tech. I Semester

21. Time domain specifications Steady state response 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
22. Steady state errors and error constant 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
23. Effects of proportional derivative, proportional integral systems 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
UNIT-IV: STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S-DOMAIN
26. The concept of stability Rouths stability criterion 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
27. qualitative stability and conditional stability 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
28. Limitations of Rouths stability 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
31. Root Locus Technique: 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
The root locus concept
32. construction of root loci-effects of adding poles and zeros to G(s)H(s) on the 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
root loci.
UNIT-V: FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS
33. Introduction, Frequency domain specifications 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
34. Bode diagrams-Determination of Frequency domain 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
35. transfer function from the Bode Diagram 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
36. Phase margin and Gain margin-Stability 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
37. Analysis from Bode Plots. 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
UNIT-VI: STABILITY ANALYSIS IN FREQUENCY DOMAIN
40. Polar Plots Stability Analysis 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
41. Nyquist Plots Stability Analysis 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
UNIT-VII: CLASSICAL CONTROL DESIGN TECHNIQUES
44. LAG Compensation technique 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
45. LEAD Compensation technique 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
46. LEAD-LAG Compensation technique 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
47. all compensators in frequency domain 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition

48. PID Controllers. 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
UNIT-VIII: STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS
53. Concepts of state, state variables and state model 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
54. derivation of state models from block diagrams 2 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
55. Diagonalization 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
56. Solving the Time invariant state Equations 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
57. State Transition Matrix and its Properties 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
58. Concepts of Controllability and Observability 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
62. REVISION UNIT I &II 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
63. REVISION UNIT III &IV 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
64. REVISION UNIT V &VI 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition
65. REVISION UNIT VII &VIII 1 Black board I.J Nagrath & M.Gopal 2nd edition

LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Control Systems Learning Objectives
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After completing UNIT I the student will be able to
Explain the concepts of control system.
Explain the classification of control system.
comparision between open loop and closed loop control system with examples.
Explain Feedback Characteristics.
Explain the reduction of parameter variations like system sensitivity ,Time constant , Gain ,
Stability by use of feedback.
Solve problems related to effects of feedback
Identify the use of Laplace Transform in control system.
Determine the Transfer Function of Mechanical Translational System.
Solve problems on Mechanical Translational System.
Derive Electrical Analogues of Mechanical Translational System.
Determine the Transfer Function of Mechanical Rotational System.
Solve problems on Mechanical Rotational System.
Derive Electrical Analogues of Mechanical Rotational System.

After completing UNIT II the student will be able to
Derive Transfer Function of DC Servomotor Armature controlled and Field controlled
Derive Transfer Function of AC Servomotor.
Explain the operation of Synchro transmitter and Receiver.
Represent Electrical system as a Block Diagram and solve related problems.
Explain Block Diagram algebra.
Represent Control System graphically using Signal Flow Graph.
Reduce Block diagram using Masons Gain Formula

After completing UNIT III the student will be able to
Determine the Time response of 1st order system.
Time response of 2nd order system for un amped, under damped, critically damped, over
damped.
Time domain specifications- rise time, peak time , delay time, settting time, peak over shoot
expressions derived.
Determine the steady state response.
Determine Steady state errors and Error Constants.
Explain the effects of Proportional Derivatives, Proportional Integral and PID Systems.

After completing UNIT IV the student will be able to
Explain the concepts of stability
Solve problems on Routh Hurwitz stability criterion
Solve problems on Conditional stability
Construct Root Locus
Solve problems on root locus
Control Systems Learning Objectives
After completing UNIT V the student will be able to

Determine Frequency Response
Draw Bode plot
Calculate Gain Margin , Phase Margin from Bode Plot
Determine stability from Bode Plot.

After completing UNIT VI the student will be able to
Draw and analyse Polar Plot.
Determine Gain margin and Phase margin.
Determine the stability by Nyquist Criterion.
Solve problems on Nyquist Criterion.

After completing UNIT VII the student will be able to
Explain compensation techniques
Explain lag controllers design in frequency domain.
Explain lead controllers design in frequency domain.
Explain lead lag controllers design in frequency domain.
Explain about PID controllers.

After completing UNIT VIII the student will be able to
Construct the state variable model for a system characterized by differential equation.
Obtain state equation and output equation of an electric network.
Obtain state space model for a system.
Explain properties and significance of state transition matrix.
OBJECTIVE
TYPE
QUESTIONS
Control Systems Objective Type Questions
1. T he closed loop transfer function of the open loop transfer function , G (s )= K S ( 1 + S T ) of a unity feed back
systemis
a. (a)K(1+sT)S(b)KS2T+s+k(c)Ks(T+sT)(d)K/S
2. The sensitivity of a closed-loop system to gain changes and load disturbances depends
upon
a)loop gain (b) forward gain (c) forward gain,loopgain and frequency (d) frequency
3. In the following,pick out the linear systems
a. (i) d3y(t)/dt3+t3d2y(t)/dt2+tdy(t)/dt+y2=20sinwT (ii) d2y(t)/t2+(1/t)dy/dt+y=4
b. (iii)d2y(t)/dt2]+dy/dt+y(t)=5
c. (a) (II)and (III) (b) (I)and(II) (c) (I)and(III) (d) IIonly
4. The open loop control system is one in which
(a)output is dependant on control input (b) output is independent on control input
(c) input is independent on controller (d) only system parameter shav effect on the control output
5. The closed loop transfer function of the open loop transfer function,G(s)=K/[s(1+sT)] of a unity feedback
system is
(a) K(1+ST)S2 (b) k/s(T+sT) (c) k(1+sT)/s (d) k/(sT+k)
6. In closed loop control system with positive value of feedback gain the overall gain of the system
a)be unaffected (b) increase (c) nothing can tell (d) decrease
7. The position of a moving object of constant mass Misrelated to the total force'f 'applied to the object by
differential equation Md2y/dt2=fitst ransfer function willbe
(a) F(s)=Ms (b) F(s)=1/Ms2 (c) F(s)=1/Ms3 (d) F(s)=1/Ms
8. The transfer function of the system whose input and output are related by the Following differential
equation is given by d2y/dt2+3dy/dt+2y=x+dx/dt
(a) (s+2)/(s2+3s+2) (b) s/(s2+3s+2) (c) (s+1)/(s2+3s+2) (d) 1/(s2+3s+2)
9. Introduction of negative feedback in a system does not lead to reduction in
(a) instability (b) overall gain (c) bandwidth (d) distortion
10. In closed loop control system with positive value of feed back gain the overall gain of the system
(a) nothing can tell (b) increase (c) decrease (d) be unaffected
11. The describing equation of a mass damper spring system is given by d2x/dt2+dx/dt+0.5x=f(t) Where f(t)
is the external force acting on the system and x is the displacement of mass.The steady state displacement
corresponding to a force of newtons is givenby
(a) 2m (b) 4m (c) 0.5m (d) 0.25m
12. The poles of F(s) (s2-16)/(s5-7s4-30s3) are located at
(a) s=0(triple pole),-3and10 ( b)s=0(triple pole),-3and10 (c)s=4,4 (d)s=0,4,16
13. In a system, if forward gain is 76 and one fourth of the voltage is feedback ,the output errors
(a) 5 percent of the error without feedback (b) 15 percent of the error without feedback
(c) 10 percent of the error without feedback (d) 20percent of the error without feedback
14. Regenerative feedback implies feedback with

(a) positive sign (b) step input (c) oscillations (d) negative sign
15. The describing equation of a mass damper spring system is given by2d2x/dt2x/dt+0.5x=f(t) Where f(t) is
the external force acting on the system and x is the displacement of mass .The steady state displacement
corresponding to a force of newtons is given by
(a) 0.25m (b) 4m (c) 0.5m (d) 2m
16. The poles of F(s)=(s2-16)/(s5-7s4-30s3) are located at
(a) s=4,4 (b) s=0,4,16 (c) s=0(triple pole),-3and10 (d) s=0 (triple pole),-3and10
17. Wwhich statement is not correct for open loop control system?
(a) Simple construction of maintenance (b) Lessexpensive
(c) To maintain the required quality in the output ionisnotrequired (d)Disturbancescauseerrors
18. In a system, if forward gain is 76 and one fourth of the voltage is feedback,
a)The output percent of the error without feedback (b) 20 percent of the error without feedback
b)50 percent of the error without feedback (d) 10 percent of the error without feedback
19. In a negative feedback system with loopgain T, the noise as input to the amp S=Signal
(a) effect on S/N ratio (b) increase in S/N ratio by (1-T)
(c) decrease (1+T) ( d) decrease in S/Nratio by (1-T)C
20. The describing equation of a mass damper spring system is given by 2d2x/dt2 f(t) Where f(t) is the
external force acting on the system and x is the displacement of a dy state displacement corresponding to
a force of newtons is given by
(a) 4m (b) 5m (c) 7m (d) 0.5mA
ANSWERS
1.B 2.C 3.C 4.B 5.D 6.B 7.B 8.C 9.C 10.B
11.B 12.A 13.A 14.A 15.B 16.D 17.C 18.C 19.C 20.A

1. Transfer function of a system is used to calculate
a)the order of the system (b) the output for any given input (c) the main constant (d) the steady state gain.
2. One of the disadvantages of a servo motor is that
(a) it can handle only light loads (b) it has low starting torque
(c) it has lower liability (d) it develops communication problem
3. .A network has a pole at s=-1 and a zero at s=-2.if this network is excited by sinusoidal input, the output
(a)is in phase with input (b) lags the input
(c) decays exponentially to zero (d)leads the input
4. Two blocks having respective functions as G1 abd G2 are connected in parallel. Their resultant will be
(a) G1G2 (b)G1 or G2which everishigher
(c)G1orG2 which ever is lower (d) G1+G2
5. feedback loop consisting of only one branch is
(a) input loop (b) self loop (c) forward loop (d) output loop
6. Which of the following statements is not correct for servomechanisms ?
a) A servo with better frequency response need not be stable
b) Steady state accuracy of a servo is better than that of a regulator

c) A motor may be added to convert a regulator into a servo
d) Some servos do not need to be stable ,since the yareint ended for use with steady signals
7. The transfer function is (1+0.5s)/(1+s). It represents a

a)lead network (b) lag-lead network (c)lag network (d)proportional controller
8. . Two block s having respectivefunctionsasG1andG2areconnectedinseriescascad e. The irresultant will be
(a)G1G2 (b)G2/G1 (c) G1+G2 (d) G1/G2
9. A feed back loop consisting of only one branch is
(a) self loop (b) output loop (c) input loop (d) forward loop
10. The field of ad.cservo-motor is separately excited by ad.c amplifier of gain K=90, If the field has an
inductance of 2H and a resistance of 50ohms the value of the field constant will be
(a)0.04sec (b)0.01sec (c)D0.5sec (d)0.02sec
11. The transfer function of a simple R-C network functioning as a controller is G(s)=(s+Z1)/(s+P1). The
condition for R-C network to a ctasa phase lead controller is
(a)P1<Z1 (b)P1=0 (c)P1>Z1 (d)P1=Z1
12. Two blocks having respective functions as G1abd G2 are connected in parallel.Their resultant will be
(a)G1+G2 (b) G1orG2which ever is lower (c) G1orG2 which ever is higher (d) G1G2
13. A node with only incoming branches is called as
(a) node (b) sink node (c) input node (d) branch node
14. Which of the following device can be used to control the position of very small loa
(a) synchro (b) PMMC movement (c) DC servomotor (d) AC servomotor
15. The transfer function is (1+0.5s)/(1+s).It represents a
(a) Proportional controller (b) lag network (c) lead network (d) lag-lead network
16. Two blocks having respective functions as G1and G2are connected in parallel.Their resultant will be
(a) G1 G2 (b) G1or G2 which ever is lower (c) G1or G2 which ever is higher (d) G12
17. A system variable that equals the sum of all the incoming signals is defined as
(a) output node (b) input node (c) branch (d) node
18. Which of the following is disadvantage of a dc servo motor?
(a) It requires highs (b) It requires high storing for que,
(c) draws large currents and its speed regulation draws large currents (d) Its speed regulation is poor
19. The transfer function is (1+0.5s)/(1+s). It represents a
(a) lead network (b) pro roller (c) lag-lead network (d) lag network
20. Two blocks having respective functions as G1 and G2 are connected in series c as Resultant will be
(a) G2/G1 (b) G1/G2 (c) G1G2 (d) G1+G2
21. The product of the branch gain so f the loop is
(a) feed back path gain (b)Forwar Path gain (d) loop gain
ANSWERS
1.B 2.B 3.B 4.D 5.B 6.D 7.C 8.A 9.A 10.A
11.C 12.A 13.C 14.A 15.B 16.D 17.D 18.A 19.B 20.A

1.The characteristic equation of these second order system is given by s2+2cw0s+w02=0.Ifc=1,the system
exhibits
(a) overshoot (b) large overshoot (c) small overshoot (d)large undershoot
2 The characteristic equation of these second order system is given by s2+2cw0s+w02=0.If w=01,the poles are
(a)+or-jcw0 (b)+or-jw0 (c)+or-jw02 (d)+or-jcw02
3 A second order system with no zeros has its poles located at-3+j4 and-3-j4in these plane the undamped natural
frequency and the damping factor of the system arerespectively
(a) 5rad/sec and 0.60 (b) 3rad/sec and 0.60 (c) 4rad/sec and 0.75 (d) 5rad/sec and 0.80
4 Velocity error constant of a system is measured when the input to the system is uni function
(a) Impulse (b)Step (c)parabolic (d)Ramp
5 In a control system integral error compensation steady state error
(a) decreases (b) nothing can tell (c) increases (d) does not have any effect ion
6. The error signal produced in a control system is Qr=a+bt .if only proportional action is used ,the input is given
to the final control element when PID action is used, will be
(a)-(Ka+K1bt+K2a+K2bt) (b) ((Ka+K1(a+bt)+K2(at+bt2)) (c) K(a+btK1(at+bt2K2b)))
(d) ((Ka+K1(a+bt)+K2(at+bt2))
7.natural frequency of a unity feedback control system of transfer function G(s)=10/s(s+1)is
(a) 4.6rad/sec (b) 0.5rad/sec (c) 3.16rad/sec (d) 4.16rad/sec
8 Th etype-2 system has
(a) none pole at the origin (b) simple pole at the origin (c)two poles at the origin
(d)net pole at the origin
9.In control system excessive bandwidth should be avoided bacause
(a) noise is proportional to bandwidth (b) it leads to high speed of response
(c) it leads To slow speed of response (d) it leads to low relative stability
10.Velocity error constant of a system is measured when the input to the system is uni function
(a) Impulse (b) Ramp (c) parabolic (d)Step
11. The characteristic equation of these second order system is given by s2+2cw0s+w02=0.Ifc=1,the poles of
the transfer function will be
(a) equalto-1 (b) real and equal (c)imaginary and equal (d) complex conjugate
12.The characteristic equation of the second order system is given by s2+2cw0s+w02=0.Ifc<1,the poles are
(a)complex conjugate (b) imaginary and equal (c)real and unequal (d) real and equal
13.A unity feedback system has transfer function G(s)=9S(s+3)
(a)damping ratio=0.8 (b) natural frequency=9 (c) natural frequency=3
(d)damping ratio=0.6
14The type 0 system has at the origin
(a) two poles (b) net pole (c) no pole (d) simple pole
15. The steady state acceleration error for at ype1 system is
(a) Between 0 and 1 (b) Infinite (c) 0 (d) 1
16. The characteristic equation of the second order system is given by s2+2cw0s+02=0.Ifc=1, the system is
(a) Absolutely damped (b) over damped (c) under damped (d) critically damped
17.For the following differential equation 2d2y/dt2+4dy/dt+8y=8x,thedamping ratio is
(a) 2 (b) 0.7 (c) 1 (d)0.5
18.In control system excessive bandwidth should be avoided because
(a) noise is proportional to bandwidth (b ) it leads to high speed of response
(c) it leads to slow response (d) it leads to lower relative stability
19 The type 0 system has at the origin

(a)simple pole (b)no pole (c)two poles (d)net pole
20.Error constant of the system are measure of
(a)steady state response (b) relative stability
(c)steady state as well transient response (d )transient state response
ANSWERS
1.A 2.B 3.A 4.D 5.A 6.C 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.B
11.B 12.B 13.C 14.C 15.B 16.D 17.D 18.A 19.B 20.A

1 Introduction of integral action changes a system
a)from type-1 to type-0 (b)from type-0 to type-1 (c) from type-1 to type-2
(d) from type-2 to type-1
2.inR-H criterion, if the rear changes of sings in the Elements of the first Colum then the number of sign changes
indicate
(a)The number of pair of roots of same sig (b)The number of roots with positive real part
(c)the number of roots with negative real part (d)The number of pair of roots of positive sign
3 Given, the characteristic equation as F(S )=3(S)(S)+10(S)(S)+5S+5S+2=0, the number of roots that are on the
R.H. So f the S-Plane are
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 1 (d) 2
4 Which of the following statements is not true for root locus technique
(a) it provides the pattern of movement of closed-loop poles when open-loop gain varies
(b) it is most useful for single-input and single-output system
(c)it is used to obtain close loop pole configuration from open-loop poles and zeros
(d)can't tell from the options given
5The asymptotes and the break point coincide at s=- 2 .transfer function can be
(a) K/(s+1)(s+2)(s=3) (b) K(s+2)/(s+1)(s+3) (c) K/(s+1)(s+2) (d) K/(s+2)
6. Adding of poles in the transfer function causes to
(a) no oscillatory (b)overshoot (c)degrades the relative stability
(d) increase the stability
7 Error constant of the system are a measure of
(a) steady state as well transient state response(b) marginally stable
(c) relative stability (d) steady state response
8.The number of operational amplifier required to design an electric PID-control
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d)4
9 A system has some roots with real parts equal to zero, but
(a) One with positive absolutely unstable (b) absolutely stable
(c) marginally stable (d) relatively stable
10. Given, G(s)=1/s(1+6s) the system is
(a) unstable (b) marginally table (c)un stable (d) stable
11.which of the following statements is not true for root locus technique
(a)input and single-output system
(b) it provides the pattern of movement of when open-loop gain varies
(c) it is used to obtain closed-loop pole configuration poles and zeros
(d)can't tell from the options given
12.The transfer function is K/(s+1)(s+2)(s+3) then ,the break away point will be
(a)-2 and-3 (b)-1and-2 (c)0and-1 (d)-2and-3
13. Adding a zero very close to origin in the T.F has impact on
(a)impulse response (b) output response (c) steady state response
(d) no effect on response
14.the characteristic equation of a system has roots with negative real parts if and only if elements of the first
column of the Routh stable have
(a)negative sign. (b) Same sign. (c) positive sign. (d) Alternate positive and negative sign
15 Given,the characteristic equation as F(S)=3(S)(S)+10(S)(S)+5S+5S+2=0,Then the system is
(a)marginally stable (b)stable (c)unstable (d)conditionally stable
16.the root loci of a system has three asymptotes .The system can have.
(a)three poles. (b)Four poles and one zero (c)can't tell from the options given
(d) Five poles and four zeros.
17 For root loci which of the following are the starting points?
(a) closed loop poles (b) open loop poles (c) closed loop zeros (d) open loop zeros
18. Adding of poles in the transfer function causes
(a)lead-lag compensation (b) lag compensation (c) no compensation (d) lead-compensation
19 When derivative action is included in proportional controller,
(a)the proportion mains unaffected (b) decreases (c) increases
(d) depends upon derivative time
20. The best method for determining the stability and transient response is
(a)root locus plot (b) m-n circle plot (c) nyquist plot (d) Nicholas chart
ANSWERS
1.C 2.B 3.D 4.D 5.D 6.C 7.C 8.B 9.B 10.B
11.D 12.B 13.A 14.B 15.B 16.C 17.B 18.D 19.A 20.A
1. The term frequency response means the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ response of a system to a sinusoidal input
(a) Transient (b) steady state (c) Impulse (d) time
2. The correlation between time response & frequency response exists for the range of '' given by
(a)1 (b) 1 (c) 1 (d)1
3. Bandwidth & _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ are inversely proportional to each other
(a) Damping factor (b) Undamped natural frequency (c) Settling time (d) Rise time
4. The frequency response test on a system can be performed by varying

(a) Gain 0 to infinity (b)Gain 1 to infinity (c)Gain 02to infinity (d)Gain 03to infinity
5. In frequency response analysis the nature of input signal is
(a) Step (b) Ramp (c) Parabolic (d) Sinusoidal
6. Bandwidth is the frequency at which the magnitude drops to _ _ _ _ % of its zero frequency value
(a) 70.7 (b) 50 (c) 14.14 (d) 90
7. An all pass system has
(a) Pole zero pattern antisymmetric about imaginary axis.
(b) All poles and zeros in the left half of s-plane.
(c)All poles and zeros in the right half of s-plane. (d) Random pole-zero pattern in s-plane.
8. The magnitude of the pure time delay term is unity. This is true for
(a) All frequencies (b) Only low frequencies (c) Only high frequencies
(d) For a particular frequency range which depends on the over all transfer function of the system
9. Addition of a zero at origin to a transfer function results in rotation of the polar plot through an
angle of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ at both 0 & frequencies
(a) 900 (b) - 900 (c) 00 (d) 1800
10. A decade is the range of frequencies given by
(a) 0 to -3db/decade (b) 0 to -30db/decade (c) 0 to 3db/decade (d) 0 to 30db/decade
11Corner frequency is also called as
(a) Resonant frequency (b) Cut off frequency (c) Break frequency
(d) Neper frequency
12. The magnitude of the pure time delay term is unity. This is true for
(a) All frequencies (b) Only low frequencies (c) Only high frequencies
(d) For a particular frequency range which depends on the over all transfer function of the system
13. In the magnitude plot of a simple pole, a maximum error of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ dBs occurs at corner
frequency
(a) - 1 (b) 0 (c) - 3 (d) - 1.414
14. In the straight line approximation of magnitude plot the slope changes at corner frequencies by a value
which is in multiples of _ _ _ _ _ dBs / decade
(a) 20 (b) 14.14 (c) 8 (d) 10
15. An octave is the range of frequecies given by
(a)0 to 80db/octave (b) 0 to -30db/decade (c) 0 to 3db/decade (d) 0 to 30db/decade
16. Bode diagram consists of _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ plots.
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
17. dBs are units of _ _ sounds_ _ _ _ _ _ _
(a) sounds (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
18. The frequency at which high frequency and low frequency magnitude plots intersect is called
(a) Break frequency b) gain crossover frequency c) phase margin d) gain margin
19. The phase angle of transportation lag is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ degrees.
(a) - 57.3 (b) - 17.3 (c) 3.13 (d) 57.3
20. The log magnitude of a system with transfer function is
(a) Unity (b) - 20 (c) - 46.05 (d) 0
ANSWERS
1.B 2.A 3.D 4.A 5.D 6.A 7.A 8.A 9.A 10.A
11.C 12.A 13.C 14.A 15.A 16.B 17.B 18.A 19.A 20.D
1. For a reasonably good degree of relative stability the values of GM (dBs) and PM should be
(a). 6,30 (b). 0,0 (c) 0. 60,80 (d). 1,3
2. The polar plot of a system passes through the point (-1+j0). The GM is
(a). 0 dB (b). -1 dB (c). 1 dB (d). < 1dB
3.For a given system the damping ratio '' is 0.45. The approximate value of PM in degrees is
(a). 45 ( b). 4.5 (c). 0.45 (d). can't be determined from the given data
4. The Nyquist plot of a minimum phase system encloses the point (-1+j0) point. The GM of the system is
(a). < 0 (b). 0 (c). > 0 (d).
5. An open loop transfer function of a system has only real poles. If a pole at origin is added to this system
the shape of the Nyquist plot is affected in the following manner:
(a). The Nyquist plot is affected at both zero and frequencies
(b). The Nyquist plot is affected at 0 frequency only
(c). The Nyquist plot is affected at frequency only
(d). The Nyquist plot is not fected at all
6. Adding a pole at s = 0 to a loop transfer function will
(a). reduce the stability of closed loop system (b). increase the stability of closed loop system
(c). not affect the stability of closed loop system
(d) increase the stability of closed loop system under some specific conditions
7. A non zero pole is added to the loop transfer function of a system. The closed loop stability then
(a). is reduced (b). is improved
(c). is not affected (d). is improved to an extent which depends on the loop transfer function.
8. Addition of zeros to the loop transfer function affects the closed loop stability in the following manner.
(a). It is improved (b). It is reduced
(c). It is not affected (d). The exact effect depends on the loop transfer function
9. A system has G(s)H(s) = . A real pole at s = -2 is added to this system. Which of the following is true
with respect to the new system
(a). The Nyquist plot is affected at frequency only
(b). The Nyquist plot is affected at both zero and frequencies
(c). The Nyquist plot is affected at 0 frequency only
(d). The Nyquist plot is not ffected at all
10. The polar plot of this system will intersect with
(a). +ve j & +ve real axis (b). - ve real, +j, +ve real axes
(c). Only +ve imaginary axes (d). Only - ve imaginary axes
11. Polar plot is defined as the locus of tip of G(j) H(j) phasor as the input frequency is varied over a
frequency range given by _ _ _ _ _ _ _ where are any two frequencies other than 0 and
(a). +ve j & +ve real axis (b). - ve real, +j, +ve real axes
(c). Only +ve imaginary axes (d). Only - ve imaginary axes
12. With reference to a complex function P( ) , which of the following is true
(a). Both magnitude and phase angle of P(j) are functions of frequency .
(b). Only magnitude of P(j) is a function of frequency .
(c). Only phase angle of P(j) is a function of frequency .
(d). Neither magnitude nor phase angle of P(j) are functions of frequency
13. A given stable system has no open loop poles in the right half s-plane. For stability the Nyquist plot
should encircle the (-1+j0) point ,
(a). Zero times or zero net encirclement (b). Once in CCW direction
(c). Once in CW direction (d). Twice in CCW direction
14. Which of the following statements is true with respect to a function q(s) in the theory of complex
variables?
(a).Every s-plane contour which does not pass through any singular point has a corresponding
contour in the q(s) plane
(b).Every s-plane contour passing through singular points has a corresponding contour in the q(s)
plane
(c)Only those contours of s-plane which lie in the LH plane have corresponding contours in the q(s)
plane
(d).Any s-plane contour which does not pass through origin has a corresponding contour in the q(s)
plane
15. Nyquist stability criterion is used to determine
(a). Only closed loop stability (b). Only open loop stability
(c). Both open loop & closed loop stability (d). Neither open loop nor closed loop stability
16. A system has 2 open loop poles & one closed loop pole in the right half s-plane. The Nyquist plot of
this system will encircle the (-1+j0) point
(a). Once in CCW direction (b). Once in CW direction
(c). Thrice in CW direction (d). Thrice in CCW direction
17. Two poles & 3 zeros of a function q(s) are enclosed by an s-plane contour. The net encirclement of
origin by the corresponding q(s)-plane contour will be
(a). Once in CW direction (b). Once in CCW direction
(c). 5 times in CW direction (d). 5 times in CCW direction
18. A minimum phase system has a single pole at the origin. The minimum effort required
for the assessment of stability is by mapping
(a). Only that segment of Nyquist contour from = 0+ to
(b). The entire imaginary axis segment from - to + of Nyquist contour
(c). The entire Nyquist contour
(d). The entire Nyquist contour except the small semicircular indent around the origin.
19. The Nyquist plot of a type-1, 3rd order minimum phase system with an open loop gain K
intersected the real axis at (-0.25,0). After a change in gain the plot intersected the real
axis at (-0.75,0). The modified value of gain is
(a). 3K (b). (1/3)K (c). 9K ( d). (1/9)K
20. The Nyquist plot of a type-1, 3rd order system intersects the - ve real axis at (- 0.2,0).
If the open loop gain K is doubled the new point of intersection will be
(a). (- 0.4,0) b. (- 0.2,0) c. (- 0.1,0) d. (- 0.8,0)
ANSWERS
1.A 2.A 3.A 4.A 5.A 6.A 7.A 8.A 9.A 10.A
11.A 12.A 13.A 14.A 15.A 16.A 17.A 18.A 19.A 20.A
1. A system has fourteen poles and two zero. The slope of its highest frequency asymptote in its
magnitude plot is
(a) -40 db/decade (b) -240 db/decade (c) -280 db/decade (d) -320 db/decade
2. Octave frequency range is given by
(a) 1/2=2 (b) 1/2=4 (c) 1/2=8 (d) 1/2=10
3. The magnitude and phase relationship between the sinusoidal input and the steady state output of a
system is termed the
(a )time response (b) frequency response (c) transient response (d) steady state response.
4. The frequency at which the phase of open loop transfer function is 1800 is called the
(a) gain frequency (b) phase margin (c) phase cross over frequency (d) gain margin
5. The Bode plot and polar plot are usually drawn for systems
(a) closed loop (b) stable (c) linear (d) open loop
6. The bode plot consists of
(a) only one graph (b) two graphs (c) three graphs (d) no graphs
7. In Linear time invariant systems the frequency response is independent of the of the
input signal.
(a) only amplitude (b) only phase (c) magnitude (d) amplitude and phase
8. is not the frequency domain.
(a) root locus (b) bode plot (c) polar plot (d) nyquist plot
9. The maximum value of the magnitude of closed loop transfer function is called the
(a )resonant frequency (b) resonant peak (c) band width (d) gain margin
10. The frequency at which the resonant peak occurs is called
(a)resonant frequency (b) resonant peak (c) band width (d) gain margin
11. The band width is the range of frequencies for which the system gain is more than
(a) -5 db (b) -8 db (c) -3 db (d) 10 db
12. The phase margin is defined as the amount of additional phase lag at the gain cross
over frequency required to bring the system to the verge of
(a) stability (b) instability (c) critical damping (d) oscillating
13 Gain margin may be defined as the reciprocal of the gain at the frequency at which the phase
angle becomes
(a) 00 b) 900 c) 1800 d) 225 0
14. Phase margin of a system is used to specify
(a) relative stability (b) absolute stability (c) time response (d) frequency response
15. Concept of a phase margin and gain margin is applicable to systems only.
(a) open loop unstable (b) open loop stable (c) closed loop unstable (d) closed loop stable
16. When the gain margin is positive and the phase margin is negative, the system is
(a) stable (b) unstable (c) oscillatory (d) highly stable
17. Band width is used as a means for specifying the performance of a control system related to the
(a )Speed of response (b) Constant gain (c) Relative stability (d) Absolute stability
18. A system with a large gain margin or a large phase margin is usually a
(a) unstable system (b) stable system
(c) very stable but very sluggish system (d) highly oscillatory system
19. A system with gain margin close to unity or a phase margin close zero is
(a) highly stable (b) oscillatory (c) relatively stable (d) unstable
20. The frequency at which the phase angle is 180 degrees is called the frequency.
(a) phase cross over (b) cut-off (c) break (d) critical
ANSWERS
1.B 2.C 3.B 4.B 5.A 6.B 7.A 8.A 9.B 10.A
11.C 12.B 13.C 14.D 15.D 16.B 17.A 18.C 19.B 20.A
1 Knowing the state space representation, the transfer function of a system

(a) can not be determined b) can be determined partly
(c)can be determined completely d) can not exist
2. A state variable approach is applicable to systems.
(a) time variant (b) non linear (c) linear and time variant (d) all of the above
3. A state variable approach is applicable to systems.
(a) continuous time (b)discrete (c) periodic (d) continuous and discrete
4. For an nth order system the state equations will be of the order of
(a) n (b) 1 (c) n/2 (d) (n+1)/2

5. A lag compensator is basically a
(a) high pass filter (b) band pass filter (c) low pass filter (d) band elimination filter
6. Which one of the following compensation is adopted for improving transient response of a
negative unity feedback system?
(a) phase lead compensation (b) phase lag compensation
(c) gain compensation (d) phase lag and gain compensation
7. The band width of a control system can be increased by using ________compensator.
(a) phase lead (b) phase lag (c) phase lag-lead (d) proportional
8. is used for improving both the transient and steady state responses of a control system.
(a) integrator (b) comparator (c) lag-lead compensator (d) lead compensator
9. The open loop transfer function of a unity feed back control system is G(s)= 1/(s+2)2
the closed loop transfer function will have poles at
(a). -2, -2 (b). -2, -1 (c). -2, j1 (d). -2, 2
10. Which of the following systems provides excellent transient as well as steady state
response?
(a). proportional action (b). proportional integral action
(c). proportional differential action (d). pid action
11. An ON-OFF controller is controller.
(a). proportional (b). integral (c). non-linear (d). pid
12. The time required for the response to reach half the final value for the first time is
called
(a). delay time (b). decay time (c). rise time (d). settling time
13. Consider the unit step response of a unity feedback control system whose open loop transfer
function is G(s) =1/s(s+1). The maximum overshoot is equal to
(a). 1.143 (b). 0.153 (c). 0.163 (d). 0.173
14. The steady state error is given by -------------------------------------.
(a) lt s-> sE(s)/(1+G(s)H(s) (b) lt s-> sG(s)/(1+G(s)H(s)
(c) lt s-> sH(s)/(1+G(s)H(s) (d) lt s-> sR(s)/(1+G(s)H(s)
15.The Steady State Error for a first order system when a Unit Ramp is given as the input is-----.
( a) 1/Kv (b)1/Ka (c)1/1+Kp (d)1/Kp
16.The Velocity Error Constant (Kv) is ---------------.

(a)lt s->0 G(s)H(s) (b)lt s->0 sG(s)H(s) (c) lt s->0 s2 G(s)H(s) (d) lt s->0 s3 G(s)H(s)
17.The response of a second order undamped system when a unit step is given as the input is
(a)Sinusoidal Oscillations (b)Damped Oscillations (c)No Oscillations (d) None.
18.The expression for Rise Time (tr) is ---------------.
(a)tr = (-)/wd (b) tr = /wd (c) tr = (+)/wd (d) tr = 2/wd
19. A system with gain margin close to unity or a phase margin close zero is
(a) highly stable (b) oscillatory (c) relatively stable (d) unstable
20. The frequency at which the phase angle is 180 degrees is called the frequency.
(a) phase cross over (b) cut-off (c) break (d) critical
ANSWERS
1.C 2.C 3.A 4.A 5.C 6.C 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.D
11.A 12.A 13.C 14.A 15.A 16.B 17.B 18.B 19.A 20.A
ESSAY TYPE
QUESTIONS
Control Systems Essay Type Questions
UNITI-1:INTRODUCTION
1. (a) Find the transfer function for the following mechanical system: Shown in Figure
(b) Explain the limitations of closed loop system over open loop system.
2. (a) Explain the efect of feedback on stability.
(b) Explain the temperature control system concepts using open loop as well as closed loop
system.
3. (a) Obtain the transfer function for the following network Figure :
(b) Explain the efects of disturbance signals by use of feedback.
4. (a) Derive the transfer function of the following network figure 1a by assuming, R1=5M and R2 =
5M, C1=0.1F and C2=0.1F.
(b) Find the transfer function of the following system show in figure .
5. (a) Illustrate atleast three applications of feedback control systems?

(b) Explain translatory and rotary elements of mechanical systems?
6. (a) Obtain the transfer function of the following system and draw its analogous
electrical circuit. Figure
(b) Explain the advantages and features of transfer function.
7. (a) Explain the linearizing efect of feedback.

(b) The dynamic behaviour of the system is described by the equation, DC/Dt + 10C = 40E,
where 'e' is the input and 'C' is the output. Determine the transfer function of the system.
8. (a) Explain regenerative feedback?

(b) Determine the sensitivity of the closed loop transfer function T (s) = C(s) to R(s)
variations in parameter K at = 5 rad/sec. Assume the normal value of K is 1.
Shown in figure
9. (a) For the mechanical system Figure given, write down the diferential equations of motion and hence
determine the Y2(s)/F(s)
(b) Describe the analogy between electrical and mechanical systems.
10.For the mechanical system given, Figure write down

(a) Mathematical model
(b) Obtain the transfer function X1(s)/F (s)andX2(s)/F(s)
11. (a) Explain, with example, the use of control system concepts to engineering and
non engineering fields.
(b) For the electrical network shown in Figure given, derive the transfer function
12. (a) Explain the trafic control system concepts using open loop as well as closed
loop system.
(b) Why is negative feedback invariably preferred in closed loop systems?
13. (a) Define transfer function and what are its limitations?
(b) Find the transfer function of the following system: Shown in figure .
14. (a) Write the important diferences between open loop and closed loop systems
with suitable examples.
(b) Obtain the transfer function x2(t)/x1(t) of the following
system. Shown in figure.
15. (a) Explain the basic components of control systems?

(b) Find the transfer function for the system given figure .
16.(a) Explain the classification of control systems?

(b) Find the transfer function relating displacement 'y' and 'x' for the following
system. Shown in figure .
17. (a) What is feedback? Explain the efects of feedback?

(b) What is the sensitivity function and explain it with respect to open loop and
closed loop systems?
18. (a) Obtain the transfer function of the following system and draw its analogous

1. (a) Explain the advantages of signal ow graph over block diagram reduction process?
(b) Expalin the following terms related to signal ow graph:
i. Node ii.Branch iii. Forward path gain iv.Loop gain.
2. (a) Determine the transfer function c(t)/r(t) for the following block diagram.
(b) Define various terms involved in signal ow graphs.
3. (a) Determine the transfer function c(S)/r(S) for the following block diagram.
(b) Explain the properties of signal ow graphs.
4. (a) Determine the overall transfer function relating C and R for the system whose block diagram is
given.
(b) Explain the properties of block diagrams.
5. (a) Determine the overall transfer function relating C and R for the system whose
block diagram is given
(b) Explain the properties of block diagrams.

6. (a) Determine the transfer function c(S)/r(S)for the following block diagram
(b) Explain the properties of signal ow graphs.
7. Explain the procedure for deriving the transfer function and derive the transfer function for servo.
8. (a) State and explain mason's gain formula for the signal ow graph.
(b) What are diferences between block diagram reduction and signal ow graph reduction?
9. Derive the Transfer Function for a.c. servomotor. Explain about torque-speed characteristics.
10. (a) Explain how the potentiometers are used as error sensing devices. Give a typical application of
it with single line diagram.
(b) Discuss the efect of disturbance signal of the speed control system for a gaso-lineengine as
shown in Figure 2b assuming K=10.
11. Derive the Transfer Function for the field controlled d.c. servomotor with neat Sketch
12. (a) Reduce the given block diagram (figure 2a)and hence obtain the transfer function c(s)/r(s)
(b) Explain the need of signal ow graph representation for any system
13 (a)Reduce the given block diagram (figure 2a) and hence obtain the transfer function c(s)/r(s)
(b) Explain the working principle of synchro receiver with neat sketch.
14. (a) State and explain mason's gain formula for the signal ow graph.
(b) What are diferences between block diagram reduction and signal ow graph reduction?
15. (a) Reduce the given block diagram (figure 2a) and hence obtain the transfer function C(s)/ R(s)
(b) Explain the need of Mason's gain formula for any system reduction.
16. (a) Explain the disadvantages and advantages of block diagram reduction process over signal ow
graph.
(b) Explain the rules of block diagram reduction
17. (a) Determine the transfer functionc(s)/r(s) for the following block diagram
(b) Define various terms involved in signal ow graphs.
18. (a) Explain the disadvantages and advantages of block diagram reduction process over signal ow
graph.
(b) Explain the rules of block diagram reduction.
Draw a signal flow graph and find its closed loop transfer function and verify it using signal flow
graph.
19. Obtain the overall transfer function C/R from the signal flow graph shown in figure 1.

1. The overall T.F. is a unity feed back control system is given by
(a) Find Kp, Kv, Ka
(b) Determine the steady - state error if the input is r(t)=1 + t + t2.
2. (a) What are the types of controllers that are used in closed loop system? Explain them?
(b) The response of a system subjected to a unit step input is c(t) = 1 + 1.2e 10t .Obtain the
expression for the closed loop transfer function? Also determine the Un damped natural
frequency and damping ratio of the system?
3.(a) What is the diference between type and order of a control system? Explain each with an example?
(b) The figure 3b shows PD controller used for the system. Determine the value of Td so that the system
will be critically damped? Calculate its settling time?
4. (a) Explain about various test signals used in control system?

(b) Measurement conducted on a servomechanism shows the system response tobe C(t) = 1 +
0.2e60t when subjected to a unit step input. Obtain the expression For closed loop T.F., the damping
ratio and undamed natural frequency of oscillations?
5.(a) Explain error constants Kp, Kv, Ka for type-1 system?

(b) A unity feed back system has an open loop transfer function G(s) =10/ s(s+8). Determine its
damping ratio, peak overshoot and time required to reach the peak output. Now a derivative
component having T.F. of s/10 is introduced in the system. Discuss its efect on the values obtained
above?
6. (a) Explain about various test signals used in control system?

(b) Measurement conducted on a servomechanism shows the system response to be C(t) = 1 +
0.2e60t1.2e10t, when subjected to a unit step input. Obtain the expression For closed loop T.F.,
the damping ratio and undamed natural frequency of oscillations
7. (a) Explain the significance of generalized error series?

(b) For a system G(s)H(s) =k/ s2(s+2)(s+3) ,. Find the value of K to limit the steady state error
to 10 when the input to the system is r(t)=1+10t+40/2 t2
8. (a) For an under damped second order system ,define various time domain specifications?
(b) The forward path T.F. of a unity feed back control system is given by G(s) = 2/s(s+3) .
Obtain the expression for unit step response of the system?
9. (a) Explain the important time ? response specification of a standard second ordered system to a
unit step input.
(b) Derive expressions for time domain specifications of a standard second ordered system to a step
input.
10.(a) Derive the expression for rise time, peak time peak overshoot and settling time of second order
system subjected to a step input.

(b) A unity feedback control system has a loop transfer function. G(s) = 2/s(s+2).
Find the rise time, percentage overshoot, peak time and settling time for a step
input of 12 units
11. (a) What is meant by time response? Explain about

i. Steady- state response
ii. Transient response
(b) A unity feed-back system is characterized by an open loop T.F G(s) = k/s (s+10)
Determine the gain K so that the system will have a damping ratio of 0.5. For
this value of K , determine Ts, Tp and Mp for a unit step input
12. (a) What are generalized error constants? State the advantages of generalized
error coefcients?
(b) For a first order system, find out the output of the system when the input
applied to the system is unit ramp input? Sketch the r(t) and c(t) and show
the steady state error
13. How steady ?state error of a control system is determined? How it can be
reduced?
14.(a) Define type and order of a control system and hence find the type and order
of the following systems?
(b) The unit step response of a second order linear system with zero initial state is given by c(t) =
1 + 1.25e 6tSin(8t tan 1 1.333). Determine the damping ratio, un damped natural
frequency of oscillations and peak overshoot?
15. (a) Explain the significance of generalized error series?

(b) For a system G(s)H(s) = s2(s+K)(s+3) ,. Find the value of K to limit the steady 2
state error to 10 when the input to the system is r(t)=1+10t+40/2 t2.
16. (a) For an under damped second order system ,define various time domain speci-
fications?
(b) The forward path T.F. of a unity feed back control system is given by
G(s) = s(s2+3) . Obtain the expression for unit step response of the system?
17. (a) For an under damped second order system ,define various time domain speci-
fications?
(b) The forward path T.F. of a unity feed back control system is given by
G(s) = s(s2+3) . Obtain the expression for unit step response of the system?
18. (a) Why derivative controller is not used in control systems? What is the efect
of PI controller on the system performance?
(b) The system shown in figure uses a rate feed back controller. Determine the tachometer constant
Kt so as to obtain the damping ratio as 0.5. Calculate the corresponding d, Tp, Ts and Mp.
19. (a)Define the following terms:

i. Steady-state error
ii. Settling time
iii. Peak overshoot
iv. type and order of a control system.
(b) Sketch the transient response of a second order system and derive the expression for rise
time and peak overshoot?
UNIT-IV :STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S-DOMAIN
1. Sketch the root locus plot of a unity feed ?back system whose open loop T.F is
G(s) = k/s(s+2)(s+3)
2. Determine the values of k and b ,so that the system whose open transfer function
is G(s) = s3+kb(ss2+13)s+1 oscillates at a frequency of oscillations of 2 rad / sec. Assume +
unity feed back
3. (a) The open loop t.f. of a unity feed-back system is given by G(s) =SK/ s(1+0.25)(1+0.4s)
Find the restriction on K so that the closed loop system is absolutely stable?
(b) A feed-back system has an an open loop t.f of G(s)H(s) = k/s(s +5s+9)
2
Determine S by the use of the RH criterion ,the max. value of K for the closed loop system to be stable?
4. Using RH stability criterion determine the stability of the following systems.

(a) Its loop t.f. has poles at s=0, s= -1, s= -3 and zero at s= -5, gain K of forward path is 0
(b) It is a type-1system with an error constant of 10 sec-1 and poles at s= -3 and s=-6
5. A unity feedback system has a plant G(s) = K (s+0.5) / s(s+ 1) (s2+2s+ 2) sketch the root locus and
find the roots when = 0.5.
6. (a) Show that the Routh?s stability criterion and Hurwitz stability criterion are equivalent.
(b) Consider a unity-feedback control system whose open-loop transfer function is G(s)=k/
(s+B) . Discuss the efects that varying the values of K and B has s on the steady-state error in
unit-ramp response.
7. (a) Define the term root locus and state the rule for finding out the root locus on
the real axis?
(b) Calculate the angle of asymptotes and the centroid for the system having
G(s)H(s) = k/(s+2)(s+4)(s+3)(s+5)
8. (a) What are the necessary conditions to have all the roots of the characteristic
Equation in the left half of s-plane?
(b) What are the difculties in RH stability crititerion? Explain ,how you can over come them?
9. (a) Define the the following terms
i. absolute stability
ii. marginal stability
iii. conditional stability
(b) By means of RH criterion determine the stability of the system represented by the characteristic
equation S4 + 2S3 + 8S2 + 4S + 3 = 0
(c) State the advantages of RH Stability criterion?
10. The open loop T.F. of a control system is given by G(s)H(s) = K

s(s+6)(s2+4s+13)
Sketch the root locus plot and determine
(a) the break-away points (b) The angle of departure from complex poles
(c) the stability
11. For a unity feedback system having forward path transfer function
G(S) = k/s(1+0.6S)(1+0.4s) Determine)
(a) The range of values of K (b) Marginal value of K
(c) Frequency of sustained oscillations
12(a) Define the following terms

i. Stable system
ii. Critically stable system
iii. Conditionally stable system
(b) For the system having characteristic equation 2S4 + 4S2 + 1 = 0, find the
following
i. the no. of roots in the left half of s-plane
ii. the no. of roots in the right half of s-plane
iii. the no. of roots on the imaginary axis.
Use the RH stability criterion
1. Write short notes:

(a) Frequency domain specifications
(b) Stability analysis from Bode plots.
2. (a) Show that for a critically stable system the gain cross over frequency is equal
to phase cross over frequency.
(b) The Gain Margin of a type-1, 2nd order system is always infinity. Justify. (c) The Bode
plots of a system is shown in figure .
(d) From the Bode plots of a unity feed back system, G(j ) at gain cross over frequency is found to
be 150o & G(j ) at phase cross over frequency is found to be -12 dBs. Find the stability of the
system.
(a) Frequency domain specifications
(b) Stability analysis from Bode plots.
4. (a) Derive the expressions for resonant peak & resonant frequency and hence establish the
correlation between time response & frequency response.
(b) Given = 0.7 & n = 10 r/s find resonant peak, resonant frequency & Bandwidth.
5. (a) Write a note on determination of range of 'K' for stability using Bode plots.
(b) Define GM & PM and explain how you can determine them from Bode plots.
6. (a) Explain the term frequency response analysis.

(b) Show that in Bode magnitude plot the slope corresponding to a quadratic
factor is -40 dB/dec.
(c) Explain with the help of examples
i. Minimum phase function
ii. Non minimum phase function
iii. All pass function.
7. (a) Explain clearly the steps involved in the construction of Bode plots of a system
with loop transfer function consisting of
i. an open loop gain K
ii. one pole at origin
iii. one quadratic factor
(b) Given G(s) = K/(s)(s5) Determine the phase angle at 0, 5 & frequencies.
8. (a) Define
i. Minimum phase tf
ii. Non minimum phase tf

(b) Enlist the steps for the construction of Bode plots

(a) Comparision of polar & Nyquist plots
(b) Applications of Nyquist criterion.
10. (a) Define frequency response.

(b) Discuss the advantages & disadvantages of frequency response analysis.
(c) Bring out the correlation between time response & frequency response and hence show that
the correlation exists for the range of damping ratio 0 << 0.707.
11. (a) Derive the expressions for resonant peak & resonant frequency and hence establish the
correlation between time response & frequency response.
(b) Given = 0.7 & n = 10 r/s find resonant peak, resonant frequency & Bandwidth.
12. (a) Explain the term frequency response analysis.

(b) Show that in Bode magnitude plot the slope corresponding to a quadratic
factor is -40 dB/dec.
(c) Explain with the help of examples
i. Minimum phase function
ii. Non minimum phase function
iii. All pass function.
13. (a) Write a note on determination of range of 'K' for stability using Bode plots.
(b) Define GM & PM and explain how you can determine them from Bode plots.
14. (a) Explain why it is important to conduct frequency domain analysis of linear
control systems.
(b) Sketch the Bode Magnitude plot for the transfer function
G(s) = ks/(1+0.2s)(12+0.02s) ). Hence find 'K' such that gain cross over freq. is 5 r/s.

1. (a) Define Polar plot.
(b) Explain how you can determine relative stability using polar plots
(c) Sketch the polar plot of a system given by G(s) = 1/s(1+s)(1+2s) If the plot crosses the real
axis determine the corresponding frequency & magnitude
2.. (a) State Nyquist Stability Criterion.

(b) Explain the use of Nyquist Stability Criterion in the assessment of relative stability of a system.
(c) Enlist the step-by-step procedure for the construction of Nyquist plots.
3.(a) What is "Nyquist Contour"?
(b) A system is given by G(s) = s2(s+4)(s+1)(1s+2) Sketch the Nyquist plot & hence determine the
stability of the system.
4. (a) State Nyquist Stability Criterion.
(c) Enlist the step-by-step procedure for the construction of Nyquist plots
5. (a) Explain how the type of a system determines the shape of polar plot
(b) Write a note on Nyquist criterion for minimum phase & non minimum phase transfer functions.
6. (a) What is "Nyquist Contour"?

(b) A system is given by G(s) =k/ s2(s+4)(s+1) Sketch the Nyquist plot hence determine the
stability 1) 2 of the system.
7. (a) Explain Nyquist stability criterion.
(b) With the help of Nyquist plot assess the stability of a system G(s) = S(S+13)(S+2). What happens to
stability if the numerator of the function is changed from 3to 30?
8(a) Explain the frequency response specifications.

(b) Draw the Bode Plot for the system having G(s)H(s) = 100(0.02s+1) /(s+1)(0.1s)(0.01s+1) find gain
and phase cross over frequency.
9. (a) Construct the complete Nyquist plot for a unity feed back control system whose open loop
transfer function is G(s)H(s) = K/S(S2+2S+2) . Find maximum value of K for which the
system is stable.
(b) The open loop transfer function of a unity feed back system is G(s)=1/ s(1+0.5s)(1+0.1s) .
Find gain and phase margin. If a phase lag element with transfer function of 1+2s is added in the
forward path, find how much the gain must be changed 1+5s to keep the margin same
10. (a) The open loop transfer function of a feed back control system is G(s)H(s)= K/S(1+S)(1+2S)S2 .
Find the restrictions on K for stability. Find the values of K for the system to have a gain margin of
3 db. With this value of K, find the phase cross over frequency and phase margin.
(b) Explain how Bode plot is used to find gain margin and phase margin.
11. (a) With respect to a function q(s) "Every s-plane contour which does not pass
through any singular points of q(s) has a corresponding contour in q(s) plane" Elaborate.
(b) What is the efect of adding a zero at origin to the to the open loop transfer function on polar plot?
12. (a) A system has one open loop pole & two closed loop poles in Right Half of s- plane. Show that the
Nyquist plot encircles the (-1+j0) point once in clockwise direction.
(b) Addition of poles to the loop transfer function reduces the closed loop stability of the system. Justify
by Nyquist plots.
13. (a) State Nyquist Stability Criterion.
(c) Enlist the step-by-step procedure for the construction of Nyquist plots

1. (a) What is compensation? what are the diferent types of compensators?
(b) What is a lag compensator, obtain the transfer function of lag compensator and draw pole-zero
plot?
(c) Explain the diferent steps to be followed for the design of compensator using Bode plot?
2. (a) What is compensation? What are the diferent types of compensators?

(b) What is a lead compensator, obtain the transfer function of lead compensator and draw pole-zero
plot?
(c) Explain the diferent steps to be followed for the design of lead compensator using Bode plot?
plot?
4. (a) What is compensation? what are the diferent types of compensators?

(b) What is a lag compensator, obtain the transfer function of lag compensator and draw pole-zero
plot?
(c) Explain the diferent steps to be followed for the design of compensator using Bode plot?
5. For the unity feed back control system forward path transfer function
G(S) = K/S (S+4) (S+20). Design a lag-lead compensator so that PM 40 and steady state error for
unit ramp input 0.04 rad.

plot?
7. (a) Explain the Relative stability.

(b) The open loop transfer function of a unity feed back system is G(s)H(s)=k/s(s+2) Comment
on the stability.
8. Design a lead compensator for unity feed back system whose open loop transfer function G(S) =
K/S(S+2)(S+5) to satisfy the following specifications. 1
(a) velocity error constant KV 50 (b) hase margin 200.
UNIT-VIII : STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS
1. (a) The system is represented by the diferential equation y + 5y + 6y = u.

Find the transfer from state variable representation.
(b) Consider the RLC network shown in figure. Write the state variable rep-resentation.
2. (a) Discuss the significance of state Space Analysis?

(b) Define state variables.
(c) Obtain the state variable representation of an armature controlled D.C Servo motor?
3. (a) Obtain the state model of the system shown in figure 8a.
Consider the state variables as i1, i2, v

(b) Obtain the state model of a field controlled motor?
4. (a) For the given T.F T (s) =b0/ S3+a2S2+a1S+a0. Obtain the state model (phase variable form)?
(b) Construct the state model for a system characterized by the diferential equation.
Y + 5y + 6y = u.
5. (a) A control system has a transfer function given by G (s) = (S+1S)+S3+2)2 . Obtain the canonical state
variable representation
(b) For the given plant transfer function construct the signal ow diagram and determine the state
space model.
6. Obtain state space mode for given mechanical system.Figure

7. Define controllability and Observability.
8. (a) Explain properties of state transition matrix

(b) Consider the transfer function Y(s) / U(s) = (2s2 + s +
5)/(s3 + 6s2 + 11s + 4) . Obtain the state equation by direct
decomposition method and also find state transition matrix.
9. (a) Write the state equations for the block diagram given figure 8a.
10. (a) Discuss the significance of state Space Analysis?

(b) Define state variables.
(c) Obtain the state variable representation of an armature controlled D.C Servomotor?
ASSIGNMENT
QUESTIONS
Control Systems Assignment Questions
UNITI-1:INTRODUCTION
1. Distinguish between a) linear and nonlinear system b) Single variable and multivariable control
system c) Regenerative and degenerative feedback control systems.
2. Define system and explain about various types of control systems with examples and their
advantages.
3. What are the advantages of negative feedback? Explain the effect of negative feedback on bandwidth
and sensitiveness to parameter variation in closed loop control system.

1. Derive the transfer function of an a.c.servomotor and draw its characteristics.
2. Derive the transfer function for the field controlled d.c. servomotor with neat sketch.
3. Draw the signal flow graph for the system of equations given below and obtain the overall transfer
function using masons rule
X2 = X1 + X6
X3 = G1 X1 + H 2 X4 + H 3 X5
X4 = G2 X3 + H4 G6
X5 = G5 X4
X6 = G4 X5

1. In a unity feedback control system the open loop transfer function G(s) = 10 / s (s+1). Find the time
response of the system
a) Find the time constant and % overshoot for a unit step input.
b) To reduce the % overshoot by 50% it is proposed to add a tachometer feedback 100p. Find the
tachometer feedback gain to be used.
2. Consider the closed -loop system given by C(s) / R(s) = wn2 / s2 + 2 wn s + wn2 Determine the
values of and wn so that the system responds to a step input with Approximately 5% overshoot and
with a settling time of 2 sec. (Use 2% criterion).
UNIT-IV :STABILITY ANALYSIS IN S-DOMAIN

1. a) Explain the concepts of Stability of a control system and explain a method to determine the
stability of dynamical system.
b) A unity feed back control system is characterized by the open loop transfer function G(s) = K
(s+13) / s(s+3) (s+7)
2. Using the Rouths criterion determine the range of values of K for the system to be stable. Check if
for K=1 all the roots of the characterstic equation of above system have dampin factor

1) a) Explain a frequency domain specifications.
b) Sketch the Bode plot for the Transfer function G(s) = Ke-0.5s / s(2+s)(1+0.3s) ,K stands for the
cross over frequency wo to be 5 rad/sec.
Control Systems Assignment Questions
2) Sketch the Bode plot for a unity feedback system characterized by the open loop transfer function
G(s) = K(1+0.2s)(1+0.025s) / s2(1+0.001s)(1+0.005s). Show that the system is conditionally
stable.Find the range of K for which the system is stable.

1) a) Explain Nyquist Stability criterion.
b) A unity feedback control system has an open loop transfer function given by G(s)H(s) = 100 /
(s+5)(s+2). Draw the Nyquist diagram and determine its stability.
2) Draw the Nyquist plot for the open loop system G(s) = K(s+3) / s(s+1) and find its stability . Also
find the phase margin and gain margin.

1. Write short notes on lead, lag, lead-lag compensation networks.
2. Write short notes on Amplidyne.
UNIT VIII: STATE SPACE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS SYSTEMS

1. Explain properties of state transition matrix.
2. Consider the transfer function Y(s) / U(s) = (2s2+ s + 5) / (s3 + 6s2 + 11s + 4 ). Obtain the state
equation by direct decomposition method and also find state transition.
****THE END****
Computer organization
COURSEFILE
Department of
VIGNANS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY AND
Sponsored by
COURSE
OBJECTIVES
Computer Organization Course Objectives
COURSE OBJECTIVES
By the end of this course, you should be able to:
Think critically, independently, and quantitatively about computer design

Analyze architectures and computational designs
Formulate design spaces for architectural parameters and evaluate tradeoffs
Design and synthesize new and better architectures
Reason about impact of technological change on architectures and their relative merits
Reason systematically about impact of design parameters and alternatives on key costs (energy,
delay, area, reliability, complexity)
Understand various conventional computational organizations and their strengths and
weaknesses
Review development of computer systems
Examine the operation of the major building blocks of a computer system
Investigate performance enhancements for each component
Review historical development of computer systems
Identify design levels for computer system development
Discuss descriptive and design tools for each design level
Compare and contrast various performance metrics for computer systems
SYLLABUS
Computer Organization Syllabus
SYLLABUS
UNIT-I
BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS: Computer Types, Functional units, Basic operational
concepts, Bus structures, Software, Performance, multiprocessors and multi computers.
Data types, Complements, Data Representation. Fixed Point Representation. Floating Point
Representation. Error Detection codes.
UNIT-II
REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICROOPERATIONS: Register Transfer language.
Register Transfer, Bus and memory transfer, Arithmetic Mircro operatiaons, logic micro operations,
shift micro operations, Arithmetic logic shift unit. Instruction codes. Computer Registers Computer
instructions Instruction cycle. Memory Reference Instructions. Input Output and Interrupt.
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT - Stack organization. Instruction formats. Addressing modes.
DATA Transfer and manipulation. Program control. Reduced Instruction set computer
UNIT-III
MICRO PROGRAMMED CONTROL: Control memory, Address sequencing, micro program
example, Design of control unit-Hard wired control. Micro programmed control
UNIT-IV
COMPUTER ARITHMETIC : Addition and subtraction, multiplication Algorithms, Division
Algorithms, Floating point Arithmetic operations. Decimal Arithmetic unit, Decimal Arithmetic
operations.
UNIT-V
THE MEMORY SYSTEM : Memory Hierarchy, Main memory, Auxiliary memory, Associative
memory, Cache memory, Virtual memory, Memory management hardware
UNIT-VI
INPUT-OUTPUT ORGANIZATION : Peripheral Devices, Input-Output Interface, Asynchronous
data transfer Modes of Transfer, Priority Interrupt, Direct memory Access, Input Output Processor
(IOP), Serial communication;
UNIT-VII
PIPELINE AND VECTOR PROCESSING: Parallel Processing, Pipelining, Arithmetic Pipeline,
Instruction Pipeline, RISC Pipeline Vector Processing, Array Processors.
UNIT-VIII
MULTI PROCESSORS: Characteristics of Multiprocessors, Interconnection Structures,
Interprocessor Arbitration. Interprocessor Communication and Synchronization, Cache Coherance.
Computer Organization Syllabus
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Computer System Architecture M.Moris Mano, IIIrd Edition, PHI / Pearson, 2006.
2. Computer Organization Car Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, V Edition, McGraw Hill,
2002.
REFERENCE:
1. Computer Organization and Architecture William Stallings Seventh Edition, PHI/Pearson, 2006.
2. Computer Architecture and Organization John P. Hayes, Mc Graw Hill International editions,
1998.
WEBSITES:
1) http://www.nptel.iitm.ac.in
JOURNALS
1) Journal of Organizational Computing and Electronic Commerce

2) International Journal of Architectural Computing
3) International Journal of Computer & Organization Trends
STUDENTS
SEMINAR
TOPICS
Computer Organization Students Seminar Topics
1). Computer Types, Functional units, Basic operational concepts.

2). Register Transfer language. Register Transfer, Bus and memory transfer, Arithmetic Mircro
operatiaons.
3). Control memory, Address sequencing, micro program example.
4). Addition and subtraction, multiplication Algorithms, Division Algorithms.
5). Memory Hierarchy, Main memory, Auxiliary memory.
6). Peripheral Devices, Input-Output Interface, Asynchronous data transfer.
7). Parallel Processing, Pipelining, Arithmetic Pipeline.
8). Characteristics of Multiprocessors, Interconnection Structures
LECTURE PLAN
Computer Organization Lecture Plan
LECTURE PLAN
S.No No of Text books

NAME OF THE TOPIC Method of Teaching
Periods referred
Unit-I: BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS
1. Computer types, Functional types 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
2. Basic operational concepts 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
3. Bus structure, Software, Performance 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
4. Multiprocessors & multi computers 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
5. Data Representation Fixed Point Representation, Floating Point Representation 2hrs Black board & OHP M.Moris Mano
6. Error Detection Codes 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
7. Computer types, Functional types Black board M.Moris Mano
Unit-II: REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICROOPERATIONS
8. Register transfer language, Register transfer Bus & memory transfers 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
9. Micro operations 3hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
10. Instruction codes, instruction cycle 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
11. Computer Registers, Computer Instructions 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
12. Register transfer language, Register transfer Bus & memory transfers Black board M.Moris Mano
13. Micro operations Black board M.Moris Mano
Unit-IIII: MICRO PROGRAMMED CONTROL
14. Control memory address sequencing 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
15. Micro program examples 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
16. Design of control unit 2hrs OHP M.Moris Mano
17. Hardwired control and micro programmed control 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
Unit-IV: COMPUTER ARITHMETIC
18. Computer arithmetic: addition and subtraction 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
19. Multiplication algorithms 3hr Black board M.Moris Mano
20. Division algorithms 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
21. Floating-point arithmetic operations 1hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
22. Decimal arithmetic unit, decimal arithmetic operations 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
Computer Organization Lecture Plan
Unit-V: THE MEMORY SYSTEM

23. Memory hierarchy 1hr OHP M.Moris Mano
24. Main memory, Auxiliary memory, Associative memory, Associative memory 2hr Black board M.Moris Mano
25. Cache memory,virtual memory 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
26. Memory management hardware 1hrs OHP M.Moris Mano
27. Peripheral devices, input-output interface 1hr M.Moris Mano
Unit-VI: INPUT-OUTPUT ORGANIZATION
28. Asynchronous transfer, modes of transfer 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
29. Priority, interrupt, direct memory access 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
30. Input-output processor 1hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
31. Serial communication 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
Unit-VII: PIPELINE AND VECTOR PROCESSING
32. Parallel processing 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
33. Pipelining 2hrs OHP M.Moris Mano
34. Arithmetic pipeline 1hr Black board M.Moris Mano
35. Instruction pipeline 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
36. RISC pipeline, vector processing, array processors 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
Unit-VIII: MULTI PROCESSORS
37. Characteristics of multiprocessors 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
38. Interconnection structures 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
39. Interprocessor arbitration 2hr Black board M.Moris Mano
40. Interprocessor communication and synchronization 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
41. Cache coherence, shared memory multiprocessors 2hrs Black board M.Moris Mano
LEARNING
OBJECTIVES
Computer Organization Learning Objectives
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
UNIT-I: BASIC STRUCTURE OF COMPUTERS

At the end of this unit student will get the concepts of
Identifying all parts of computer
Learn about bus structure
Analyzing basic operational concepts
Learn about Data representation
Machine instructions and their execution
Performance of the computer
UNIT-II: REGISTER TRANSFER LANGUAGE AND MICROOPERATIONS

Understand the concepts of rtl
Become familiar with all the micro operations
Analyzing instruction cycle, instruction codes
How the instructions will execute
UNIT-III: MICRO PROGRAMMED CONTROL

At the end of the unit student will get the concept
Know basic concepts of control memory.
Describe various address sequencing and micro program examples.
Learn about design issues of control unit, hardwired control and micro programmed control unit.
UNIT-IV: COMPUTER ARITHMETIC

Learn about addition, subtraction, multiplication and division algorithms.
Learn about floating point arithmetic operations.
Learn about Decimal arithmetic and Decimal arithmetic operations.
UNIT-V: THE MEMORY SYSTEM

Know basic concepts of semiconductor RAM, ROM and cache memories.
Describe various performance considerations.
Learn about Virtual memories, secondary storage devices.
UNIT-VI: INPUT-OUTPUT ORGANIZATION

Know various peripheral devices.
Learn about input output interface.
Describes various models of asynchronous transfer modes.
Describes the various interrupts, DMA and I/O processor.
Learn about serial communication.
UNIT-VII: PIPELINE AND VECTOR PROCESSING
Computer Organization Learning Objectives

Know various parallel processing mechanisms.
Learn about linear, non linear pipelining.
Learn about arithmetic and instruction pipelining..
Describes the RISC pipeline vector processing.
Learn about SIMD array processor.
UNIT-VIII: MULTI PROCESSORS

Know various characteristics of multiprocessors.
Learn about various interconnection structures.
Describes the interprocessor arbitration, communication and synchronization.
Describes what cache coherence is.
Learn about shared memory multiprocessors.
OBJECTIVE
TYPE
QUESTIONS
Computer Organization Objective Type Questions
1. Computer design is concerned with

a. The way hardware components operate and connected together to form Computer system.
b. The determination of what hardware should be used and how the parts be connected.
c. The structure and behavior of the computer as seen by the user.
d. Design of electronic components of computer.
2. . A digital computer with more than one processor is called as
a. Multi Programming System c.Multiprocessor System
b. Multitasking System d. Multi Computer System
3. Computer Organization is concerned with
a. The way hardware components operate and connected together to form Computer
system.
4. Computer architecture is concerned with
a. The way hardware components operate and connected together to form Computer system.
5. In a computer system control information is transferred in
a. address and data buses c. address and control buses
b. address bus only d. control bus only
6. The part of the hardware of computer that controls the transfer of information between
a. computer and the outside word is
b. CPU b.Memory c.IOP d.Microprocessor
7. The functional entity of computer system that does not have physical existence is
a. CPU b.Hardware c.Software d.Logic gates.
8. Digital computers use
a. Decimal number system c. Binary number system
b. Octal number system d.Hexadecimal number system
9. A system software is
a. A program to solve particular problem of a user
b. A machine independent program
c. Operating system dependent program.
d. A program to make effective use of computer
10. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct?
a. Instructions in a stack-based organization take up less memory than general purpose
register organization instructions.
b. Programming is easier with stack-based organization compared to general
purpose register organization.
c. Programs tend to become shoter in stack-based organization compared to
general purpose register organization.
d. Instructions in a stack- based organization take up more memory than general
purpose register organization instructions.
11. Signed 1's complement representation of -14 with eight bits is
a. 11110001 b.01110001 c.10001110 d.00001110
12. 2's complement representation of -32 with eight bits is
a. 01100000 b.11100000 c.00100000 d.10010000

13. The 1' s complement of decimal number 21 in binary is
a. 01010 b.10101 c.11011 d.10100
14. Signed 2's complement representation of +14 with eight bits is
a. 10001110 b.11110010 c.00001110 d.11110001
15. 2's complement representation of 16 with eight bits is
a. 10001111 b.11110010 c.00001111 d.00010000
16. The complement of decimal number 85 is
a. 84 b.15 c.14 d.16
17. The complement of decimal number 65 is
a. 35 b.34 c.36 d.66
18. The 1's complement of binary number 01011011 is
a. 11011011 b.01100100 c.10100100 d.10111011
19. The 2's complement of binary number 01010001 is
a. 10101110 b.10101111 c.01001110 d.01010010
20. Signed magnitude representation of -7 with eight bits is
a. 10000111 b.00000111 c.00001111 d.10001000
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B B A C D D C C D A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A B A C D C A C B A
1. A Common bus system is connected with four registers of 4-bit capacity using binary
MUXs . The number of MUXs required is
a. 4 b.8 c.3 d.16
2. A Common bus system is connected with four registers of 4-bit capacity using binary
MUXs. The size of each MUX each is
a. 8 X 1 b.4 X 1 c.16 X 1 d.12 X 1
3. The function that allows register transfer under a predetermined condition is
a. a.Conditional variable b. Sample function
b. c. Control function d.RTL function
4. The state of the three-state gate when input is not connected to output is
a. 0 b.1 c.forbidden d.high impedence state
5. Register transfer denoting memory write operation is
a. a.DA M {[AR]} b.M {[AR]} DR c.M DR d.DR M
6. The operation executed on data stored in registers is called
a. RTL instruction b.Micro operation
b. c.Register logic d.Nano operation
7. The symbolic notation used to describe the micro operation transfers among
registers is called
a. a.Register Transfer language b. Micro operations
b. c. Nano operation d.Assembly language
8. The symbolic form used to denote transfer of content of register R1 into register R2 is
a.R2=R1 b.R1 >R2 c. c.R1 R2 d.
9. The arithmetic micro operation R3 R1+ +1 denotes
a. The sum of R1 and R2 transferred to R3

b. The sum of 1's complement of R1 and R2
c. The sum of 2's complement of R1 and R2
d. Subtraction of R2 from R1
10. The arithmetic micro operation denoting negation is
a. a.R3 R1+R2 b.R3 R1+R2 c.R2 +1 d.R1 R1+1
11. .The arithmetic micro operation R2 +1 denotes
a. The sum of R1 and R2 transferred to R3
b. 1's complement of R2
c. 2's complement of R2
d. Increment of R2
12. The arithmetic micro operation denoting subtraction of R3 from R1 is
a. a.R3 R1+R2 b.R1 R1+ +1 c.R2 +1 d.R3 +R3+1
13. The arithmetic micro operation denoting 2's complement is
a.R1 R1+1 b.R1 R1-1 c.R1 +1 d.R1
14. .The arithmetic micro operation denotes
a. The sum of R1 and R2 is transferred to R3
b. The difference of R1 and R2 is transferred to R3
c. Complements the content of R2
d. Increment the content of R1 by one
15. On executing the arithmetic micro operation R2
a. The sum of R1 and R2 is transferred to R3
b. The difference of R1 and R2 is transferred to R3
c. Content of R2 is Complemented
d. Content of R1 is incremented by one
16. The arithmetic micro operation denoting decrementing the content of R1 by one is
a. a.R1 R1+1 b.R1 R1-1 c.R1 +1 d.R1
17. The arithmetic micro operation denoting 1's complement is
a.R1 R1+1 b.R1 R1-1 c.R1 +1 d.R1
18. The logic micro operation used to selectively set bits is
a.F b.F B A c.F A - B d.F B B
19. The logic Micro operation that denotes clear is
a.F A B b.F A-B c.F A d.F 0
20. The logic micro operation that denotes AND is
a.F A B b.F c.F A- B d.F
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B B A C D D C C D A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A B A C D C A C B A
1. .The next address generator in a micro programmed control unit is referred to as

a. Address generator b.Sequencer
c . Instruction register d.Program counter
2. The process of transferring instruction code bits to an address in control memory
Where the routine is located is referred as
a. address translation b.Micro program execution
c.Mapping d.address generation

3. The address of next microinstruction is stored in
a. Control address Register (CAR) b.Sub routine register (SBR)
c. Instruction register (IR) d.Program counter (PC)
4. The function of control unit in digital computer is
a. to generate micro operations
b. to update micro operations
c. to initiate sequence of micro operations
d. to add new micro operations
5. If the control signals are generated using hardware with conventional logic design
techniques then the control unit is said to be
a. Micro programmed b.Hardwired c.Nano programmed d.Programmed
6. The memory that is part of control unit is
a. Main memory b.Auxiliary memory c.Control memory d.Virtual memory
7. Micro instructions are stored in
a. Main memory b.Secondary memory c.Control memory d.Virtual memory
8. The register used to store return address of sub routine is
a. Control address Register (CAR) b.Sub routine register (SBR)
c. Instruction register (IR) d.Program counter (PC)
9. The Pseudo-instruction that specifies first address of a micro program routine is
a. ORG b.PCTAR c.DRTAR d.CALL
10. The symbolic microinstructions that loads SBR with a new value is
a. JMP b. CALL c.RET d.MAP
11. Most computers based on RISC architecture
a. use micro programmed control unit b. use hardwired control unit
c.use nano programmed control unit d. does not require control unit
12. The program that translates symbolic micro program into its binary equivalent is
a. Compiler b. Assembler c. Interpreter d. Parser
13. A system uses a control memory of 1024 words of 32bits each. The microinstruction
Has three fields: Condition, Branch address, and Microperation fields. If the microoperation field
has 16 bits, how many bits are there in the branch address field and the condition field?
a. Branch address has 10 bits and condition field has 6 bits
b. Branch address has 6 bits and condition field has10 bits
c. Branch address has 8 bits and condition field has 8 bits
d. Branch address has 9 bits and condition field has 7 bits
14. Assume that the control memory is 24 bits wide. The microinstruction has two fields:
Address and Microoperation fields. If the microoperation has 13 bits, how many bits are
there in the address field and what is the size of the control memory?
a. Address field has 11 bits and the size of the control memory is 2048x24 bits.
b. Address field has 10 bits and the size of the control memory is 1024x24bits.
c. Address field has 11 bits and the size of the control memory is 1024x24bits.
d. Address has 24 bits and the size of the control memory is 2048x24bits.
15. Arrange the following with the increasing speed of execution.
a. Horizontal microinstruction, vertical microinstruction, hardwired implementation
b. Vertical microinstruction, horizontal microinstruction, hardwired implementation.
c. Hardwired implementation, vertical microinstruction, horizontal mincroinstruction.
d. Hardwired implementation, horizontal microinstruction, vertical microinstruction.
16. Arrange the following with the increasing logic of circuitry.
a. Horizontal microinstruction, vertical microinstruction, hardwired implementation
b. Vertical microinstruction, horizontal microinstruction, hardwired implementation.
c. Hardwired implementation, vertical microinstruction, horizontal mincroinstruction.
d. Hardwired implementation, horizontal microinstruction, vertical microinstruction.
17. Which of the following statement(s) is(are) correct ?

a. The horizontal microinstruction requires more bits than vertical microinstruction.
b. Changes can be easily accommodated in hardwired control unit than in microprogrammed
control unit.
c. Hardwired control unit is cheaper than microprogrammed control unit.
d. d.Vertical microinstruction canbe executed fascal than horizantal microinstruction
a. Variable microinstruction format increases complexity of microprogram control unit.
b. Horizontal micro programmed control unit requires additional circuitry for decoding.
c. Concurrency is fully exploited in vertical microprogrammed control unit than in
horizontal microprogrammed control unit.
d. Variable micro instruction format decreases complexity of microprogram control unit.
19. .Match the following:
i. microoperation i. Operations executed on data stored in registers
ii. microinstruction ii. Sequence of microinstructions
iii. microprogram iii. Sequence of microoperations
a.1:i, 2:iii, 3:ii
b. 1:i, 2:ii, 3:iii
c. 1:ii, 2:i, 3:iii
d. 1:ii, 2:iii, 3:i
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B C A C B C C B A B
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B B A A B A A A A
1. In performing addition and subtraction of signed 2's complement data, if an overflow

occurs
a. there will an erroneous results in AC
b. AC contains no erroneous result
c. AC becomes zero
d. Content of accumulator has no significance
2. In adding two signed magnitude numbers, parallel adder is implemented with
a. half adders b.full adders c.decodes d.encoders
3. Let A(0111) and B(1001) be two BCD numbers. The sum of A and B in BCD is
a. 0000 with a carry of 1 b.0110 with a carry of 1
b. c. 0110 with a carry of 0 d.0000 with a carry of 1
4. BCD adder performs sum in binary and converts the binary sum to valid BCD
representation whenever the binary sum is greater than 1001. Invalid binary sum is corrected by
a. adding binary 6 (0110) to the binary sum
b. adding binary 9 (1001) to the binary sum
c. subtracting binary 6 (0110) to the binary sum
d. subtracting binary 9 (1001) to the binary sum
5. The 9`s complement of a BCD number is obtained by complementing the bits in the
coded representation with a correction. The correction is
a. a.binary 10 (1010) is added to each complemented digit and the carry is discarded after
each addition
b. binary 6 (0110) is added before the digit is complemented
c. binary 10 (1010) is added before the digit is complemented
b. d.binary 6 ( 0110) is added to each complemented digit and the carry is discarded
6. What will be the quotient and remainder when is divided by in 2's complement
binary representation?
a. Quotient 00000; Remainder 10101 b.Quotient 00000; Remainder 01011
b. c. Quotient 10101: Remainder 00000 d.Quotient 01011; Remainder 00000
7. What will be the quotient and remainder when is divided by in 2's complement
representation?
a. Quotient 00000; Remainder 01011 b.Quotient 00000; Remainder 10101
b. c. Quotient 00000; Remainder 00000 d.Quotient 01011; Remainder 00000
8. The 9's complement of BCD number 0111 is
a. 1000 b.1001 c.0010 d.0011
9. 9.Consider register A holding decimal 8760 in BCD. The micro operation dshr A
(Decimal shift right register A) produces.
a. 1000 0111 0111 0000 b.0100 0011 1011 0000
b. c. 1100 0011 1011 0000 d.0000 1000 0111 0110
10. 10.Consider register A holding decimal 8760 in BCD. The micro operation dshl A
(Decimal shift left register A) produces.
a. 1000 0111 0110 0000 b.0000 1110 1100 0000
b. c. 0111 0110 0000 1000 d.0111 0110 0000 0000
11. The signed magnitude representation of in BCD is
a. 1001 0010 0111 0101 b.1111 0010 0111 0101
b. c. 0001 0010 0111 0101 d,0000 0010 0111 0101
12. The 9's complement representation of in BCD is
a. 1001 0111 0010 0100 b.1111 0111 0010 0100
b. c. 0001 0111 0010 0100 d.0001 1101 1000 1010
13. The 10's complement representation of in BCD is
a. 1001 0111 0010 0101 b.1111 0111 0010 0101
b. c. 0001 1000 0011 0110 d.0001 1101 1000 1011
14. Express the number in IEEE 32-bit floating-point format
a. 0 1000 0111 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
b. 0 0000 1000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
c. 0 0000 1000 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
d. 0 1000 0111 1100 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
15. Express the number -1/32 in IEEE 32-bit floating point format
a. 1 0111 1010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
b. 1 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
c. 1 0000 0001 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
d. 1 0111 1010 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
16. Use IEEE single-precision floating-point numbers to compute the (32) X(16) .
a. 0 0000 0111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
b. 0 1000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
c. 0 0111 0111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
d. 0 1000 1000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
17. Use IEEE single-precision floating-point number to compute (32) (16) .
a. 0 0000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
b. 0 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
c. 0 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
d. 0 1000 0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 000
18. Use IEEE single-precision floating-point numbers to compute (147.5) +(0.25) .
a. 0 1000 0110 0010 0111 1000 0000 0000 000

b. 0 1000 0110 0010 0111 0000 0000 0000 000
c. 0 0111 1101 0010 0111 1000 0000 0000 000
d. 0 0111 1101 0010 0111 0000 0000 0000 000
19. To perform multiplication of two signed 2's complemented numbers using Booths
algorithm, when the multiplier bit is identical to the previous multiplier bit
a. The multiplicand is subtracted from partial product
b. The multiplicand is added to the partial product
c. The multiplicand is multiplied with partial product
d. The partial product does not change
a. No overflow can occur in the addition operation of binary numberts
b. Division operation may never result in a quotient with an overflow in binary
division
c. An overflow can be detected in addition whenever the carry into the sign bit position
and the carry out of the sign bit position are not equal in binary addition
d. Over flow can occur in the multiplication operation of binary numbers
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A B B A A A A C D D
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A A A A A B A A D C
1. "Locality of Reference" is related to:

a.Register b.Cache c.Primary Memory d.Magnetic Tape
2. .Expand CAM
a.Cache Access Memory b.Call Access Mode
c.Contents Addressable Memory d.Cache Access Module
3. Associative Memory is like
a.Primary Memory b.Secondary Memory c.Cache Memory d.Auxiliary Memory
4. In the Memory Hierarchy, top to bottom (Registers to Tape)
a.Capacity Decreases b.Capacity Increases
c.Speed Increases d.Cost per bit Increases
5. In the Memory Hierarchy, top to bottom (Registers to Tape)
a.Cost per bit decreases b.Cost per bit Increases
c.Speed Increases d.Access Time Decreases
6. In the Memory Hierarchy, bottom to top (Tape to Registers)
a.Speed Decreases b.Access time Increases
c.Capacity Increases d.Capacity Decreases
7. In the Memory Hierarchy, top to bottom (Registers to tape)
a.Speed Increases b.Speed decreases
c.Cost per bit Increases d.Access time decreases
8. In the Memory Hierarchy, the following Memory has least capacity
9. .In the Memory Hierarchy, the following Memory has maximum Access time
10. In the Memory Hierarchy, the following Memory has least Access time

11. In the Memory Hierarchy, Speed of accessing is high for
12. In the Memory Hierarchy, Speed of accessing is low for
13. In the following which is accesed sequentially
14. In the Memory Hierarchy, Cost per bit is least for
15. In the Memory Hierarchy, the Cost per bit is most for
16. 512 x 8 ROM indicates
a.512 data, 8 address lines b.512 address, 8 data lines
c.520 address lines d.520 data lines
17. The Static RAM consists of
a.Capacitors b.Internal Flip Flops c.Internal Caches d.Filters
18. The Dynamic RAM consists of
a.Capacitors b.Internal Flip Flops c.Internal Caches d.Filters
19. The decoder used for decoding 512 x 8 ROM consists of how many input lines?
a.512 b.8 c.9 d.520
20. The Principal technology used for main Memory is based on
a.Semi conductor ICs b.Conductor ICs
c.Both Semi Conductor and Conductor ICs d.Using Insulator
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B C C B C D B A D A
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A D D D A B B A C A
1. The command used that causes the interface to receive an item of data from the peripheral
and places it in its Buffer register is
a.Control command b.Status command
c.Data output command d.Data input command
2. In Asynchronous data transfer, both sender and receiver accompany a control signal that
is:
a.Strobe b.Hand Shaking c.Two wire control d.Single wire control
3. The circuit which provides the interface between computer and similar interactive terminal is
a.USRP b.UART c.Flip Flop d.D-Flip Flop
4. The command used to test various status conditions in the interface and the peripheral is
a.Control command b.Status command
c.Data output command d.Data input command
5. In the following which mapping does not distinguish Memory address and I/O address
a.Memory mapped I/O b.Isolated I/O
c.Independent I/O d.Interrupt driven I/O
6. In the following which mapping uses different address space for Memory and I/O
a.Memory mapped I/O b.Isolated I/O

c.Independent I/O d.Interrupt driven I/O
7. The rate at which Serial information is transmitted and is equivalent to the data transfer in
bits per second is
a.Baud rate b.Bit rate c.Control rate d.Strobe rate
8. In Daisy chaining, the number of interrupt request lines is (are)
a.n b.2n c.only one d.changes
9. In the following, which is not priority interrupt method
a.Polling b.Daisy chaining c.Parallel priority d.Direct Memory Access
10. In the following, which is efficient
a.Programmed I/O b.Interrupt initiated I/O
c.Direct Memory Access d.All the equally efficient
11. In the following, which uses separate controller for data transfer
c.Direct Memory Access d.Memory mapped I/O
12. In Polling, the drawback is
a.Cost is more b.Complex hardware is required
c.Time consuming d.Maintenance is more
13. Daisy Chaining is
a.Software method b.Hardware method
c.Both software and hardware d.Neither software nor hardware
14. In the following, which is not a mode of transfer
15. In Priority interrupt when two devices interrupt the computer at the same, the computer
services the device
a.with larger length at first b.with shorter length at first
c.with highest priority at first d.with lowest priority at first
16. In Daisy chaining, device with highest priority is in
a.First position b.Middle position c.Last position d.Any position
17. Continuously monitoring I/O devices is done in
18. In the following, which is more time consuming
19. A block sequence consisting of a number of Memory words is transferred continuously
while a DMA controller is master of Memory Bus. This is
a.Polling b.Daisy Chaining c.Burst transfer d.Cycle Stealing
20. DMA controller transfer one data word at a time and transfers the control of the Bus to CPU.This
is
a.Polling b.Daisy Chaining c.Burst transfer d.Cycle Stealing
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D B B B A B A C B C
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C C B B C A A A C B
1. A Processor with Direct Memory Access capability that communicates with I/O devices is
a.Input Output Processor b.Data communication processor
c.Data communication programmer d.Input Output programmer
2. A processor that communicates with remote terminals over telephone and other communication
media in a serial fashion is called
a.Input Output Processor b.Data communication processor
c.Data communication programmer d.Input Output programmer
3. The I/O processor in IBM 370 computer is called
a. a.Router b.Channel c.Device d.Modem
4. Let the time taken to process a sub-operation in each segment be 20ns. Assume That the
pipeline has 4 segments and executes 100 tasks in sequence. What is the Speed up of pipeline
system?
a.8000ns b.3060ns c.2060ns d.6000ns
5. The architecture represents the organization of a computer containing a single control unit, a
processor unit and a memory unit.
a.SIMD b.MISD c.SISD d.MIMD
6. Total operations performed going through all the segments in the pipeline is called as
a.function b.process c.sequence d.task
7. One type of parallel processing that does not fit Flynn s classification is processing.
a.array b.vector c.multi d.pipeline
8. .The sequence of instructions read from memory constitutes
a.data stream b.execution stream
c.instruction stream d.process stream
9. Most of the multi processors and multi computer systems can be classified in category.
a.MISD b.SIMD c.SISD d.MIMD
10. The behavior of a pipeline can be illustrated with diagram
a.frequency-time b.timing c.space-time d.dataflow
11. As the number of tasks increases, the speed up is equal to the number of in the pipeline
a.tasks b.segments c.suboperations d.instructions.
12. Suppose the time delays of four segmentsare and the interface registers have a delay of
t=10ns. What must be the clock cycle time?
a.100ns b.120ns c.110ns d.130ns
13. Each entry in the BTB consists of the address of a previously executed instruction and the
instruction for that branch
a.branch, target b.branch, buffer c.target, branch d.buffer, branch
14. conflicts arise when an instruction depends on the result of a previous instruction
a.resource b.branch c.segment d.data dependency
15. When an overflow occurs, the mantissa of the sum or difference is shifted And exponent
incremented by
a.right, one b.left, one c.right, two d.left, two
16. A pipeline divides an arithmetic operation into suboperations forexecution in the pipeline
segments.
a.vector b.arithmetic c.instruction d.multiple
17. pipeline operates on a stream of instructions by overlapping phases of instruction cycle.
a.arithmetic b.instruction c.vector d.multiple
18. The instruction fetch segment can be implemented by means of a buffer
a.LIFO b.FIFO c.FILO d.LILO
19. The instruction stream queuing mechanism provides an efficient way for reducing
for reading instructions from memory
a.access time b.seek time c.overlap ping time d.processing time
20. Is a circuit that detects instructions whose source operands are destinations of instructions further
up in the pipeline.
a.operand forwarding b.interlocks
c.delayed load d.data decoder
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A B B C C D D C D C
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
B C A D A B B B A B
1. The algorithm gives the highest priority to the requesting device that has not used the bus for the
longest interval
a.polling b.LRU c.FIFO d.time slice
2. In bus , each data item is transferred during a time slice known to source and destination in
advance
a.serial b.parallel c.synchronus d.asynchronus
3. In serial arbitration procedure the device closest to the priority line is assigned priority
a.low b.high c.normal d.no
4. The algorithm allocates a fixed length time slice of bus time to each processor
5. In the scheme , requests are served in the order received
6. The sequence is normally programmable and as a result the selection priority can be altered under
program control
7. Out of the following which one is the hardware instruction to implement semaphore
a.flag b.turn c.spin d.test and set
8. To protect data from being changed simultaneously by 2 or more processors is called
a.protection b.access matrix c.hiding d.mutual exclusion
9. Is often used to indicate whether or not a processor is executing a critical section
a.monitor b.spin lock c.semaphore d.rendezbous
10. Is the common communication mechanism used between processors
a.FIFO b.semaphore c.shared memory d.message queue
11. multiprocessor system memory is distributed among the processors and there is no shared
memory for passing information
a.tightly coupled b.shared memory c.loosely coupled d.specialized
12. Is a program sequence that once begun must complete execution before another processor access
the same shared resource
a.critical section b.entry section c.mutual exclusion d.exit section
13. A scheme that allows writable data to exist in atleast one cache is a method that employees in its
compiler
a.distributed local table b.distributed global table
c.centralized local table d.centralized global table
14. A memory scheme is if the value returned on a load instruction is always the value given by the
latest store instruction with the same address
a.conflict b.coherence c.concurrent d.coupling
15. The bus controller that monitors the cache coherence problem is referred as
a.snoopy cache controller b.split cache controller

c.direct cache controller d.side cache controller
16. In mechanism both cache and main memory are updated with every write operation
a.write back b.write both c.write through d.write once
17. In chanism only the cache is updated and the location is marked so that it can be copied later into
main memory .
a.write back b.write both c.write through d.write once
18. The multiprocessor structure is a loosely coupled system with 2n processors.
a.crossbar b.multi port c.hypercube d.multistage
switch
19. A single common bus system is restricted to transfer processor at a time
a.one b.two c.many d.IOP
20. Multiprocessor system consists of a number of processors connected through a common path to a
memory unit .
a.common bus b.multiport c.crossbar d.hyp ercube
Answers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
B C B D C A D D C C
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C A D B A C A C A A
ESSAY TYPE
QUESTIONS
Computer Organization Essay Type Questions

1) a) With a neat diagram and example of an operation, explain clearly how the basic operations
are performed in a computer in terms of the processor and memory.
b)Derive the circuits for a 3-bit parity generator and 4-bit parity checker using an even-parity
bit.
2) Explain the following terms:
i) Clock rate ii) Instruction set iii) Processor clock iv) Pipelining
3) Derive the circuits for a 3-bit parity generator and 4-bit parity checker using an odd- parity bit.
4) With a neat diagram explain the bus structure of the computer and its significance.
5) Show the given decimal number 8620 in i) BCD ii) excess-3 code iii) 2421 code
iv)binarynumber.
6) Explain clearly the terms Computer Organization, Computer Architecture and Computer
System Design.
7) Explain about the sign magnitude and 2s compliment representations used for the fixed
point numbers. Which among the above is most preferred and why?
8) Define the excess -127 format of the exponent in IEEE standard single preci-sion oating point
number representation.
9) What are the basic trade of involved in choosing the sizes of the mantissa and exponent in a
oating point number representation?
10) .Distinguish between error detection and correction codes. What do you understand by odd
parity and even parity? What is odd function and even function? To calculate odd and even
parity values which functions can be used? Calculate Odd and even parity values for all
hexadecimal digits 0-9 and A-F?
11) Distinguish between multiple bus architecture and single bus architecture

1) Define a micro operation. Explain clearly at least four logic micro operations with examples.
With an example clearly explain the following address modes:
a. Direct ii) Indirect iii) Relative iv) Indexed.
2) What is a Register stack? Explain with relevant illustrations and examples.
3) List the steps needed to execute the machine instruction Add LOCA, R0 In terms of transfers
between the components and some simple control commands. Assume that the instruction itself
is stored in the memory at location INSTR and that this address is initially in register PC.
4) Compare Multiprocessors and multicomputers.

5) Explain about direct, indirect, register direct, register indirect, immediate, implicit, relative,
index, and base address mode of addressing. Is there a necessity for many addressing modes? Is
the instruction size influenced by the number of addressing modes which a processor supports?
State whether the number of addressing modes will be more in RISC or CISC?
6) Write about the Memory stack with relevant illustrations and examples.
7) Explain about the address sequencing with neat illustration.
8) Explain the difference between a microprocessor and a microprogram? Is it possible to
design a microprocessor without a microprogram? Are all microprogrammed computers also
microprocessors?

1) Diferentiate between micro programming and nano programming.
2) Explain the process of adding a new machine instruction to a processor in-
struction set.
3) With a neat diagram explain the following with respect to Address sequencing:
i) Conditional branching ii) Mapping of Instruction iii) Subroutines.
4) Explain about the Microinstruction format with an example
5) Define mapping process. Explain it with an example.
6) Explain about conditional branching.
7) Define the following:
i) Microoperation ii) Microinstruction iii) Microprogram iv) Microcode
8) Write about the design of a control unit.
9) Write about the Control memory in detail.
10) Compare and contrast hardwired control and micro-programmed control. Is it possible to
have a hardwired control associated with a control memory?
11) Draw the general block diagram of a micro sequencer and also explain the inputs and outputs
along with their functioning.
12) Explain the variety of techniques available for sequencing of microinstructions based on the
format of the address information in the microinstruction.
i) How do you map micro operation to a micro instruction address
13) Discuss in detail the design of control unit.

14) Hard wired control unit is faster than micro programmed control unit. Justify this statement.

1) Discuss how addition and subtraction of signed magnitude numbers can be
done?
2) Describe the hardware for signed 2'S complement addition and subtraction?
3) Perform the arithmetic operations given below with binary and negative numbers in signed-2s
complement representation. Use seven bits to accommodate each number together with its sign.
a. (-53) + (-80) ii) (-53) - (+80)
4) Explain the decimal division algorithm flowchart with a suitable example.
5) Explain about the normalization and biased exponent.
6) Explain about positive overow and negative overow condition of oating
point numbers
7) Draw and explain in detail the hardware implementation of the signed-magnitude addition
and subtraction.
8) Explain the decimal multiplication algorithm with a suitable example.
9) Explain about hardware for Booth's algorithm.
10) What are the limits of IEEE oating point representation?
11) Explain the algorithm of the hardware for addition and subtraction operations.
12) Explain the binary numbers multiplication process using Booths algorithm in a step-by-step
manner with a suitable example. Assume 5-bit registers that hold signed numbers.
13) Explain the decimal division algorithm with a suitable example.

1) The logical address space in the computer system consists of 128 segments.Each segment can
have up to 32 pages of 4K words in each. Physical memory consists of 4K blocks of 4K words
In each. Formulate the logical and physical address formats
2) Give the binary number of the logical address formulated in (a) for segment
36 and word number 2000 in page 15
3) Write short notes on:
i. Data transfer instructions
ii. Data manipulation instructions
4) Make a list of all virtual addresses in decimal that will cause a page fault if
used by the CPU.
5) A magnetic disk system has the following parameters:
Tx = average time to position the magnetic head over a track
R = rotation speed of disk in revolutions per second
Nt = number of bits per track
Ns = number of bits per sector

Calculate the average time Ta that it will take to read one sector
6) A digital computer has a memory unit of 64K * 16 and a cache memory of 1K
words. The cache uses direct mapping with a block size of 4 words.
i. How many bits are there in the tag, index, block and word fields of the
address format?
ii. How many bits are there in each word of cache and how are they divided
in to functions? Include a valid bit.
7) Explain about direct mapping of cache memory?
8) what is cache coherence, and why is it important in shared memory multiprocessor systems?
How can the problem be resolved with a snoopy cache controller?
9) consider a bus topology In which two processors communicate through a buffer in shared
memory. When one processor withes to communicate with other processor it puts the
information in the memory bufer and sets a ag. Periodically, the other processor checks the ags
to determine if it has information to receive. What can be done to ensure proper synchronization
and to minimizethe time between sending and receiving the information.
10) A digital computer has a memory unit of 64K x 16 and a cache memory of 1K words. The
cache uses direct mapping with a block size of four words.
a. How many bits are there in the TAG, INDEX, BLOCK and WORD fields of the address
format?
b. How many bits are there in each word of cache, and how are they divided into functions?
Include a valid bit.
11) Explain how the associative memory page table is used for effective storage utilization.
12) A block-set associative cache consists of a total of 64 blocks divided into 4-block sets. The
main memory contains 4096 blocks, each consisting of 128 words.
a. How many bits are there in a main memory address?
b. How many bits are there in each of the TAG, SET and WORD fields?
c. Explain how page replacement management is handled in a virtual memory system.
13) Compare and contrast Asynchronous DRAM and Synchronous DRAM.
14) Explain the following applications:
a. ROM ii) PROM iii) EPROM iv) EEPROM

1) What is a priority interrupt? Explain about the Daisy-chaining priority in detail.
2) Explain the bit-oriented protocol for the serial communication.
3) .Explain the following:

a) Direct Memory Access.
b) Isolated versus memory-mapped I/O
c) CPU IOP communication.
4) Explain the following terms
a) Locality of reference
b) Magnetic disks
c) Match logic
d) Segmented-page mapping
5) Explain Isolated versus Memory-Mapped I/O
6) Explain Bit-Oriented Protocol
7) Define baud rate?
8) Explain Character-Oriented Protocol
9) What is Strobe control? Explain?
10) What is the di_erence Isolated I/O and memory mapped I/O ? what are the
advantages and disadvantages of each?
11) Give at least 6 status conditions for the setting of individual bits in the status
register of an asynchronous communication interface
12) .Explain the following
(a) Programmed I/O
(b) Interrupt-Initiated I/O
13) Differentiate between the following:
i) I/O versus Memory bus ii) Isolated versus Memory-mapped I/O
14) Write about Input-Output processor (IOP).
1) Draw a space time diagram for a 4-segment pipe line showing the time it takes
to process 6 tasks.
2) Explain 3 segment instruction pipeline?
3) Explain SIMD array processor.
4) Explain the instruction pipeline in detail with an example.
5) What is Vector processing? Explain how vector processing is related to supercomputer.

6) Explain about parallel processing
7) Explain about RISC pipe line
8) Consider a computer with four oating point pipeline processors. Suppose that each processor
uses a cycle time of 20ns. How long will it take to perform 200 oating point operations? Is there
any di_erence if the same 200 operations are carried out using a single pipeline processor with a
cycle time of 10ns?
9) Draw the pipeline for oating point addition and subtraction using 4-segment Pipeline
10) With the help of the suitable example explain in detail about the RISC pipeline.
11) Explain what is meant by memory interleaving with respect to vector processing.
12) Explain USB architecture.
UNIT-VIII: MULTI PROCESSORS.

1) Describe the following terminology associated with multiprocessors.
i. Critical section
ii. Hardware lock
iii. Semaphore
iv. test-and-set instruction
2) Explain multistage switching network?
3) Explain dynamic arbitration algorithms
4) Design the circuit which can be used to transfer data from any register to any other
register out of four 4-bit registers A, B, C, D which uses RS ip ops.
5) Define a multiprocessor. Explain clearly the characteristics of multiprocessors.
& Write about cache coherence.
6) What is a multiprocessor? Differentiate between tightly coupled and loosely coupled
multiprocessiors with examples.
7) Explain about the Interprocessor arbitration.
8) Write about multistage switching network with suitable illustrations.
9) Explain the various dynamic arbitration algorithms used for the interprocessor arbitration.
10) What are Interconnection structures? Explain the scheme Crossbar switch in detail.
11) Write about the Interprocessor arbitration.
12) What are the different interconnection structures used in multiprocessors?
.
ASSIGNMENT
QUESTIONS
Computer Organization Assignment Questions

1. Explain the Bus structure?
2. Explain the functional units of a Computer?
3. Write differences between Multi Processors & Multi Computers?
4. Write Basic operational Concepts of Computer?
5. Explain different data types.
6. Explain error detection codes.
7. Explain fixed point, integer, floating point representation.

1. Write about Instruction cycle?
2. Write about all micro operations?
3. Describe about RTL?
4. Explain bus system for 4 registers.
5. Explain instruction format, addressing modes of a general processor.

1. Define control unit & also write all the micro operations of CU?
2. Write differences between hardwired control, and micro programmed control?
3. Write about Control Unit?

1. A)1001 + 1011 B) 1001 0101
2. Using Booths algorithms multiply 4 & 5
3. Using division algorithm divide 21 &4
4. Write about decimal arithmetic unit & operations?
5. Explain floating point arithmetic operation.

1. Write about memory devices?
2. Write differences between RAM, ROM?
3. Describe about Associative Memory?
4. Describe about cache Memory & also mapping methods of cache?
5. Explain about virtual Memories?
6. Explain the terms a) Associative mapping b) Direct Mapping c) Set associative mapping

1. Write about IO devices?
2. Explain about DMA?
3. Write about Serial communication, parallel communication?
4. Discuss about PCI bus?
5. Explain peripheral devices.
Computer Organization Assignment Questions

1. Describe about Pipelining?
2. Explain about parallel processing?
3. Write about vector processing, array processors?

1. Write about characteristics of multiprocessors?
2. Write about interconnection structures?
3. Explain about inter processor arbitration?
4. Explain about cache coherence.
****THE END****

Analog Communications Course Materials and Lecture Plans

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Analog Communications Course Materials and Lecture Plans

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CONTENTS

STUDENTS SEMI NAR TOPICS

UNIT-3: SSB MODULATION

54 Animations of FM de modulation 1 OHP NPTEL

Understand the basic structure of a communication system

UNIT: II DSB MODULATION

UNIT: III SSB MODULATION

State frequency domain description

UNIT: IV ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS

List basic concepts of angle modulation

Define Constant Average Power

UNIT: V ANGLE MODULATION METHODS

Describe generation of FM Waves

UNIT: VII RECEIVERS

Define a Radio Receiver

UNIT: VIII PULSE MODULATION

List types of Pulse modulation

OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS

16. The unit of Ka is ___

a)Amax +Amin/Amax+Amin. b) Amax + Amin / Amax.

UNIT-II: DSB-SC MODULATION

(a)AM-FC (b)PM (c)DSB-SC (d)FM

2. The transmission Band width of DSB is ___

1) c 2)b 3)Point to 4) c 5)c(t) m(t) 6) b 7)a

2. For Television signal broad casting the following modulation is useful

3. For generation of SSB which method is very useful

4. SSB is used for ___ communication

a)5 KHz b) 10KHz c) 15 KHz d) 20 KHz

UNIT-IV: ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS

15. Then the modulation index is ___

a) it gives an excellent noise free output b) requries no limitter

5. The output SNR of AM with modulation index m is ___

UNIT-VIII: PULSE MODULATION

(a) 2 fm (b) 3 fm (c) 2.5 fm (d) 1.2 fm

STATE TRUE OR FALSE

ESSAY TYPE QUESTIONS

6. a) Write AM equation. Define modulation index, and percentage modulation.

b) Define under-modulation and over-modulation. Explain why over modulation is

b) An AM transmitter has un-modulated carrier power of 10 KW. It can be modulated by

UNIT-II: DSB MODULATION

3. a) Explain about the quadrature null effect of coherent detector.

4. a) Explain the DSB-SC generation by balanced modulator using diodes.

5. Explain the operation of Costas loop for demodulating DSB-SC waves.

8. a) Explain the DSB-SC generation by balanced modulator using FET amplifiers.

9. a) Classify radio transmitters in detail.

UNIT-III: SSB MODULATION

2. A synchronous detection of SSB signal shows phase and frequency discrepancy.

4. a) Why VSB system is widely used for TV broadcasting - Explain?

6. a) Why SSB transmission is the preferred than DSB-SC?

7. a) Explain the Third method of generating SSB modulated waves.

8. a) Explain the envelope detection of VSB wave plus carrier.

UNIT-IV: ANGLE MODULATION CONCEPTS

1. a) Describe generation of FM carrier by Transistor reactance modulator with necessary diagrams.

2. a) FM Give the procedure to determine the effective bandwidth of an signal.

UNIT-V: ANGLE MODULATION METHODS

2. Explain demodulation of FM signal with the help of PLL.

4. a) Explain the operation of limiter circuit in fm demodulation.

5. a) Explain about FM generation using transistor reactance tube modulator.

6. a) Why are limiters and preemphasis filters used in FM radio.

7. a) Classify radio transmitters in detail.

2. Explain how S/N ratio is a figure of merit incase of performance of a communication

5. Compare noise performance of PM and FM system.